JP2009291435A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for increasing excitement and enjoyment of a game by improving the fun of a performance relating to re-variable display. <P>SOLUTION: When performing pseudo continuation by a variation pattern for temporarily stopping a pseudo continuation chance spot and then executing re-variation, after temporarily stopping a non pseudo continuation change spot, a slide performance is executed to the symbol combination to change it to the pseudo continuation chance spot, and the re-variation is executed. Further, corresponding to the number of times of the pseudo continuation, the ratio of selecting whether a jackpot is to be a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot is made different. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, and a slot machine, and in particular, includes a variable display unit having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a display result of identification information derived and displayed on the variation display section becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  As what is generally known as this type of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine has a plurality of variable display areas for variably displaying each of a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified. Specifying advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) provided with a variable display unit (for example, an image display device) There was something that controlled to the gaming state (big hit gaming state). In such a gaming machine, as the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (two round big hit gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (which is advantageous to the player over the first specific gaming state) Some game machines controlled to one type of specific game state (15 rounds big hit game state).

  As such a gaming machine, in the variable display unit, the identification information that becomes a non-specific display result is temporarily stopped in all the variable display units until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable information is displayed. There is a gaming machine that is configured so that a re-variation display effect can be performed in which re-variation for re-execution of variation display is performed once or a plurality of times after all of the variation display sections are performed.

In addition, for a gaming machine that performs such a re-variable display effect, the probability that a re-variable display is performed becomes higher when the re-variable display is performed, and the re-variable display is not performed. In accordance with the probability of entering the specific gaming state, the determination as to whether or not the re-variable display is performed and the number of times of performing the re-variable display are determined so that the probability of entering the specific gaming state increases as the number of times increases. There was a thing (patent document 1).
JP 2007-21094 A (paragraph number 0088)

  However, in a conventional gaming machine that determines the number of times a re-variable display is performed according to the probability of entering a specific gaming state, the player's consciousness during the variable display confirms how many times the re-variable display is performed. It tends to concentrate. As a result, in such a conventional gaming machine, the player is less interested in the production related to the type of the specific gaming state having the same importance as that of the specific gaming state during the fluctuation. The player's sense of expectation with respect to the type of state becomes difficult to speak, and the production becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and improving the interest of the game.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A plurality of variable display areas (“left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (production symbols) each identifiable. When the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), the player is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state),
Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state and the first specific gaming state (two round big hit state (surprise big hit)) Predetermining means (game control microcomputer) for deciding which of the two specific gaming states (15 rounds big hit state (normal big hit, probable big hit)) before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed 560, S62 and S73 in FIG.
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, specific game state control means (game control microcomputer 560, FIG. 15) for controlling the variable winning means to change to the first state at the determined number of times in the specific game state. 33 S305 to S307),
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, the special display result that temporarily becomes a non-specific display result is temporarily suspended from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed in the variable display unit. After that, a re-variable display pattern (variable pattern including a pseudo-continuous effect) for performing re-variable display for executing re-variation for executing the variable display again in one or more times in all the variable display areas is predetermined. A variation display pattern selection means (game control microcomputer 560, S101 to S105 in FIG. 38) for selecting one variation display pattern from a plurality of types of variation display patterns (variation patterns) of the identification information;
Fluctuation display executing means (production control microcomputer 100, S801 to S803 in FIG. 113) for executing fluctuation display of the identification information based on the fluctuation display pattern selected by the fluctuation display pattern selection means,
The re-variable display pattern temporarily stops non-special display results other than the special display results (temporary stop symbols other than the pseudo consecutive chances such as reach formation symbols) (FIG. 51 (B)). The special display result is temporarily stopped by changing the identification information temporarily stopped in a part of the variable display area constituting the display result (sliding and changing the right temporary stop symbol) ((C) of FIG. 51). (E in FIG. 51) includes a variation display pattern for executing the re-variation (pseudo-series variation) (as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16), as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. , Super PA4-6-1, Super PA5-3-1, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB4-3-1 and Super PB5-3-1 are changed in the production control microcomputer 100. 115 of S519~S522, S1565~S566A in FIG 120, S840A～S858 of Figure 124 and Figure 125, the S869A～S869F, a variation pattern of the first slip after chance th temporary stop demonstration),
When the variation display pattern selecting means selects the second variation display pattern as the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern selection means selects the first specified game state as the first specified game state according to the number of times the second variation display pattern is selected. The variable display pattern is selected so that the ratio controlled by the gaming state is different (in the processing of the gaming control microcomputer 560, steps S91 to S105, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. When it is a big hit, it is a super PA4-3, super PA4-6-1, super PA4-6-2, super PA5-3-1, super PA5 which is a variation pattern of pseudo continuous use of three times, four times or five times. -3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1 Other determines the super PB5-3-2, when the two rounds 突確 jackpot determines a variation pattern of the pseudo continuous use of variation two or three special PG1-3 or special PG1-4).

  According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern including the re-variable display pattern is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the specific gaming state. In the re-variable display pattern, the temporary display of the special display result, which is a non-specific display result, is temporarily suspended until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable information is displayed. A re-variation display is performed in which re-variation is executed once or multiple times. In the re-variable display pattern, non-special display results other than the special display result are temporarily stopped, and the identification information temporarily stopped in a part of the variable display area constituting the non-special display result is changed. The special display result is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. In this way, by temporarily changing the identification information temporarily suspended in a part of the variable display area constituting the non-special display result, the special display result is temporarily stopped, and the re-variation is executed. Even when the non-special display result is stopped, it may be changed to the special display result and re-variation may be executed. Can improve the interest of Further, when the re-variation display pattern is selected as the variation display pattern, the first specific gaming state and the first specific gaming state are selected as the specific gaming state according to the number of times of re-variation execution in the selected re-variation display pattern. Since the variation display pattern is selected so that the ratio controlled to the first specific gaming state out of the second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state is different, Based on the correlation with the type of the specific gaming state, not only the occurrence of the specific gaming state but also the type of the specific gaming state can give the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the production related to a particular type of gaming state. As a result, the player's expectation for the type of the specific gaming state is improved due to the relevance display, and the player's expectation can be easily raised. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) The re-variable display pattern temporarily stops the identification information (reach formation symbol) forming the reach state as the non-special display result ((B) in FIG. 51, S1566 in FIG. 12).

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a re-variable display pattern, the reach state is reached as a non-special display result for which identification information temporarily suspended in a part of the variable display area constituting the non-special display result is changed. Since the identification information that forms the game is temporarily stopped, based on the player's expectation for the identification information that forms the reach state, it is possible to further improve the fun of the presentation related to the re-variable display and further enhance the interest of the game. Can do.

  (3) When the change display pattern selection unit selects the re-change display pattern as the change display pattern, the change display pattern selection unit selects the part of the change when the re-change display is executed in the same re-change display pattern. Depending on the number of times that the special display result is temporarily stopped by changing the temporarily stopped identification information in the display area, the ratio that is controlled to the first specific gaming state as the specific gaming state is The variable display patterns are selected to be different (in the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip, the ratio of 15 round hits is different between the first and second slips: the fourth modification).

  According to such a configuration, even when the number of re-variation executions in the re-variation display pattern is the same, temporary stop of the special display result by changing the temporarily stopped identification information in some of the variable display areas The variable display pattern is selected so that the ratio of control to the first specific gaming state as the specific gaming state varies depending on the number of times that is executed. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution but also to what kind of effect the re-variation is performed during the variation display by the re-variation display pattern. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

(4) Reach determination means (for game control) for determining whether or not to change the variation display state of the identification information to a predetermined reach state when it is determined by the prior determination means that the specific gaming state is not controlled. Microcomputer 560, S95 to S98),
Fluctuation display pattern type determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S101 to S102) for determining any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types of the identification information based on the determination result by the reach determination means. ,
The fluctuation display pattern selection means selects a fluctuation display pattern from the fluctuation display patterns included in the fluctuation display pattern type determined by the fluctuation display pattern type determination means (S102),
The variable display pattern type determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types including the re-variable display pattern in response to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determining means. (One of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected in the processing of S100, and the variation pattern type is determined in the processing of S101 to S103. Non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1 shown in FIG. -3, a non-reach PA 1-5 including a “pseudo-ream” may be selected (see FIG. 26))
The variable display pattern selection means is determined not to reach the reach state by the reach determination means, and the variable display pattern type including the re-variable display pattern is determined by the variable display pattern type determination means. Correspondingly, a non-reach variation display pattern for executing the re-variation display can be selected (after the variation pattern determination table including the variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous” is selected, the processing of S104 and S105 is performed. Execute).

  According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern type determining unit and the variable display pattern selecting unit make different determinations depending on whether or not the reach determining unit determines to reach the reach state. The types of variable display patterns can be increased without increasing the burden. Further, even when the reach is not reached, the re-variation effect is executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. Further, since the means for determining the variable display pattern is divided into the variable display pattern type determining means and the variable display pattern selecting means, for example, the classification determination distribution in the variable display pattern type determining means is not changed. In addition, it is possible to change the design for changing the variable display pattern by simply changing the distribution of the variable display pattern selection in the variable display pattern selection means. it can.

(5) Notifying means (up effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, lower effect LED 85c, movable member 78) for performing predetermined notification when the re-variable display is executed;
When the variable display execution means executes the re-variable display, a plurality of types of notification modes (a plurality of types of effects patterns as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11) are provided as notification effects to be notified by the notification means. In addition, a notification effecting means (the effect control microcomputer 100, S520 in FIG. 115, S845 in FIG. 124) for executing the notification effect in the notification mode selected from the inside,
The notification effect means performs a notification effect (patterns a, b, and c in FIGS. 6 (A), (B), and (C)) performed in a notification mode in which any one of the plurality of types of notification modes is selected. And a notification effect (pattern d in FIG. 6D) performed in a notification mode in which any one of the plurality of types of notification modes is selected and combined.
The notification effect executed by the notification effect means has a different degree of reliability in which the specific gaming state is obtained after the notification effect is executed according to the selected notification mode (as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31). Non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super PA3-6-2, super PB3-3-1, and super PB3- Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, which can be selected for a big hit for the group of 3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, Super PB5-3-2 and Special PG1-3 groups are more AB, AC BC, the probability of those re-change performance of different aspects such as the ABC has been combined appears high.).

  According to such a configuration, when performing re-variable display, as a notification effect for performing notification by the notification means, a notification effect performed in a notification mode in which any one of a plurality of types of notification modes is selected; A notification effect performed in a notification mode in which any one of a plurality of types of notification modes is selected and combined can be executed, and according to the selected notification mode, a specific gaming state is obtained after the notification effect is executed. Since the degree of reliability is different, the combination of the selection of the notification mode in the notification effect and the reliability that becomes the specific game state after the notification effect is executed further enriches the variation of the effect when the re-variable display is performed In addition to being able to do this, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of the re-variable display.

  (6) The re-variable display pattern is set with different reliability for the specific gaming state according to the variable display area for changing the temporarily stopped identification information (the slip effect is generated for the left temporary stopped symbol). The ratio of the big hit is different between when the right temporary stop symbol is performed and when the slip effect is performed with respect to the right temporary stop symbol: second modified example).

  According to such a configuration, the re-variation display pattern is set differently depending on the variation display area in which the temporarily stopped identification information is changed. It is possible to attract the player's attention as to which change display reach is used to change the temporarily stopped identification information in the change display using the re-change display pattern. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

(7) After a start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or winning a game ball to the second start winning opening 14) is satisfied, a variable display start condition (for example, the number of stored memories is Each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed in a state in which the variable display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed). Fluctuation display unit (effects) having a plurality of variable display areas (“left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (effect symbols). A display device 9), and when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), control to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player , Predetermined special gaming state A game machine (pachinko game) that is controlled to a special game state (probability change state) advantageous to a player different from the specific game state when the occurrence condition is satisfied (when it is determined that the probability change big win (big win game state)) Machine 1),
A holding storage means (game control microcomputer of the seventh embodiment) for holding and storing data relating to a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied until the start condition is satisfied; ,
Whether or not the data stored in the holding storage means is controlled to the specific gaming state based on the display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition before the start condition based on the establishment of the start condition is satisfied. In addition, the specific gaming state is classified into a first specific gaming state (2 round big hit state (surprise big hit)) and a second specific gaming state (15 round big hit state ( A pre-determining means (a microcomputer for game control of the seventh embodiment) for deciding whether the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed,
Specific game state control means for controlling the variable winning means to change to the first state by the determined number of times in the specific game state based on the determination by the prior determination means (for game control of the seventh embodiment) Microcomputer),
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, the variable display unit includes a variable display pattern (a variable pattern including an effect of continuous notification) that stops a special display result (second continuous notification chance) that becomes a non-specific display result. Fluctuation display pattern selection means (a microcomputer for effect control according to the seventh embodiment) for selecting one variation display pattern from a plurality of predetermined variation display patterns of the identification information;
Based on the variation display pattern selected by the variation display pattern selection unit, variation display execution means for executing the variation display of the identification information (production control microcomputer of the seventh embodiment),
The variable display pattern selection means derives a display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state when the prior determination means determines to control to the specific gaming state. Special fluctuation display patterns (super PA3-3-1, PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1) for stopping and displaying the special display result (continuous notice chance) for a plurality of fluctuation displays before being displayed. , Super PA3-6-2, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2, Changes such as those at the time of each change of the pseudo-continuity in Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1 and Super PB5-3-2 Select the variation pattern) for displaying,
The special variation display pattern temporarily stops a non-special display result other than the special display result (a stop symbol other than a continuous notice chance such as a reach formation symbol), and a part of the variation constituting the non-special display result The identification information change variation pattern (super PA3-3-1 and super PA3-6) for stopping and displaying the special display result by changing the identification information temporarily stopped in the display area (sliding and changing the right temporary stop symbol). -1, fluctuation pattern such as the first short fluctuation time state of super PA4-6-1, super PA5-3-1, super PB3-3-1, super PB4-3-1 and super PB5-3-1) Including
The variation display pattern selection means selects the special variation display pattern for a plurality of variation displays before the display result of the variation display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state is derived and displayed. When the special display result is stopped and displayed, the variable display pattern is selected so that the ratio of the specific game state to be controlled to the first specific game state varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display ( In the processing of the game control microcomputer 560 and steps S91 to S105, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5 which are fluctuation patterns 3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1 or Super PB5-3-2 The special PG1-3 or the special PG1-4, which is a fluctuation pattern for two or three fluctuations, is determined).

  According to such a configuration, the special display result is stopped and displayed for a plurality of variable displays before the display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state is derived and displayed. A variable display pattern is selected. In the special variable display pattern, non-special display results other than the special display result are temporarily stopped, and the special display result is changed by changing the identification information temporarily stopped in some variable display areas that constitute the non-special display result. Includes an identification information change variation pattern for stopping display. In this way, the non-special display result is stopped by changing the identification information that is temporarily stopped in some of the variable display areas that make up the non-special display result. Even if it is done, it may be changed to the special display result, so the production will be unexpected, so the fun of the production related to the variation display with the special variation display pattern will be improved, and the entertainment of the game will be improved it can. Further, when the special variation display pattern is selected as the variation display pattern, the first specific gaming state and the first specific gaming state are selected as the specific gaming state according to the number of executions of the variation display in which the special display result is stopped and displayed. Since the variable display pattern is selected so that the ratio controlled to the first specific game state out of the second specific game state advantageous to the player over the specific game state is different, the change in the special variable display pattern Based on the correlation between the number of times of execution and the type of the specific gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the type of the specific gaming state is selected as well as the occurrence of the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player more interested in the production related to what kind of specific gaming state. As a result, the player's expectation on the type of the specific gaming state is improved and the player's expectation can be easily beaten due to the relevance to the variable display of the non-special display results that are stopped and displayed multiple times. Further, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the variable display in the special variable display pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine or other gaming machines such as a slot machine. A variation display unit having a plurality of variation display areas for variably displaying the type of identification information, and when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variation display unit is a predetermined specific display result Any gaming machine may be used as long as the gaming machine is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. An outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing a variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device (variable display unit) that performs variable display of effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified. In the effect symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decoration (effect) identification information of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, but the position of the symbol display area 9A is not fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Alternatively, the three areas of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small indicator is formed in, for example, a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition (that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13) or the second start condition (the game ball is the first one) After the 2 start winning opening 14 is established), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed) In the absence of the game and the big hit game is not executed), the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. Data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as hold storage data until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later.

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the start condition of the variable display is established in the order in which the start winnings occur regardless of the winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the winnings to the second starting winning port 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning at the first start winning opening 13, the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes 0.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the time of the first special symbol change display time by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display unit 8b, during the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  In addition, a 1st decorative design and a 2nd decorative design may be named generically. Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the fluctuation display of the first decoration symbol on the first decoration symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the second decorative symbol on the second decoration symbol display 9b are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the jackpot on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. In other words, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. It has been. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14 (it is easy to start winning), and the player is in a state (first state) that is advantageous to the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. Further, the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in a closed state is a disadvantageous state (second state) for the player, and the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is set higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13. May be. Specifically, the space between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further narrowed, nails are densely arranged around the first starting winning opening 13, or the first start winning opening The nail arrangement around 13 is made difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13. It may be.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is made to recall the jackpot. The combination of effect symbols as a specific display result is stopped and displayed.

  Further, a star-shaped movable member 84 that rotates is provided on the upper side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9. The movable member 84 is a member that is provided at a position that is visible to the player, such as a decorative portion around the effect display device 9, and that operates in accordance with a predetermined effect such as a movable member notice described later. More specifically, the movable member 84 is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 88 and is driven and rotates as the motor 88 rotates. The movable member 84 is operated when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, such as when a pseudo-series effect is executed.

  In the decorative part around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided on the right side. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c execute a display effect related to each re-variation period (including the first variation period) during a single variation period as a specific effect. Blinks when an effect is performed). Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is a variation within the time determined for one start-up prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one start-up prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, and right). In general, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as quasi-continuous change times), the greater the reliability (when the big hit The ratio of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is large, the ratio of the ratio that is jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability that is the jackpot) is increased with respect to all selection ratios including the case of being out of place. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In addition, when a pseudo continuous change is executed, a reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R and the symbol is not stopped in the inner symbol display area 9C. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). Further, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the generation ratio of the effect may be changed depending on the number of re-variation repeated executions (the number of pseudo continuous variations). For example, when the number of re-variation executions reaches 2 (pseudo continuous fluctuations 3 times), “reach determination” is reached, and when the number of re-variation executions reaches 3 (pseudo continuous fluctuations 4 times), “super reach determination”. Further, when the number of executions of re-variation reaches 4 times (5 times of pseudo-continuous variation number), it may be “big hit fixed”. For example, the odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and the characteristic numbers that are not double-eyed, such as “1”, “2”, “3”, are given to the player as a pseudo-ream. Can appeal. Further, the pseudo-ream can be appealed when temporarily stopping and / or re-changing. Further, a step-up notice as described later may be executed even at the time of re-variation during “pseudo continuous variation”. That is, when the re-variation is executed three times (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is four times), the step-up notice can be executed four times. In that case, it is possible to inform the player that the reliability is higher by increasing the number of step-ups as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations progresses. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the step-up notice is executed at the time of re-variation during the “pseudo-series variation” among the above-described pseudo-series effects.

  Here, the step-up notice is a kind of notice that is executed during the change display of the symbol executed for one starting prize, and in particular, the form of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) Indicates a notice that changes (steps up) into multiple stages. In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability. Many of the notices are for notifying that a big hit or reach will be made, but the target for notifying a probable big hit, a specific reach, or a promotion to a probable change may also change. For example, it may be “reach confirmation” when going to step 3, “super reach confirmation” when going to step 4, and “big hit confirmation” when going to step 5. The change in the notice mode (step-up) is not only a case where different characters appear in order as in the present embodiment, but a step-up due to a change in the shape or color of one character. But you can. In other words, if it is possible to recognize that the state of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player has changed stepwise, it can be said that the step-up notice is not limited to the above example. . Here, a character is a video showing a living thing such as a human being, an animal, and a plant, and something other than a living thing such as some symbol, character, and symbol (an image showing these as they are and an image using these as motifs) Any image can be included as long as the player can recognize the image as a different image from the design (effect design).

  In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls (prize balls) determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. It has been. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Further, even when the symbol variation time is shortened (the gaming state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened), which is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a central position on the front side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be used. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display unit 9a displays the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays the variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the change display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). ) Is used as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, effect control means (effect control microcomputer 100 described later) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. When the command is received, the display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b for displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and the display control of the effect display device 9 for displaying the dynamic symbols in a variable manner are performed. The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 and performs various effects such as a notice effect described later in accordance with the signal.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In addition, an operation signal from the operation button 30 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 107. As will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect such as a notice effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 30.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM for this purpose. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c, and drives the vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c that vibrate attachment portions of the respective LEDs via the output port 106. The vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a. The vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 88 to operate the movable member 84 via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then performs step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S). ) The main process after 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (S4), the RAM 55 is made accessible. Set (S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  In addition, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (S15). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine. In a process to transmit, a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol determination is one round (value that can be taken by random numbers) When the number of steps between the minimum value and the maximum value is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the game control microcomputer 560 according to the present embodiment, a hardware random number generated by a built-in random number circuit 503 is used as a jackpot determination random number generation counter. Therefore, such initial values are not set for the jackpot determination random number. However, when the game control microcomputer 560 uses a software random number as the big hit determination random number generation counter, the initial value using the initial value random number as described above may be set for the counter. . In this case, since the initial value after the jackpot determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value is a random value, the same random number value as the jackpot determination value is illegally taken out to win the jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act to occur.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, A switch process for determining these states is executed (S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Also, a determination random number update process is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control (S23). The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an effect control command control process for sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a. Execute (S30). Specifically, the CPU 56 pays out in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. An output process for outputting the contents to the output port is executed (S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  In S32, instead of starting the variation of the special symbol based on the start flag being set, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation processing after the variation pattern is determined (specifically, 3) (or a value indicating the display result specifying command transmission process (specifically, 2)), the special symbol may be changed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value indicating the special symbol stop process (specifically, 4), the variation of the special symbol may be stopped. By doing so, the start flag and the end flag can be eliminated, and the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  In S33, the normal symbol change is not started based on the start flag being set, but the normal symbol process flag value becomes a value indicating the normal symbol changing process. You may make it start the fluctuation | variation of a symbol. Then, the variation of the normal symbol may be stopped based on the value of the normal symbol process flag becoming a value indicating the normal symbol stop process. By doing so, the start flag and the end flag can be eliminated, and the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  Next, a pseudo-continuous display effect executed by the effect display device 9 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. Each of the patterns a to d shown below indicates that re-variation is performed when pseudo-continuous display is executed, that the effect display device 9, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, the lower effect LED 85c, and An effect pattern including a notification effect that is notified in a predetermined notification mode using a notification means such as the movable member 78 is shown.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous display effect. In the pattern a shown in FIG. 6A, one of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c that are lit increases by one during each re-variation period (including the initial variation). It is controlled to go. In the temporary stop period, all the LEDs (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c) may be turned off. Further, during the period of re-variation (including the first-time variation), the LED may be controlled to blink, the display color may be controlled to change, or one to be turned on one by one. Instead of being controlled so as to increase, it may be controlled so that what is lit among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c is changed. FIG. 6 (A) shows an example in which two temporary stop periods are provided during one change of the production symbol, and three re-changes (including the initial change) are performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Each re-variation (including initial variation) A1, A2, and A3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the first re-variation effect mode.

  It should be noted that the production mode (A1, B1, C1, D1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) used in the initial fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve the pseudo-continuous (for example, a super-reach fluctuation pattern or a normal reach fluctuation pattern). (Fluctuation pattern) may be used as part of the production mode.

  In the pattern b shown in FIG. 6B, the movable member 78 operates during the period of each re-variation (including the initial variation). In the temporary stop period, the movable member 78 may be in a stopped state. FIG. 6B shows an example in which two temporary stop periods are provided during one fluctuation of the production symbol and three re-variations (including the first fluctuation) are performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. In addition, each re-variation (including initial variation) B1, B2, and B3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the second re-variation effect mode (I).

  In the pattern c shown in FIG. 6C, an image for a specific notice effect may be displayed on the effect display device 9 during the period of each re-change (including the initial change). The movable member (movable member 84) for the notice effect may be operated. Examples of the image for the specific notice effect include various images such as an envelope image, a message image (image showing a message), a character image, and a mini character image as described later. Note that an image for a specific notice effect may not be displayed during the temporary stop period. Further, FIG. 6C shows an example in which two temporary stop periods are provided during one fluctuation of the production symbol and three re-variations (including the first fluctuation) are performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Each re-variation (including initial variation) C1, C2, C3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the second re-variation effect mode (II).

  The pattern d shown in FIG. 6D has a first re-variation effect mode and a second re-change effect mode (second re-variation) in one or more periods of a plurality of re-changes (including initial changes). This is a pattern in which an effect is executed in the effect mode (I) or the second re-variation effect mode (II), or in the second re-change effect mode (I) and the second re-change effect mode (II)). In the temporary stop period, the effects of the first re-change effect mode and the second re-change effect mode may not be executed. Further, FIG. 6D shows an example in which two temporary stop periods are provided during one fluctuation of the production symbol and three re-variations (including the first fluctuation) are performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Further, each re-variation (including initial variation) D1, D2, and D3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the third re-variation effect mode.

  In FIG. 6D, the “two lit” box is indicated by a broken line indicates that the effect may or may not be executed. If not executed, an effect using the LED (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, or lower effect LED 85c) is executed in the first change, and an effect using the movable member 78 is executed in the next change to be executed. However, the effect using the LED is not executed. As described above, when reaching the quasi-continuous, the reach state is reached at the last re-variation among the re-variations of the quasi-continuous, and the reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern a in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern a, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 7A (the state in which the left middle right effect symbol is stopped). (Refer to FIG. 7 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol temporarily stops (see FIG. 7 (C)). In the example shown in FIG. 7, when the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIG. 7D), and reach when the predetermined re-variation period elapses (FIG. 7). 7 (E)). Thereafter, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lower effect LED 85 c is lit during the first variation period, and the middle effect LED 85 b and the lower effect LED 85 c are lit during the re-variation period following the first variation. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 7 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 7A to 7C corresponds to the period A1 shown in FIG. 6A, and the periods in FIGS. 7D to 7E correspond to those in FIG. This corresponds to the period A2. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 7, the temporary stop is an example, and the reach is reached when the period A <b> 2 ends. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  In FIG. 7, among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c, the LED displayed in black is an LED that is lit. Further, the LED in the lighting state is vibrated by vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c (see FIG. 3). In FIG. 7, the downward arrow indicates that the effect symbol is variably displayed (varied). The same applies to FIGS. 8 to 11.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows an example in which the lower effect LED 85c is lit while all symbols are changing like the timing (B) in the period of the first change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower effect LED 85c may be lit at the time of a temporary stop such as the timing of (C) and the start of re-variation such as the timing of (D) in the first variation period. That is, the lighting timing of the upper effect LED in the pseudo-continuous may be at each temporary stop or at each re-variation.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern b in the effect display device 9. In the re-variation effect of pattern b, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the effect symbol starts to change from the state shown in FIG. 8A (the state in which the left middle right effect symbol is stopped). (See FIGS. 8B and 8C) When the predetermined period has elapsed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols temporarily stop (see FIG. 8D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIG. 8E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left and right effect symbols stop and reach. (See FIG. 8F). Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 8, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 8A to 8D corresponds to the period B1 illustrated in FIG. 6B, and the periods illustrated in FIGS. 8E to 8F correspond to the period illustrated in FIG. It corresponds to the period of B2 shown. However, in the example shown in FIG. 8, the temporary stop is an example, and reach is reached when the period of B <b> 2 ends. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern c in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern c, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 9A (the state where the left middle right effect symbol is stopped). (Refer to FIG. 9 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol temporarily stops (see FIG. 9 (C)). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIG. 9D), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left and right effect symbols stop and reach. (See FIG. 9E). Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 9, a specific character image 79a is displayed on the effect display device 9 during the initial variation period, and a specific character image 79b (related to the specific character image 79a) is displayed during the re-variation period following the initial variation. An image that the player feels as if the effect has developed is displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 9 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 9A to 9C corresponds to the period C1 shown in FIG. 6C, and the periods in FIGS. 9D to 9E correspond to those in FIG. It corresponds to the period of C2 shown. However, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the temporary stop is an example, and reach is reached when the period of C2 ends. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the re-variation effect of the pattern d in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern a, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 10 (A) (the state where the left middle right effect symbol is stopped). (Refer to FIG. 10 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol temporarily stops (see FIG. 10 (C)). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIGS. 10D and 10E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols become Temporarily stop again (see FIG. 10F). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right production symbols re-variate (see FIG. 11G), and reach when the predetermined re-variation period elapses (see FIG. 11H). . Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the lower effect LED 85 c is lit during the initial variation period, and during the re-variation period following the initial variation, the middle effect LED 85 b and the lower effect LED 85 c are lit, and the movable member 78 operates. . Further, during the subsequent re-variation period, the movable member 78 is operated, and the player feels as if the specific character image 79c (the image related to the specific character images 79a and 79b is further developed. Is displayed on the effect display device 9. Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are examples in which two temporary stops are performed. 10A to 10C corresponds to the period D1 illustrated in FIG. 6D, and the periods illustrated in FIGS. 10D to 10F correspond to the period illustrated in FIG. It corresponds to the period of D2 shown. Further, the period from FIG. 11G to FIG. 11H corresponds to the period D3 shown in FIG.

  In FIGS. 10 and 11, the LED displayed in black among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c is an LED that is lit. Further, the LED in the lighting state is vibrated by vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c (see FIG. 3).

  As illustrated in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, after the initial variation (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) constituting the pattern a is executed, the re-variation (FIG. D) to (F)) are executed. That is, it is possible to execute the second re-variation effect (for example, the pattern b) after executing the first re-change effect (for example, the pattern a). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the re-variation (revariation accompanied by lighting of the LED) constituting the pattern a also when the re-variation (see FIGS. 10D to 10F) constituting the pattern b is executed. ) Is executed, but when the re-variation that constitutes the pattern b (see FIGS. 10D to 10F) is executed, the re-variation that constitutes the pattern a (re-variation accompanying the lighting of the LED) May not be executed. Moreover, what combined the re-variation which comprises the pattern a as shown to FIG.10 (D)-(F), and the re-variation which comprises the pattern b can also be regarded as a 2nd re-change effect. That is, it can be understood that any two re-variation effects having different aspects of the effect correspond to the first re-change effect and the second re-change effect.

  Further, the re-variation constituting the pattern a is regarded as the first re-variation, the re-variation constituting the pattern different from the pattern a (in this example, the pattern b) is regarded as the second re-variation, and the re-variation constituting the pattern a is considered. A combination of the fluctuation and the re-variation constituting the pattern different from the pattern a (in this example, the pattern b) can be regarded as the third re-variation. In such a case, the third re-variation effect can be executed after the first re-change effect or the second re-change effect is executed.

  Note that, as described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, it is assumed that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol becomes reach. In some cases, the final stop may occur.

  Further, in the above example, the non-specific display result (a combination of effect symbols that does not evoke a big hit) is once from the start of the variable display of the identification information (here, the effect symbol) until the display result is derived and displayed. A plurality of types of re-variation effects in a re-variation display pattern in which re-variation is performed once or a plurality of times after the temporary display of the identification information is performed and then the variation display is performed again for all the identification information (that is, a notification effect for informing the re-variation) ) As an illuminant (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c), the movable member 78, and specific character images 79a, 79b, and 79c are exemplified, but other effect modes are used. Also good. For example, a difference in the output of sound or sound effect from the speaker 27, a difference in motion of the production target (for example, the movable member 78) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), effect display device The effect of the re-variation effect is changed depending on the difference in the movement of the character image displayed on the screen 9 (the difference in the movement speed, the movement distance, the movement direction, etc.). Or the background image may be changed to change the effect of the re-variation effect.

  In this embodiment, when a plurality of reserved memories are accumulated when starting the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol, all display results for each of the plurality of reserved memories may be determined in advance. Good. Depending on the contents of the determination, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 7 to 11 may be executed in the variation display of the effect symbols executed a plurality of times, and the same effects as the pseudo-continuous effects may be executed. For example, when there are two hold memories and the display result for the first hold memory is determined to be out of place, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed in the same manner as in any of FIGS. It is also possible to continuously execute the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the reserved storage. In this case, for example, when it is decided to use a fluctuation pattern including reach for the second reserved memory (including a case where it is determined to be a big hit), the chance is displayed as a variable display result for the first reserved memory. The target symbol may be displayed as a final stop, and the reach effect may be executed by a variable display with respect to the second reserved memory. Further, for example, when there are three hold memories and the display result for the first and second hold memories is determined to be out of place, the first hold memory is performed in the same manner as in FIGS. The variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the third hold memory may be continuously executed. In this case, for example, if it is decided to use a fluctuation pattern including reach for the third reserved memory (including a case where it is determined to be a big hit), fluctuations for the first and second reserved memories As the display result, the chance symbol may be finally stopped and displayed, and the reach effect may be executed by a variable display for the third reserved memory. In such a case, even when a similar type of effect is executed, there are a case where a plurality of variable displays are executed and a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is performed during one change. Two types of cases can be provided, and variations in production can be increased to enhance the interest in the game.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a re-variation effect is performed during the variation display of the effect symbol, a part of the effect symbol is slip-fluctuated after the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol. There is a case in which an effect that makes a big hit is performed by performing a change display in which the symbols are slid by a predetermined number of symbols. 12 and 13 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a re-variation effect in which some effect symbols undergo a sliding variation after a chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol, resulting in a big hit. Note that the re-variation effect shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is executed when a variation pattern of a super PA 4-3 described later is selected.

  In the re-variation effect shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, when the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. The variation is executed (see FIG. 12B), and when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 12C). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12C, a chance symbol (“881” in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol. In this embodiment, including the temporary stop state shown in FIG. 12C, when the temporary stop symbol is displayed as a temporary stop, the left middle right temporary stop symbol is completely stopped. Instead, it fluctuates slightly. In the example shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect design re-variates (see FIG. 12D), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left is again left. The middle right effect symbol is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 12E). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12 (E), the chance symbol (“223” in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols again change (see FIG. 12F), and again when the predetermined re-variation period elapses. The left middle right effect symbol is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 13G). In this case, as shown in FIG. 13G, the chance symbol (“445” in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol.

  Next, when a predetermined temporary stop period elapses from a state in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, a part of the temporary stop symbol starts to change again (slip fluctuation) (FIG. 13 (H )reference). Then, the part of the symbol that has changed again is stopped, and finally stopped (determined) in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are aligned with the same symbol (that is, the big hit symbol) (see FIG. 13 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 13 (H), the right temporary stop symbol starts slipping variation, and as shown in FIG. 13 (I), the final stop is performed in a state where the left middle right effect symbols are aligned at “4”. The case is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the lower effect LED 85 c is lit during the initial variation period, the middle effect LED 85 b and the lower effect LED 85 c are lit during the re-variation period following the initial variation, and further the next re-variation. During the period, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are lit.

  In the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started to be displayed, the special symbol is displayed. The stop symbol that is the result of symbol variation display is stopped (displayed). If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is decided to make a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is an off symbol. To do.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are the 15 round jackpot symbols. . The special symbol indicating the number “1” is made a big hit symbol for two rounds. When the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the opening / closing plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. During the period until the occurrence, a round in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is started. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of rounds is the first number (for example, 15). Hereinafter, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is the first number is also referred to as 15 rounds jackpot state.

  Also, when the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the big hit gaming state in which the number of rounds is the second number (for example, “2”). Transition to (2 round big hit state). Further, in the 2 round big hit state, the period of each round becomes a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In the two-round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. It suffices to be controlled. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. The second state may be restored after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  The 15-round jackpot game state has a larger number of rounds than the 2-round jackpot game state, and the open time of the big prize opening in each round is long, so that a lot of winning balls can be obtained at the big prize opening (received) It can be said that it is a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player in that the number of prize balls increases.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state (the state that is not the probability variation state or the short time state). In the short-time state, for example, either a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special symbol variation display is executed and the variation display result is “big hit”, either condition is satisfied first. When it ends. In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state.

  When it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability changing state, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state as the special gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result. Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the probability variation state, but the variation time shortening control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 20 is opened, and the one opening time of the variable winning ball device 20 It may be a gaming state in which control is performed by any one of a control for increasing the number of times and a control for increasing the probability that the display result of the normal symbol is a hit, or a combination of any of a plurality of combinations. A special symbol stop symbol derived and displayed when it is determined to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state is referred to as a big hit symbol. The special symbol stop symbol that is derived and displayed when it is determined not to control the gaming state to the big hit state is referred to as an outlier symbol.

  Even after the two-round big hit state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). The probability variation state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state is also referred to as a sudden probability variation (surprise) state.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the gaming state is controlled to be a small hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state. Also good. In such a small winning game state, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened for a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the large winning opening is opened, as in the two round big hit state. The number of rounds is the second number (for example, 2). However, unlike the two round big hit state, the gaming state is not changed. That is, the gaming state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state continues. However, when it is decided to end the probability change state or the time-short state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state after the small hit gaming state is ended. In addition, when changing the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit state to the first state, the same as in the case of the two round big hit state even in the small hit gaming state Then, the winning ball apparatus is changed to the first state.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining a big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the start winning opening 13 is easily opened, and the start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of opening and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may increase. Further, even in the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time. In this embodiment, in the probability variation state, in addition to an increase in the probability that the big symbol is determined, an example in which the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 10 becomes a positive symbol is increased. However, in the probability variation state, it is sufficient that at least the probability of being determined as a big hit is high.

  In the probability variation state, in addition to increasing the probability of determining the jackpot, the control for reducing the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are extended (lengthened) than usual. ) Any one of the control and the control that increases the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is one of the control, the control that combines any two, and the control that combines all You may make it perform. In the short time state (short time for special symbols), control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, control for extending the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 (longer) than usual, and control of the normal symbol Of the control for increasing the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol, at least the control for reducing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the normal one may be executed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in response to the special symbol change display by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 9, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation of the effect symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. For example, the stop symbols of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, or “left”, “middle”, and “right” The stop symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  The period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (variable display period = variable time) Thus, the variation display state of the effect symbol may become a predetermined reach state.

  In addition, during the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, it is possible that the variation display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and that the variation display result may be a big hit symbol. There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is made depending on the display pattern variation. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” can be executed.

  In the “slip” specific effect, the effect symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed. And the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R), after a temporary stop display of the effect symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display (For example, one or both of the “left” symbol display area 9 </ b> L and the “right” symbol display area 9 </ b> R) and the effect symbols to be stopped are displayed after being changed again, thereby changing the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed. An effect display is performed. In addition, by notifying the player that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not finalized (final stop), such as by displaying fluctuation fluctuation in the temporary stop display, or by changing the effect symbol again after a short temporary stop. Is preferred. In addition, the effect design may be re-variable after the effect design is temporarily stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the stop-displayed effect design has been confirmed.

  As described above, in the special effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the symbol display areas 9L and 9C for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol variation display is satisfied once. After changing the effect symbol in 9R, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and then the effect symbol is changed again in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (pseudo). The effect display to be continuously changed) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 5 times).

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo consecutive chances. In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-reambling chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b and the effect display device 9 are shifted and stopped, the effect symbol change display state is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that do not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variation display state of the effect symbol is started after the effect symbol variation display is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that will reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect design is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing variations in the production symbols prepared in advance for the cases where the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variation display result is an out-of-game symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pattern. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the production symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3— 3. Variation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  For Super PA3-3, which will be "reach", reach formation symbols that do not become pseudo-continuous chances will be temporarily stopped in the first fluctuation (initial fluctuation) of fluctuations performed once (one opportunity). After changing the symbol that has been temporarily stopped in accordance with the slip variation in the right symbol display area 9R to the pseudo-continuous chance, the pseudo-continuous re-variation effect (hereinafter, chance after the first slip) A variation pattern (super PA3-3-1) in which a temporary stop effect is executed and a variation pattern (super PA3-3-2) in which the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip is not performed are provided. Super PA3-3-1 and Super PA3-3-2 are variation patterns that share the contents of effects other than whether or not a chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is performed. Therefore, what produces the effect content of the first temporary stop effect after the first slip is added to the effect content of the super PA3-3-2 where the predetermined effect is performed is the super PA3-3-1. Similarly, for Super PA 3-6 to be “reach”, similarly to Super PA 3-3, Super PA 3-6-1, which is a variation pattern in which a chance first temporary stop effect after the first slip is executed, Super PA 3-6-2, which is a variation pattern that does not perform a temporary stop effect for the chance after the first slip, is provided. Similarly, for the super PB 3-3 to be “reach”, as in the case of the super PA 3-3, the super PB3-3-1 which is a variation pattern in which the first temporary slip after the first slip is executed, A super PB3-3-2, which is a variation pattern that does not perform the temporary stop effect after the first slip, is provided.

  Since the pseudo continuous chance is temporarily stopped when the pseudo continuous control is performed, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous effect is performed when the pseudo continuous chance is displayed. Further, when the pseudo-ream is performed, the big hit is set more easily than when the pseudo-ream is not performed. As a result, when the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip is performed, in the variable display, after the symbols other than the pseudo continuous chance are temporarily stopped, the symbol is changed to the pseudo continuous chance by the slip effect. This can increase the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, when the reach is not performed and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 is selected, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the re-variation effect of the twice variation is executed. Is done. Even when the reach is not performed and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5, which is a variation pattern that becomes a quasi-continuous pattern, is selected, the after-first-slip chance temporary stop effect is performed as described above. You may do it. In addition, when the reach is performed and each variation pattern of super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, and super PA3-6-2 is selected, A variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the re-variation effect of the third variation is executed. In addition, when the reach is performed and each variation pattern of the super PB3-3-1 and the super PB3-3-2 is selected, the variation of the effect design accompanied by the re-variation effect of the four variations. Display is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, when the reach is not performed and the reach is not performed, the re-variation effect of the variation twice is executed, and when the reach is performed, the re-variation of the variation three or four times is performed. Production is performed. Therefore, the presence or absence of reach can be varied according to the number of times of re-variation execution in the re-variation effect. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the reach is not performed and the reach is performed, but the re-variation effect of the two-time variation may be executed even when the reach is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, when the reach type is normal reach, the re-variation effect is not performed, and when the reach type is super reach, the re-variation effect of three or four times variation is executed. Is done. Therefore, the reach type can be varied according to the number of times of re-variation execution in the re-variation effect. In other words, the reach type selection ratio can be varied according to the number of re-variation executions in the re-variation effect.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of a production symbol prepared in advance corresponding to a case where the variation display result becomes a jackpot symbol. As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-1 to super PA4- 6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1- 2. Variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared. The variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are used when the variation display result is a sudden probability variation big hit symbol.

  As for Super PA 4-6, as in the case of Super PA 3-3, which becomes “out of”, Super PA 4-6-1, which is a variation pattern in which a chance temporary stop effect is executed after the first slip, and the first slip Super PA 4-6-2, which is a variation pattern that does not perform a post-chance temporary stop effect, is provided. Similarly, for each of the Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, and Super PB5-3 that will be “big hit”, the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is executed as in the case of Super PA3-3. Variation patterns (super PA5-3-1, super PB4-3-1, and super PB5-3-1) and variation patterns (super PA5-3- 2, super PB4-3-2 and super PB5-3-2).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the winning pattern is a big hit and the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 is selected, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the re-variation effect of the variation three times is executed. . However, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern of Super PA 4-3 is used, the chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol after the third re-variation effect is executed. Only the stop symbol is slid to produce a big hit symbol. Therefore, including the last slip variation, when the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 is used, the variation is performed four times in total. Instead of performing the slip variation after the third re-variation effect, the third re-variation effect itself may be performed as the slip variation effect. Also, in the case of big hit, Super PA 4-6-1, Super PA 4-6-2, Super PA 5-3-1, Super PA 5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2 When each of the variation patterns is selected, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the re-variation effect of four variations is executed. In addition, in the case of a big hit and when each variation pattern of the super PB5-3-1 and the super PB5-3-2 is selected, the variation of the effect design accompanied by the re-variation effect of five variations Display is executed. Also, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, when the variation pattern of special PG1-3 is selected, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the revariation effect of the variation twice is executed. Further, when the sudden variation is a big hit and the variation pattern of the special PG 1-4 is selected, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanied by the re-variation effect of the variation three times is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, there are cases where a re-variation effect of five fluctuations is executed only when a probable big hit. Therefore, the determination ratio of the number of executions of re-variation in the pseudo-series can be made different depending on whether or not the probability variation big hit. In other words, it is possible to select the variation display pattern so that the ratio of the probability variation big hit varies according to the number of times of re-variation execution in the pseudo-series.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, a re-variation effect of two or three fluctuations is executed in the case of a sudden probable big hit that is two round big hits, and 3 in the case of 15 round big hits. A re-variation effect of times to times 5 times is executed. Therefore, the determination ratio of the number of times of re-variation can be made different according to the number of rounds after the big hit transition. In other words, the variation display pattern can be selected so that the proportion controlled for the big hit of 15 rounds as the specific gaming state differs according to the number of times of re-variation execution in the pseudo-ream.

  In this embodiment, when a re-variation effect with a large number of re-variations is executed, a case is shown in which the ratio of a probable big hit or a big hit with a large number of rounds is increased. When the re-variation effect with a small number of times is executed, the ratio of the probability variation big hit or the big hit with a large number of rounds may be increased. If configured in this way, the number of re-variations during the re-variation production is small, so the expectation for the big hit cannot be given, but even if a re-variation production with a small number of re-variations is executed, Since it is likely to be a big hit with a large number, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's expectation is significantly reduced during the re-variation production.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the ratio of the number of executions of re-variation is changed so that the re-variation effect of 5 times variation is executed only when it is a probable big hit is shown. The method of changing the ratio of the number of times is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a re-variation effect with three or four fluctuations is executed in both cases of a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and a re-change effect with three fluctuations is executed in the case of a normal big hit. The ratio may be increased, and in the case of a probable big hit, the ratio at which the four-variation re-variation effect is executed may be increased. By doing so, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the probable big hit can be increased in a synergistic and step-by-step manner, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of executions of re-variation is different between 2 round jackpots and 15 round jackpots. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Such a big hit with a relatively small number of rounds may be provided, and the ratio of the number of re-variation executions may be different. For example, the variation pattern may be distributed so that the proportion of execution of pseudo-continuous effects with a large number of re-variation executions increases as the number of big hit rounds increases. By doing so, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the number of rounds during the big hit can be increased in a synergistic and stepwise manner, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the ratio of the number of executions of re-variation is made different between the big round 5 big hit and the round 7 big hit, the determination probability as the big hit is, for example, a comparatively 1/99. Set to high probability. Further, in addition to the 5-round jackpot and the 7-round jackpot, a 15-round jackpot that is rarely selected with a lower probability than these jackpots may be executed.

  In addition, as the types of jackpots, two rounds of probable big hits, seven rounds of probable big hits, 15 rounds of probable big hits, and two rounds of regular big hits can be selected. Production may be performed. When a big hit (7 rounds probable big hit, 15 rounds probable big hit) other than 2 rounds (2 rounds probable big hit and 2 rounds normal big hits) is selected as the type of big win, the big hit gaming state ends A battle effect, which is an effect of displaying on the effect display device 9 an image in which an enemy character corresponding to a player's ally and an enemy character corresponding to the player's foes, are controlled in a probabilistic state later, and then displayed in a variable display. Continue. When it is determined that either the 7th round probable big hit or the 15th round probable big hit is determined in the period in which the battle effect is being executed, there is an effect indicating that the teammate character has won in the battle effect. Done. Then, after the big hit gaming state in the big hit, the control for starting the execution of the battle effect is performed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that two rounds of normal jackpots are determined during the period in which the battle effect is being executed, an effect indicating that the teammate character has lost in the battle effect is performed, and control is performed to end the battle effect. It is. It should be noted that control for ending the battle effect may also be performed when it is determined that two rounds of probable big hit is made during the period in which the battle effect is being executed. Further, after the end of the battle effect, the player determines whether or not the gaming state is in a probabilistic state until a predetermined period (for example, until a predetermined number of times (for example, ten times of fluctuation display is executed)) has elapsed. You may make it perform the production which cannot be recognized. In a gaming machine that performs such a battle effect, when the battle effect is performed, the ratio at which the number of pseudo-variable changes is selected may be set differently depending on the number of rounds for the big hit that occurs. Specifically, for example, when 4 pseudo-runs are selected, the ratio of 15 rounds of probability change big hit is the highest, and when 3 pseudo-runs is selected, 7 rounds of probable big hit is selected. A data table in which the correlation between the type of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-run is set so that the ratio becomes the highest. Furthermore, when the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-series such as two pseudo-series is relatively small, data in which the correlation between the type of jackpot and the pattern of pseudo-series is set so that the ratio of two rounds of jackpot is the highest A table may be used. In this way, as the number of variable displays continuously executed by the pseudo-ream increases, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot and the number of rounds of the jackpot will be improved step by step. Can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of variable displays continuously executed by the pseudo-ream is small, it is possible to give the player a feeling of frustration that the battle effect may end (that is, the probability variation state ends). By providing such a feeling of expectation and frustration to the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, when suddenly probable big hit is determined, only when the current gaming state is in a low probability state, the re-variation effect of twice or three times variation is performed. When the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the re-variation effect is not performed. Therefore, when it is determined that control is suddenly performed, the rate of determination of the number of times of re-variation can be made different depending on whether or not the control is in the state of probability variation.

  In this embodiment, when a sudden probability variation big hit is determined in a high probability state (probability variation state), the variation pattern of the special PG 2-2 shown in FIG. 16 is determined. In this case, based on the determined variation pattern of the special PG 2-2, during the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9, the left and right are stopped and displayed with the same non-probability variation symbol, and the reach effect of normal reach is executed. Then, after a temporary stop display is performed with the left middle right and the same non-probable variation in the same pattern (that is, a normal big hit symbol) (or a temporary stop display may be performed with the off symbol), a slip variation display is performed suddenly. An effect is made such that the final stop is performed with a probable big hit symbol (for example, “123”). By constructing as such, it is possible to produce an effect as if the player was suddenly struck by a promiscuous big hit, making the player think that he / she might hit with a normal big hit that does not shift to the probable change state, The interest in games can be improved.

  Further, when it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit in the normal state and the variation pattern of the special PG 1-1 shown in FIG. 16 is determined, particularly during the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9, A specific effect such as a reach effect, a pseudo-ream, a slip fluctuation, etc. is not performed, and a special effect such as a final stop suddenly at a probable big hit symbol (for example, “123”) is executed without any particular notice. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be executed and the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

  It should be noted that the re-variation effect may also be executed when suddenly probable big hit is determined and the current gaming state is in the probable state. In this case, for example, when the variation pattern of the special PG 2-2 is configured as a variation pattern with a re-variation effect of four times variation, and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-2 is selected, the re-variation of the four times variation is performed. An effect may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the “reach type” indicates either normal reach or super reach or a plurality of types of super reach. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the types of super reach are roughly classified into reach α and reach β that have different reach modes. Further, the reach α is further classified into three types of reach α1 to α3, and the reach β is further classified into two types of reach β1 and β2.

  In this embodiment, the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the reach type. In this embodiment, the “reach type reliability (big hit reliability)” indicates the probability of a big hit when a certain type of reach is executed. For example, the reliability of reach α is (the ratio at which the variation pattern including reach α1 to α3 in the variation pattern for jackpot shown in FIG. 16 is selected) / (for outliers and jackpots shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). The ratio of the variation patterns including reach α1 to α3 among both variation patterns is calculated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fluctuation pattern including the reach β is allocated more in the case of the big hit as compared with the fluctuation pattern including the reach α, and the reliability of the reach β is the reach. It is larger than the reliability of α.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of big hit (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for big hit type determination) (2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2- 2): Determine whether or not to reach (for reach determination) (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4) : Determine variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol) (6) Random 6 (MR6): An initial value of random 5 is determined (for determining an initial value of random 5).

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a (2-1) big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol per determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. In addition, for the big hit type determination random number, an initial value may be set using the initial value random number as described above. In this case, since the initial value after the big hit type determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value becomes a random value, the same random number value as the probable big hit type determination value is illegally targeted. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act that causes a jackpot of a certain type to be taken out.

  In addition, when updating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4), the value of the hardware random number generated by the random number circuit 503 installed in the game control microcomputer 560 is used. Then, the addition value is determined, and at least one of the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) may be updated by adding the determined addition value. By doing so, it is not necessary to generate a software random number for addition value for updating at least one of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4). can do. Therefore, the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) can be updated at random without increasing the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560. Here, the variation pattern type refers to distinguishing the variation pattern according to the type, or the distinction. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type is classified into several groups based on predetermined conditions. This is a distinction that shows a rough distribution of fluctuation patterns.

  The addition value to be added to the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) or the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4) can be determined using various methods. For example, when the random number circuit 503 is a hardware random number circuit that generates a 16-bit random number value and it is desired to randomly determine an addition value of 3 bits, a 16-bit random number value generated by the random number circuit 503 It is also possible to obtain a 3-bit added value by masking the upper 13 bits. For example, when the addition value is determined in the range of 1 (001) to 7 (111) and the 16-bit random value generated by the random number circuit 503 is not within this range, 1 (001) The value of the added value maximum value 7 (111) may be repeatedly added (or subtracted) to the random number value generated by the random number circuit 503 until it falls within the range of ˜7 (111). Then, a value finally in the range of 1 (001) to 7 (111) is obtained as an addition value and added to the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) or the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4). You may do it.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 18 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 18A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit). The “probability” shown in FIG. 18A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2-1), when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”. The big hit type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and is a determination value corresponding to each of "normal big hit", "probable big hit", and "sudden big hit" (big hit type determination value) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  It should be noted that different jackpot type determination tables may be used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol executed based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is performed, the normal big win and the probable big hit The big hit type may be determined by using a big hit type determination table that does not include sudden probability variation big hits alone. Specifically, the determination value “7” suddenly allocated to the probability variation big hit in FIG. 18B may be assigned to the probability variation big hit to constitute the big hit type determination table. With such a configuration, when the probability variation state (short-time state) is established, the winning combination is performed at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since the frequency of playing is increased, the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds can be increased, the starting rate can be improved, and the interest in games can be improved.

  19A to 19F and FIG. 20G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol, according to the determination result of the jackpot type, the variation pattern type is changed to a random number for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  As described above, the “variation pattern type” indicates rough distribution of variation patterns. In this embodiment, depending on the variation pattern type, the distribution type is classified into a variation pattern type that largely includes reach and a variation pattern type that does not include reach, or the reach type is normal reach, reach α super reach, reach β super reach. Are classified into types of variation patterns including In addition, when the reach is not included, the change pattern type is classified into a change pattern type including a specific effect such as a slip change or a pseudo-ream and a change pattern type not including a specific effect. In addition, as the above-described variation pattern type, a variation pattern type obtained by grouping pseudo-variation variation patterns by the number of pseudo-continuations such as once, twice, three times, four times, and five times is used. There is also.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a random number for random variation type determination (random 3) is selected according to whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. ) And a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 19A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “ With the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 19B used in the case of “probable variation”, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1, super CA3-2, and super CA3-3. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-4 is determined. Judgment value is assigned.

  Thus, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected in accordance with the big hit type in the gaming state (in the normal state) Selection), the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability change state) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132G (selected when the time is short) are compared. Thus, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when controlling to the 2 round big hit state according to the fact that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprising”, the fluctuation pattern type different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state is determined. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 19A is used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state. With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 19D used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal”) selected according to the gaming state. ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared. Depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time-short state, or the probability variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type differently. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probability variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type Can be different.

  21A to 21C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variation display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variation display result is “off”. -2) is a table that is referred to for determination based on (2). Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination results indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 21A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “2”, is non-reach. Assigned to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range decision value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  22A to 22C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C change the variation pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating that the reach state is set such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining one of the fluctuation pattern types.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 22A, the values (determination values) in the range of “1” to “128” correspond to the determination result indicating that the reach is HA2-1. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result that the reach HA 2-2 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA 2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” by the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA2-3 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 23A to 23C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate the variation pattern based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether it is non-reach HC1-2, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  24, 25A and 25B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C, when it is determined that the variation display result is “big hit”, according to the determination result of the big hit type, the variation pattern type, etc. 4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6. Further, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is any one of the super CB 3-1 to the super CB 3-2. Also, depending on the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2, The pattern determination table 137C is selected as the usage table.

  Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  Referring to FIG. 24, for example, in super CA 3-2, when super PA 4-6-1 and super PA 4-6-2 are compared, the ratio of super PA 4-6-1 being selected is high. Further, in the super CA3-3, when the super PB4-3-1 and the super PB4-3-2 are compared, the ratio of selecting the super PB4-3-1 is high. Further, in the super CA 3-4, when the super PB4-3-1 and the super PB4-3-2 are compared, the ratio of the super PB4-3-1 being selected is high. Moreover, in super CA3-5, when super PA5-3-1 and super PA5-3-2 are compared, the ratio with which super PA5-3-1 is selected is high. Referring to FIG. 25, in super CB3-1, when super PB4-3-1 and super PB4-3-2 are compared, the ratio of super PB4-3-1 being selected is high. As described above, in the pseudo-ream when the big hit is achieved, in the variation pattern in which the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip can be selected, the ratio of selecting to execute the effect is the ratio of selecting not to execute the effect Higher than.

  FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a specific variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4).

  Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination in accordance with the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is “out of”. And the data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 26, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5 corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 15) for executing the specific effect. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variation display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variation display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Make a decision to make one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and execute a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")). Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, for the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA 1-5, random numbers (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ), A determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned a decision value,“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”is assigned to a non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to a non-reach HA1-4. A judgment value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a judgment value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in a range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and the non-reach HA1-4 has a storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Corresponding to the random number (random 2-2) for reach determination, a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”, non-reach CA1-4. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  Further, for the variation pattern types of the non-reach CC1-3 including the non-reach PA1-5, in the variation pattern type determination table 136C for non-reach shown in FIG. ) Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the non-reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “234” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HC1-2, and “235” for the non-reach HC1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned. Further, for the non-reach HC1-2, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 21C, the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” even when the number of reserved memories is “2” or more. In some cases, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) is assigned a determination value in the range of “1” to “231”. Since the number of determination values assigned to non-reach HC1-2 is smaller than that for non-reach HC1-1, if the number of reserved memories is “2” or more, the number of reserved memories is “0” or Compared to the case of “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  In the case of using the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B illustrated in FIG. 26, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138B may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 15, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “sliding” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not performed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than in the case of “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 27, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of Super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3-1 and Super PA3-3-2, Super PA3- A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing reach effect α2 such as 4 to super PA3-6-1 and super PA3-6-2. ing. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA2-3 and Super CB2-1, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-3-1 and Super PB3-3-2, A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  Further, for example, the variation pattern of Super PA3-3-1, Super PA3-3-2, Super PA3-6-1, Super PA3-6-2, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2 In addition, with respect to the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect operation of the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variation display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation patterns of super PA 3-6-1 and super PA 3-6-2 are variation patterns for executing reach effect α2, the variation pattern type of super CA 2-2 is used in the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B. Is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining a variation pattern. Since the fluctuation pattern of the super PB3-3-1 and the super PB3-3-2 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the fluctuation of the super CA2-3 and the super CB2-1 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B. Corresponding to the case of pattern type, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for random pattern determination (random 4) is assigned.

  Referring to FIG. 27, for example, in super CA2-2, when super PA3-6-1 and super PA3-6-2 are compared, the proportion of super PA3-6-1 selected is low. Further, in the super CA2-3, when the super PB3-3-1 and the super PB3-3-2 are compared, the ratio of selecting the super PB3-3-1 is low. Further, in the super CB2-1, when the super PB3-3-1 and the super PB3-3-2 are compared, the ratio of the super PB3-3-1 being selected is high. As described above, in the quasi-run when there is a deviation, in the variation pattern in which the first-slip chance chance temporary stop effect can be selected, the ratio of selecting to execute the effect is the ratio of selecting not to execute the effect Lower than.

  Further, when the hit variation pattern determination table 137A in FIG. 24 is compared with the loss variation pattern determination table 138B in FIG. It is set so that the rate at which the temporary stop effect is selected is increased.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the pseudo-ream effect pattern used in this embodiment. FIG. 28A shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern a. In FIG. 28 (A), “A · A” indicates the re-change effect of the first re-change effect mode shown in FIG. This means that a fluctuating effect is executed. “A, A, A” is the first variation variation mode shown in FIG. 6A in the first variation, the subsequent variation, and the subsequent variation again in the three variation variation variation. It means that the re-variation effect is executed. “A / A / A / A” is the result of the first variation, the subsequent revariation (second variation), and the subsequent third variation / fourth variation re-variation in the four-variation re-variation production. This means that the re-variation effect of the first re-change effect mode shown in (A) is executed. A1, A2, and A3 indicate re-variation effects in the first re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. In addition, the period of the re-change effect A1 in “A · A”, “A · A · A”, and “A · A · A · A” corresponds to the periods of FIGS. The period of the re-change effect A2 in “A / A” corresponds to the period of FIGS. The period of the revariation effect A2 in “A, A, A” and “A, A, A, A” corresponds to the periods of FIGS. However, the display pattern of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the final stop mode shown in FIG. Further, in the period of the re-variation effect A3 in “A · A · A” and “A · A · A · A”, for example, all of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are controlled to be in a lighting state. At the same time, the vibration state is controlled.

  FIG. 28B shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern B. In FIG. 28 (B), “B · B” indicates the second re-variation effect mode (I) shown in FIG. 6 (B) in each of the initial change and the subsequent re-change in the re-change effect of two changes. ) Re-variation effect is executed. “B, B, B” is the second variation variation mode (FIG. 6B) shown in FIG. 6B in each of the first variation, the subsequent variation, and the subsequent variation. This means that the re-variation effect of I) is executed. “B, B, B, B” is shown in FIG. 6 in each of the first variation, the subsequent revariation (second variation), and the subsequent third variation / fourth variation re-variation in the four-fold variation re-variation effect. This means that the re-variation effect of the second re-change effect mode shown in (B) is executed. “B ・ B ・ B ・ B ・ B” is the first variation followed by the second variation (second variation), and the third variation, the fourth variation, and the fifth variation revariation Means that the re-variation effect of the second re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. 6B is executed. B1, B2, and B3 indicate re-variation effects in the second re-variation effect mode (I) shown in FIG. Further, the period of the re-variation effect B1 in “B · B”, “B · B · B”, “B · B · B · B” and “B · B · B · B · B” is shown in FIG. ) To (D), and the period of the revariation effect B2 in “B · B” corresponds to the periods of FIGS. 8D to 8F. The period of the re-variation effect B2 in “B, B, B,” “B, B, B, B” and “B, B, B, B, B” is the period of FIGS. 8D to 8F. Equivalent to. However, the display pattern of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the reach mode shown in FIG. Further, the period of the re-variation effect B3 in “B / B / B”, “B / B / B / B” and “B / B / B / B / B” is the same as the period of the re-change effect B1 and B2. In addition, the movable member 78 is controlled to the operating state.

  FIG. 28C shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern c. In FIG. 28 (C), “C · C” represents the second re-variation effect mode (II) shown in FIG. ) Re-variation effect is executed. “C, C, C” is the second variation variation mode (FIG. 6C) shown in FIG. 6C in each of the first variation, the subsequent variation, and the subsequent variation in the three variation variation variation. This means that the re-variation effect of II) is executed. “C, C, C, and C” are shown in FIG. 6 in each of the first variation, the subsequent revariation (second variation), and the subsequent third variation / fourth variation re-variation in the re-variation effect of the fourth variation. This means that the re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode shown in (C) is executed. C1, C2, and C3 indicate re-variation effects in the first re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. Further, the period of the re-variation effect C1 in “C / C”, “C / C / C”, and “C / C / C / C” corresponds to the period of FIGS. The period of the re-variation effect C2 in “C / C” corresponds to the period of FIGS. The period of the re-variation effect C2 in “C, C, C” and “C, C, C, C” corresponds to the period of FIGS. However, the display mode of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the reach mode shown in FIG. Further, in the period of the re-changing effect C3 in “C, C, C” and “C, C, C, C”, for example, a specific character image 79c (see FIG. 11G) is displayed on the effect display device 9. Is displayed.

  FIG. 29D shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern d. In FIG. 29D, in A / AC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change in the re-change effect of two changes, and both the re-change effect A2 and the re-change effect C2 are executed in the re-change. Means that.

  As for A, A, and AB, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect A2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect A3 and the re-change effect in the subsequent re-change. It means that the change effect B3 is executed together. In A / A / AC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect A2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect A3 and the re-change effect in the subsequent re-change. It means that the change effect C3 is executed together. In B, B, and BC, the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect B3 and the re-change effect in the subsequent re-change. It means that the change effect C3 is executed together. In B, B, and ABC, the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect A3 and the re-change effect in the subsequent re-change. It means that the change effect B3 and the re-change effect C3 are executed.

  A / A / A / AB is a four-variation re-variation effect, a re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first variation, a re-variation effect A1 is executed in the second variation, and the third variation This means that the re-variation effect A2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect A3 and the re-change effect B3 are both executed in the subsequent re-change of the fourth change. In A / A / AB / ABC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect A1 is executed in the second change, and the subsequent third change This means that both the re-variation effect A2 and the re-variation effect B2 are executed in the re-variation, and the re-variation effect A3, the re-variation effect B3, and the re-variation effect C3 are executed in the subsequent re-variation of the fourth variation. . In B, B, B, and BC, the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B1 is executed in the second change, and the subsequent third change This means that the re-variation effect B2 is executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect B3 and the re-change effect C3 are both executed in the subsequent re-change of the fourth change. In A, B, BC, and ABC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B1 is executed in the second change, and the subsequent third change This means that both the re-variation effect B2 and the re-variation effect C2 are executed in the re-variation, and the re-variation effect A3, the re-variation effect B3, and the re-variation effect C3 are executed in the subsequent re-variation of the fourth variation. .

  In B, B, B, B, and BC, the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B1 is executed in the second change, and the subsequent third time The re-variation effect B1 is executed in the re-change of the change, the re-change effect B2 is executed in the re-change of the fourth change that follows, and the re-change effect B3 and the re-change effect C3 are further changed in the subsequent change of the fifth change. It means that both are executed.

  28 and 29 are examples, and the re-variation effect of the first re-change effect mode, the second re-change effect mode (I), and the second re-change effect are shown. Arbitrary combinations with aspect (II) can be made into a pseudo-continuous effect pattern. As an example, the second re-variation effect mode (I) or the second re-change effect mode (II) may be executed first, and then the re-change effect of the first re-change effect mode may be executed. .

  FIGS. 30 and 31 are explanatory diagrams showing the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B include non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super, which are fluctuating patterns with pseudo-continuous. PA3-6-2, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2, Super PA4-3-1, PA4-3-2, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5- 3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, Super PB5-3-2, Special PG1-3, Special PG1-4 (Fig. 15 and FIG. 16) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, which pseudo-continuous effect pattern is selected is determined by the effect control microcomputer 100 (see S500C). When receiving the fluctuation pattern command including the pseudo-continuous, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the value of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determining random number described later. When determining a specific pseudo-continuous performance pattern, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the total pending storage number that is the sum of the first reserved number and the second reserved number, and the total reserved memory number is 0 to 0. If it is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 30 is used, and if the total pending storage number is 4 to 8, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 31 is used. Note that the total pending storage number can be specifically specified by a total pending storage number designation command described later.

  Note that a specific pseudo-continuous performance pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this case, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-ream, a specific value corresponding to a determination value that matches a predetermined pseudo-ream effect pattern determination random number value. A typical variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the effect design to be used. When determining a specific variation pattern, the game control microcomputer 560 refers to the total pending memory number counter in which the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first pending number and the second pending number is set. If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0-3, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 30 is used, and if the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4-8, it is shown in FIG. The pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table 139B is used. When the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 are stored in the ROM 54 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. Remembered.

  In FIGS. 30 and 31, symbols (A, A, etc.) in parentheses in specific variation patterns correspond to the symbols in FIGS. That is, for example, non-reach PA 1-5 (A · A) corresponds to the first re-variation effect mode indicated by A · A in FIG. A modification will be described in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a first re-change effect (effect indicated by A) and a second re-change effect (shown by B or C) according to the total number of reserved storage. For example) and the third re-variation effect (effects in which two or more of A, B, and C are combined, such as AB).

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern with the “pseudo-ream” is not a big hit, non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3-1, and PB3 -3-2 may be selected (see FIG. 15).

  In the case of a big hit, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, super PB5-3-1, super PB5-3-2, and special PG1-3 may be selected (see FIG. 16).

  As shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super PA3-6, which can be selected in the case of not hitting the jackpot 2, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-1, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, Super PB5-3-2, Special PG1-3 and Special PG1-4 In the group, each of the two re-change effects (including the effect of the first change) is different (for example, (A / AB) is the effect of the first change is the effect of A) The ratio of the re-variation effect is different from the combination of the effect of A and the effect of B) and the three re-variation effects (including the effect of the first variation) are different (for example, (A · AB / ABC) is the effect of A for the first time variation, the effect of revariation is a combination of the effect of A and the effect of B, and the next revariation effect is the effect of A, B and C. The ratio is different). Therefore, by executing an effect in which the two re-variation effects are different or the three re-change effects are different, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit.

  In other words, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6 that can be selected for a big hit for the group of PA3-6-2, Super PB3-3-1, and Super PB3-3-2 -2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, Super PB5-3-2, Special PG1-3 and The group of special PG1-4 has a higher probability that a combination of revariation effects of different modes such as AB, AC, BC, ABC will appear. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit by executing the effect in which the re-variation effects of different modes are combined.

  In the case of a normal big hit, the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 132A and 132D shown in FIG. 19, and the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIGS. Since the variation pattern is determined based on ˜137C, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PB4-3-1, and Super PB4- 3-2 can be selected. In the case of a promising big hit, the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 132B and 132E shown in FIG. 19, and the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. The variation pattern is determined based on the above, so that the variation pattern accompanied by the production of “pseudo-ream” is super PA4-3, super PA4-6-1, super PB4-3-1, and super PB4-3- In addition to 2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, and Super PB5-3-2 may be selected.

  In Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, and Super PB5-3-2, which can be selected only when it is a probable big hit, different modes such as AB, BC, ABC The number of judgment values corresponding to the combination of the re-variable effects is larger. That is, in the case of a probable big hit, there is a high probability that a combination of re-variation effects of different modes such as AB, BC, ABC will appear.

  Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the probable big hit by executing the effect in which the re-variation effects of different modes are combined.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 32, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol displayed in a variation on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. 30, variation pattern commands corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number are displayed. is there. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the first decorative symbol display unit 9a or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b to start the decorative symbol variation display, thereby producing the effect display device. In step 9, control is performed so as to start the variation display of the effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or to start the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the display (change) of the effect symbol (and decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a sudden start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also designates an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot has been a non-probable variation jackpot (usually a jackpot) 1 designation command). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a promising big hit (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (surprise end specification command: ending 3 specification command) that specifies the end of a game of sudden probability change.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed in accordance with the contents shown in FIG.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, a variation pattern command and a display result specifying command are displayed as a decorative symbol variation display (variation) and a second special symbol display corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. An image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces an effect along with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 from being increased when controlling the effect parts such as the above.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (designating) symbol during the variable symbol display time is changed by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is to be changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs the variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variation display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (S311 and S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the special symbol variation display. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result specifying command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols and decoration symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” (for example, “01 (H)”) in the start port pointer (S211A). If the first start port switch 13a is not turned on (that is, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on), the CPU 56 indicates data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (for example, “02 (H)”. ”) Is set (S211B).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved memory number counter (the first reserved memory number counter or the second reserved memory number counter is 4) indicated by the start port pointer (S212). The reserved memory number counter is a counter for counting the first reserved memory number that has been won at the first start winning opening 13, and the second reserved memory number counter is the second that has been won at the second start winning opening 14. If the value of the reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer (data indicating “first” or “second”) is set in the area (S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start-up switch 13a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 35A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 35A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 35A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 35A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Therefore, the order of winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold specifying area). Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 35B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 35B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and stores them in the holding storage buffer (first holding storage buffer or second holding point) to which the starting port pointer points. The process of storing in the storage area in the hold storage buffer is executed (S215). In the process of S215, a random R (big hit determination random number) and a random number 2-1 (see FIG. 17) that is a software random number are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) indicated by the start opening pointer (S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (S218). The total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  In S212, when the number of reserved memories pointed to by the start port pointer has reached the upper limit value (4 in this example), whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on instead of ending the processing as it is. If it is turned on, the process may proceed to S211B, and data indicating "second" may be set in the start port pointer. With such a configuration, when the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on at the same timing, a random number value can be extracted at an accurate timing and stored in the reserved storage number buffer. .

  36 and 37 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 35A) is data indicating “first”. (S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first”. 1 "is set (S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a depends on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. Here, the “common processing routine” is a program for realizing a specific series of processes, and in this embodiment, a series for performing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It points to the program for realizing the process. In this embodiment, the “common processing routine” includes the processing of S55 to S76 in the special symbol normal processing described later, the variation pattern setting processing of S301, the display result specifying command transmission processing of S302, and the special symbol variation of S303. The process and the special symbol stop process of S304 are included.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S307 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 18) with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 18A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 18A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 18A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S63), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the confirmation flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game when it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is reset at the start of the big hit game when the next big hit occurs. (Even if the next big hit is a promising big hit, it is reset once at the start of the big hit game).

  If the value of the random R does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the process proceeds to S75 as it is. On the other hand, if they match, the process proceeds to S71.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 18C is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). The type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2-1) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal”, “probability change” or “surprise”) is determined as the jackpot type ( S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. Is “03”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  In addition, about the 1st special symbol corresponding to the 1st start winning opening 13 in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not provided, you may make it not allocate "accuracy" among jackpot types. In that case, the ratio of the jackpot type of “probability change” (“Accuracy” is not selected) for the first special symbol and the jackpot type that combines “probability” and “surprise” for the second special symbol is selected. The setting is made so that the ratio is equal. In addition, regarding the second special symbol corresponding to the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, it is possible not to allocate “accuracy” among the big hit types. In that case, the ratio of the jackpot type of “probability change” (“Accuracy” is not selected) is selected for the second special symbol, and the jackpot type that is the combination of “probability” and “surprise” is selected for the first special symbol The setting is made so that the ratio is equal. If it does in this way, it will become easy to generate | occur | produce 15R big hits about the start winning to the 2nd starting winning opening 14, and it can improve the interest of a game.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91).

  When the big hit flag is set, the table used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is based on the gaming state according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the performance is performed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 21 (D) based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. One of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used to determine whether or not the symbol variation display state is set to the reach state (S95). Also, the random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 2-2 (S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the presence / absence data, whether or not to reach the reach state, the type of effect when not reaching the reach state, or the type of reach when reaching the reach state is determined (S97). Note that the value before -1 in the process of S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of S97.

  When it is determined to reach the reach state (Y in S98), according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of S97. Thus, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (S99). When it is determined not to reach the reach state (N of S98), the types of effects determined in the process of S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1- 2, non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2). Is selected (S100). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  In S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of S92, S99, or S100 (S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in S102, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the table used to determine any one of the plurality of variation patterns. One of the tables 138A and 138B is selected (S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (S104). Based on the extracted random value 4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of S103 (S105).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  In this embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern for quasi-continuous use, the fluctuation pattern for which the number of re-variations and the reach type are specified in advance is finally determined in S105, so that the number of re-variations and the reach type are simultaneously determined. However, the number of re-variations and the reach type may be determined separately in two stages. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may first determine the reach type after determining the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-series. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may first determine the reach type, and then determine the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit any effect control command (see FIG. 32) of display result 1 designation to display result 4 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type or loss. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If not set, the process proceeds to S118. When the big hit flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit (S111). When the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (S112). On the other hand, if the big hit type is not a probable variation big hit, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit type is a sudden probable big hit (S113). When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 4 designation command (S114). On the other hand, when the type of big hit is not suddenly probable big hit, that is, when neither big probable big hit nor sudden probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (S115).

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in S110), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (S118).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S120).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125). When the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S132). When the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the hourly flag (S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) and 2 times in the case of a sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (S137). ). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138).

  In S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S140). If the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S148).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 21 to open to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S404), and decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (S405).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S406). For example, in the case of 15 round big hit, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (S306) (S415).

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (S435). ). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is opened. The value is updated according to the preprocessing (S305) (S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of a sudden probability big hit, it may be shorter than the 15R big hit.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit end 2 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the data showing the big hit type is data showing the probability variation big hit. (S442, S447). Whether or not it is a probable big hit in S442 is, specifically, whether or not the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 in S74 is a value ("02" in this example) indicating the probable big hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time to notify the effect display device 9 that the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot control timer (S449), and the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S450).

  When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit but the data indicating the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a sudden end specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S443, S444). ). It is to be noted that the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 in S74 is a value (in this example, “03”) indicating whether the big hit type is set in the big hit type buffer in S74. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. When the data indicating the big hit type is not suddenly the data indicating the probability variation big hit, control for transmitting the big hit end 1 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S445). Then, the process proceeds to S449.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S154. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (S151), and control for transmitting the big hit end designation command is performed (S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden end designation command is sent, and if it is none, a big hit end 1 designation command is sent. To do. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (S153), and the processing is ended.

  In S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (S161). Then, the process proceeds to S162. When neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, the process proceeds to S162. In S162, the time reduction flag is set (S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction counter (S163). As a result, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the time-saving state is always controlled. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164).

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 46 to 52. 46 to 52, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIGS. 46 to 52, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 shows the effects produced by the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 when the specific effect is not executed when the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, and when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. FIG.

  When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 46 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 46 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 46 (D1) to (D6) is executed. 46 (D1) to 46 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  The example shown in FIG. 46A corresponds to, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, in response to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. The stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1 if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed. Then (see FIG. 62), the “slip” specific effect is performed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, which causes the effect symbol to change again at high speed. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 46 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (D2), by stopping the display of the effect symbol “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as an effect symbol fluctuation display is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 46 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 46 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (FIG. 46). 57). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display). When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, a combination of reach symbols may be obtained by a specific effect of “slip”, such as PA2-2. Specifically, the reach state after the production of “slip” is the reach state after the production of “slip”, and after that, the display results in a slippage, the reach state after the production of “slip”, and then the big hit As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the content of the effect is determined based on the selection determination of the variation pattern. The specific effect of “slip” includes those that do not reach the reach state after the effect of “slip”.

  In addition, the following effects are also performed as pseudo-rendition effects. Symbols such as “1”, “2”, and “2” are temporarily stopped in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, such as special PG 1-3 that is a big hit with non-reach Then, for example, in the “left” symbol display area, the effect symbol changes again at high speed. Then, the symbols that have been changed again are stopped at “2” so as to form a combination of jackpot symbols, and the effect symbols that finally become jackpots are stopped and displayed (final stop display). Note that the variation pattern that is a non-reach and big hit as a pseudo-rendition production is not limited to re-changing the production symbol in the “left” symbol display area, but re-variation of the production symbol in any symbol display area Also good. In addition, the effect symbols may be re-variable in a plurality of (two in this case) symbol display areas, without being re-variable in one symbol display area. Further, the speed of re-variation is not limited to re-variation at a high speed, but may be re-variable at a low speed.

  Instead of performing a specific effect of “sliding”, a pseudo-ream chance is displayed temporarily, and then a specific symbol of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effects is changed by one symbol. You may make it perform control which makes it the combination of a big hit symbol. For example, in a variation pattern that becomes a pseudo-ream, after a temporary stop in the pseudo-ream, control may be performed so that a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed by varying only one symbol as the last variation. Such a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” and a specific effect of “slip” may be performed when either of 15 round big hit or 2 round big hit.

  47 to 49 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 47 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all, the production design changes. After that, as shown in FIG. 47B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  For example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 47 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. Effect display is performed to change the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-3, as shown in FIGS. 47 (D1) to (D5), all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9 </ b> L and 9 </ b> R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), thereby changing the effect symbols to the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 47 (C3) and FIG. 47 (D5), as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, etc., as shown in FIG. 48B, a number indicating “6” is displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 48B, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, but the fluctuation display result is “out of”. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol of the number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the effect symbol variation display. When the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, the reach effect β1, and the reach effect β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. 48C, the change of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C that has been reduced. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 48D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 48 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 48 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 48G, an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (G), the effect symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, but the fluctuation display result becomes “out of”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the effect symbol variation display. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 48 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. Further, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 48J is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 48 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). The directed design appears. When the variation display result is “out of”, the displayed effect symbols are not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-removed combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variation display is ended. In the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also called “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Next, a specific example of the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect executed in the above-described pseudo-continuous variation pattern will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display operation when the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is not performed. FIG. 51 is an explanatory view showing an example of a display operation when the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is performed.

  Next, in the pseudo ream, when the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is not performed, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, the pseudo ream chance is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display. After that, re-variation of the pseudo-ream is performed. For example, as shown in (A), the variation of the effect symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, as shown in (B) and (C), the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of “left”, “right”, and “middle” in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In the case of the quasi-continuous variation pattern, after the quasi-continuous chance is temporarily stopped as shown in (C), the re-variation is started as shown in (D) and (E), so that the quasi-continuous variation is observed. Is done. Then, when the variation time determined for each variation pattern elapses, the variation of the effect symbol is stopped and the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, when a chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is performed in the pseudo-ream, as shown in (A), symbol display of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. After the production symbols start to change in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R, as shown in (B), in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the pseudo consecutive chances in the order of “left” and “right”. Reach formation symbols that are not visible (“left” and “right” are the same symbol) are temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in (C) and (D), in the state where the effect symbols continue to fluctuate in the “middle” symbol display area 9C, for example, the “right” symbol display area 9L, 9R In a part of the symbol display area such as the symbol display area 9R, a sliding effect is performed in which the temporarily stopped effect symbols are changed by a predetermined number of symbols (for example, by the number of symbols). When such a slide effect is performed, a part of the symbols is changed from a reach formation symbol to a symbol capable of forming a pseudo-continuous chance pattern. In the case of FIG. 51, “3”, “4” pseudo consecutive chances (for example, “3”, “4”, “4”) are formed from the reach formation symbols “3”, “3”. The design is changed by the slide effect to the design that can be. Thereafter, as shown in (E), when the effect symbol temporarily stops in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, a fluctuating pseudo-continuous chance (for example, “3”, “4”, “4”) is formed. The combination of symbols to be temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in (F) and (G), when the re-variation is started, the pseudo-continuous variation is performed, and when the variation time determined for each variation pattern elapses, the variation of the production symbol is stopped, The final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the effect that the pseudo-continuous re-variation is performed after the pseudo continuous chance is temporarily stopped after the start of the variation display as shown in FIG. 50 is not performed. Only the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip shown in 51 may be performed.

  In this way, in the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip, after a temporary stop of a combination of symbols other than the pseudo continuous chance pattern such as a reach formation symbol in the pseudo-ream fluctuation pattern, the slip effect is partially performed. Since the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped based on the change of the temporary stop symbol, even if a combination of symbols other than the pseudo-continuous chance is stopped, the pseudo-continuous chance is changed and the pseudo-continuous chance is changed again. Since there is a possibility that the game will be executed, the production will be surprising, so that the entertainment related to the re-variable display is improved and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is based on changing a part of the temporary stop symbols after temporarily stopping a combination of symbols other than the pseudo consecutive chances in the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous. It is an example of an effect that temporarily stops the chance eyes. In this way, the effect of changing the temporary stop symbol to make the pseudo-continuous chance is not limited to the first temporary stop, but may be performed at the second and subsequent temporary stops. For example, a predetermined random number value is used to randomly select and decide which fluctuation times are temporarily stopped at the time of temporary stop, and select and determine a temporary stop symbol to be changed by sliding, The determined temporary stop symbol is displayed and a post-slip chance temporary stop effect as described above is performed. Such an effect of changing the temporary stop symbol may be executed at all timings of temporary stop (temporary stop timing) or may be executed at some predetermined timing. . That is, the post-slip chance eye temporary stop effect may be executed at any one timing or may be executed at any one of a plurality of times. For example, a predetermined random number is used to randomly select and determine which of the fluctuating times of the one-time or a plurality of fluctuating temporary stops is to be performed at random. Temporary stop symbols to be changed (temporary stop symbols to be changed for each slip effect when performing multiple slip effects) are selected and determined, and the determined temporary stop symbols are displayed at the time of the determined variable stop temporary stop as described above. A chance stop temporary stop production is performed after a slip. Further, such an effect of changing the temporary stop symbol may be executed at a predetermined temporary stop timing, or may be executed at a randomly determined temporary stop timing. Thus, the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip is called the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip by being performed at the first temporary stop timing. Therefore, the effect of changing the temporary stop symbol by the slide effect and setting the pseudo-continuous chance as the effect including the effect performed at the first stop chance chance stop temporary stop effect and other temporary stop after the first slip, This is called a chance stop. In addition, the effect of changing the temporary stop symbol to make a pseudo-continuous chance is, for example, a symbol changing method for switching a predetermined number of symbols on the spot, and a symbol displayed by deforming the symbol by morphing You may make it carry out using symbol changing methods other than a slide effect, such as the symbol changing method which changes. The effect including the case where the symbol changing method is performed using a symbol changing method other than the slip effect is called a symbol change chance temporary stop effect. The determination as to whether or not to execute such a symbol change chance temporary stop effect and the determination of the effect mode of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect may be performed by the game control microcomputer 560. You may make it carry out with the microcomputer 100 for control.

  In addition, the symbol change chance eye stop effect does not have to change the symbol after temporarily stopping the reach formation symbol. It may be a chance to come after.

  In addition, in such a symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect, a symbol other than the reach formation symbol is used as the temporary stop symbol to be changed to the pseudo-continuous chance. It may be. For example, when performing a “sliding” effect as a specific effect (slip effect that does not become a pseudo-ream) (for example, an effect that causes reach after a slip) You may make it determine the temporary stop symbol used as the object to change. By doing so, the player discriminates whether to produce a slip when the temporary stop symbol to be changed in the pseudo-continuous chance becomes a pseudo-continuous or a slip when not becoming a pseudo-continuous. Since it becomes difficult to play, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the symbol change chance temporary stop effect is not limited to changing a part of the reach formation symbol where the effect symbol has not been temporarily stopped in some symbol areas, but the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in all symbol areas. Some temporary stop symbols may be changed at the same timing.

  Further, in such a symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the chance after the first slip, the symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” It is possible to change the design such as slipping in any region, and the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on which region the symbol is changed. For example, the reliability of the big hit may be different in the relationship of “left” <“middle” <“right”. In addition, in such a symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect, an area in which a symbol change such as a slip can be executed a plurality of times during one change in the pseudo-ream. The reliability may be different depending on how many times the symbol is changed such as slipping in the region. For example, the reliability of the big hit may be different in a relationship of 1 <2 <3. Further, the region where the symbol change such as slipping is executed has a high reliability in the relationship of “left” <“middle” <“right”, and how many times the symbol change such as slipping is performed is 1 The reliability that is a big hit may be different in the relationship of times <2 times <3 times. That is, the reliability that is the biggest hit may be increased when the symbol is changed three times in the “right” symbol display area 9R.

  In addition, for such a symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect, it is determined whether or not to execute, and the symbol change mode to be executed (in which region the symbol is changed) The game control microcomputer 560 may determine the number of times the symbol is changed and how to change the symbol change display (slip etc.). Alternatively, it may be determined by the production control microcomputer 100 side. When making these determinations on the side of the game control microcomputer 560, the time constraint relating to the management of the variation pattern can be eliminated. On the other hand, when making these determinations on the production control microcomputer 100 side, the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. Further, regarding the symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect as described above, the game control micro is related to the determination of whether to execute and the determination of the symbol change mode to be executed. The determination items may be shared and determined at a predetermined ratio between the computer 560 side and the production control microcomputer 100 side. For example, regarding the symbol change chance temporary stop effect including the first after-slip chance temporary stop effect as described above, any one of determination regarding whether to execute and determination of the symbol change mode to be executed Alternatively, a plurality are determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and the rest are determined on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the effect control process of S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining the aspect of the effect or the like is executed (S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  53 and 54 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command receiving buffer, for example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 32) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 4 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result specifying command storage area is stored (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S624). ). If the received effect control command is a surprise start designation command (S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a surprise start designation command reception flag (S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S630).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S642). ). If the received effect control command is a sudden end command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a sudden end command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (S649). Then, the process proceeds to S611.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 55, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 55A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 55B).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. SR3, pseudo-continuous first variation temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-1, pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stopping symbol determining random number SR4-2, first specific effect (sliding) pattern determining random number SR6- 1. Random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type of the first notice effect, the random number SR8 for determining the notice message of the button notice included in the first notice effect, and the basic development as the first step-up notice included in the first notice effect Random number SR9 for determining the advance notice step, random number SR10 for determining color reliability display, random number SR11 for determining pattern reliability display, random number SR12 for determining execution of the second advance notice effect, second notice effect Random number SR13 for determining the announcement step of the two-step-up announcement, Random number SR14 for determining the execution of the third announcement effect, Random number SR15 for determining the movable member operation of the movable member announcement as the third announcement effect, Execution of the fourth announcement effect Random number SR16 for determination, random number SR17 for determining mini-character display for mini-character announcement as fourth notice effect, random number SR18 for determining execution of fifth notice effect, random number for group display decision for group notice as fifth notice effect SR19, Random number SR20 for determining the first step-up notice content, Random number SR21 for determining the reach branch notice step as the first step-up notice included in the first notice effect, For determining the notice step of the button branch notice step Random number SR22 and random number SR23 for determining the notice content of the button branch notice step. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect. Moreover, it is desirable to set the random number values related to the notice effect such as SR7 to SR23 so that the upper limit values thereof are different prime numbers. In this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the execution mode of the notice effect is biased to a part of the execution mode.

  The pseudo-random first variation temporary stop symbol random number SR4-1 is an effect symbol (temporary stop) for temporary stop display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the first variation. This is a random number used to determine the symbol. The pseudo-random second variation temporary stop symbol random number SR4-2 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after subsequent re-variation. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol).

  The random number SR3 for determining the temporary sliding stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the first notice effect, and determines the notice pattern type when executing the first notice effect as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It is a random number used for. Here, the notice effect refers to an effect for notifying that a big hit gaming state is reached at the time of variable display. In the case of the present embodiment, the notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, a third notice effect, a fourth notice effect, and a fifth notice effect.

  The first notice effect is an effect for displaying an image for a notice using a wide range of the effect display device 9, and one notice from a plurality of kinds of notice effects such as a button notice and a first step-up notice. It is executed by selecting a production. The reason for selecting and executing one notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effects is as follows. When a plurality of types of notice effects included in the first notice effect are executed at the same time, the display timing and the display location (display area) overlap, and the effect is cluttered by being displayed twice. Therefore, in order to prevent such effects from being messed up, one notice effect selected from a plurality of types of notice effects is executed as the first effect. In addition, by selecting a notice effect to be executed from a plurality of types of notice effects, it is possible to facilitate design change of the occurrence ratio of the notice effect with respect to the notice effect control. Further, since it is only necessary to execute the process of determining the effect mode for the selected type of the notice effect, the processing amount of the control program related to the notice effect can be reduced.

  The button notice means a notice effect that is executed on condition that the operation button is operated during the variable display. The first step-up notice is a notice in which the form of the notice is stepped up in a plurality of stages, and a notice effect selected from a plurality of notice effects such as a basic advance notice, a reach branch notice, and a button branch notice is provided. Executed. The step-up notice is composed of a plurality of notice steps, and the notice form is stepped up (developed) in a plurality of stages by executing the plurality of notice steps in a predetermined order. The basic advance notice is a notice effect in which the basic step-up effect is performed by executing the notice step in the basic step-up manner as the first step-up notice. Each of the reach branch notice and the button branch notice is provided. A production aspect common to the above is included. The reach branch notice is a notice effect in which the notice step branches into a plurality of steps, and a reach confirmation effect indicating that the reach state is established during the step-up notice effect similar to the basic advance notice is performed. The effect branches to a step and a reach unconfirmed effect step indicating that the reach state has not yet been established. Note that the reach branch notice may not include a reach confirmation effect step. In that case, it is only necessary to perform an effect such that the step-up notice branches off from the middle stage of the notice effect, and it may be called with a notice name “step-up branch notice”. The button branch notice is an operation notice effect that executes a notice on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated from a predetermined notice step while a step-up notice effect is performed in the same notice step as the basic development notice. This is a notice effect in which the notice step branches off. Thus, the button branch notice is a kind of notice effect of button notice because it includes an effect part in which a notice effect in which the notice step branches into a plurality of conditions is executed on condition that the operation button 30 is operated.

  Thus, as the first notice effect, either the button notice or the first step-up notice is executed, and when the first step-up notice is executed, the basic development notice, the reach branch notice, and the button Any one of the branch notices is selected and executed. Each of the basic advance notice, reach branch notice, and button branch notice is provided as a separate notice from the first step up notice, and whether or not to execute is determined separately from the first step notice. You may make it do. Specifically, as the first notice effect, any one of the notice effects is selected from the button notice, the basic development notice, the reach branch notice, and the button branch notice, and the selected notice effect is executed. Good. In addition, an example in which the button notice is executed exclusively as the first step-up notice as the first notice effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice is provided independently as another notice executed at a different timing or in a different display area from the first notice effect to which the first step-up notice belongs. You may make it judge separately.

  The second notice effect is an effect of displaying an image for the notice using a region smaller than the first notice effect, and one kind of predetermined notice effect such as the second step-up notice is executed. . Here, the second step-up notice is a step-up notice that is different from the first step-up notice, and there are a plurality of stages of notices indicating that it is a big hit in the display screen area of the virtual monitor displayed as an image. This is an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a monitor notice) performed in the steps. Note that, as the second step-up notice, a notice effect in which the notice step is not branched into a plurality of notices is performed, but a notice effect in which the notice step is divided into a plurality of notices such as a reach branch notice and a button branch notice may be performed. . In addition, as the second step-up notice, in the case of performing a notice effect in which the notice step branches in a plurality, such as the reach branch notice and the button branch notice, the reach branch notice and the button branch notice are not included in the first step up notice. You may do it. In other words, it is only necessary that the notice effect in which the notice step branches into a plurality of notices, such as the reach branch notice and the button branch notice, can be executed by at least one of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of step-up notice effects such as the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice regarding the step-up notice. The step-up notice effect to be executed is selected from the effects.

  For the first notice effect, first, as the first notice effect, a decision is made as to which type of notice effect is to be selected from the button notice and the first step-up notice, and then the selected notice effect is executed. Whether or not to do so, and a notice pattern for execution may be selected and determined.

  Also, one type of predetermined notice effect may be executed as the first notice effect, and one notice effect may be selected and executed from a plurality of kinds of notice effects as the second notice effect. Moreover, you may select and perform one notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effects in both the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

  The third notice effect is a notice effect that is performed separately from the first notice effect and the second notice effect, and is an effect that performs a notice operation as a notice operation using a movable member. In the third notice effect, a movable member notice for making a notice is executed by operating a star-shaped movable member 84 as a movable member in a predetermined manner.

  The fourth notice effect is an effect of displaying an image for the notice on the effect display device 9 separately from the first notice effect to the third notice effect. In the fourth notice effect, a mini character notice is given to make a notice by displaying a small character image called a mini character. A mini character is an abbreviation for a mini character, and is an image having a lower visibility than at least an effect design as identification information. More specifically, the mini character is an image having lower visibility than the effect design in the stop state including the temporary stop state. In addition, the mini character may be an image having lower visibility than the production symbol, and basically has a size (display area) smaller than the production symbol, but if the shape is less visible than the production symbol, the production character The size may be larger than that. The mini character is an image that is less visible than a character other than the mini character, such as being smaller in size than a character image displayed as a character other than the mini character.

  The fifth notice effect is an effect of displaying an image for the notice on the effect display device 9 separately from the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect. In the fifth notice effect, a group notice for giving a notice is executed by displaying a group of predetermined character images.

  The random number SR8 for determining a button notice notice message is a random number used to decide a notice message as a button notice notice pattern, which will be described later, to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance.

  The random number SR9 for determining the notice step of the first step-up notice is one of a plurality of kinds prepared in advance as a notice step of the basic development notice executed as one kind of notice in the first step-up notice. It is a random number used to determine

  The random number SR10 for determining the color reliability display is a random number used to determine any one of a plurality of types of display patterns for displaying the color reliability indicating the reliability that will be a big hit after the notification in the button notification. It is. The random number SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is used to determine one of a plurality of types of display patterns for displaying the pattern reliability indicating the reliability that will be a big hit after the advance notice in the first step-up notice. The random number used.

  The random number SR12 for determining execution of the second notice effect notice pattern is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the second notice effect. The random number SR13 for determining the second step-up advance notice step is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types of advance notice steps as a second step-up advance notice pattern to be described later. Note that the second notice effect may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the second notice effect.

  The random number SR14 for determining the execution of the third notice effect notice pattern is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the third notice effect. The random number SR15 for determining the movable member operation is a random number used for determining one of a plurality of types of previously prepared movable member operation patterns as the advance notice pattern of the movable member advance notice executed as the third advance notice effect. is there. It should be noted that the third notice effect may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the third notice effect.

  The random number SR16 for determining execution of the fourth notice effect notice pattern is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the fourth notice effect. The random number SR17 for determining the mini character display is a random number used to determine the mini character display pattern as the notice pattern of the mini character notice executed as the fourth notice effect as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Note that the fourth notice effect may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the notice pattern.

  The random number SR18 for determining the execution of the fifth notice effect notice pattern is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the fifth notice effect. The group display determination random number SR19 is a random number used to determine a group display pattern as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance as a notice pattern of the group notice executed as the fifth notice effect. Note that the fifth notice effect may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the notice pattern.

  The random number SR20 for determining the content of the first step-up notice is selected as a first step-up when the first step-up notice is determined to be executed. It is a random number used to select a notice to be executed from.

  The random number SR21 for determining the advance step of the reach branch notice is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types of advance notice patterns for the reach branch notice executed as the first advance notice effect. Note that the reach branch notice may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the reach branch notice. The random number SR22 for determining the step for notifying the button branch notice is a random number used for determining one of a plurality of types of the notice pattern for the button branch notice executed as the first notice effect. It should be noted that the button branch notice may be selected and determined using one random number value as to whether or not to execute the notice and the notice pattern when it is executed.

  The random number SR23 for determining button branch notice content is a plurality of pre-prepared contents (specifically, notice contents described later) of the notice to be performed after branching when it is decided to execute the button branch notice. A random number used to determine one of the types.

  It should be noted that a data table for collectively determining the notice step of the button branch notice as described above and the contents of the notice to be performed after the branch (specifically, the notice contents described later) is provided. The random number SR22 for determining the notice step and the random number SR23 for determining the button branch notice content are shared by one random number, and based on the common random number, the notice step of the button branch notice and the contents of the notice performed after the branch May be selected and determined collectively.

  Such random numbers SR1-1 to SR23 are cyclically updated within the range associated in FIG. 56, and extracted at a timing determined for each.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 57 (A) to (D). 160A to 160D are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 57 (A) is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 57B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determining random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 57C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 58, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Including the data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 57 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or jackpot combination. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 57 (C), combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion of the combination. For example, even in a combination other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 14 or the portion that becomes a constant non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With this assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a table for determining a definite production symbol that is a combination of reach deviation. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 60 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same effect symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 60 (B) is a medium final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "medium" symbol display area 9C among the finalized effect symbols that become the reach out of combination. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 60B, as the data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, the symbol difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown.

  In other words, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the unreachable combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol resulting in the variation display result of the production symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "medium" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined.

  The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. Are super PA3-1 to super PA3-3 (super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2), super PB3-1 to super PB3-3 (super PB3-3-1, super PB3-3). -2), in the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4 and Special PG2-3, Super PA3-4 to Super PA3-6 (Super PA3-6-1, Super PA3-6 2) A numerical value (compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol in accordance with one of the fluctuation patterns) A value), the symbol difference "-2", "- 1", "+ 1", and data (determination value) that corresponds to the "+ 2".

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 61 are included as tables for determining a definite effect symbol that is one of the jackpot combinations. include. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 61 are left-stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit symbols. It is a table referred to in order to determine the middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a specific effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164A is included.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 62 slips the specific effect pattern based on the first specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-1 when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6 (super PA3-6-1). , Super PB3-6-2), super PA4-2, super PA5-2, super PB3-2, super PB4-2, super PB5-2, super PC3-2, super PC3-4, super PD1-2, super First identification according to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 15 and 16) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PE1-2, special PG1-2, special PG2-2, and special PG3-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for effect pattern determination, which is a slip TP1-1 to a slip TP1 Corresponding to a particular presentation patterns 4 including the data (determination value).

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the change pattern of the previous effect symbol). You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. In addition, each of 1-4 shall show each of slip TP1-1-slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. May be. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 62 is used, but the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value and If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 63 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol to be displayed temporarily when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is, for example, according to which of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. Selected as a usage table. That is, when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the use table, and when it is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the use table. In the case of slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the usage table, and in the case of slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the usage table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 64 is used as a table for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included.

  Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5 or a super PA3-3 (super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2), super PA3-6 (super PA3-6-1, super PB3-6-2), super PA4-3, super PA4-6 (super PA4-6-1, super PA4-6-2) ), Super PB3-3 (Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2), Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, Special PG1-4 It is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations that are executed until the finalized design that is the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol variation is displayed twice before (“pseudo-continuous variation”) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table.

  Further, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A indicates the remaining number of all revariable display operations that are executed until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being Super PA4-3. When “0” is “0”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R; The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3 (Super PA3-3-1, Super PA3-3-2), Super PA3-6 (Super PA3-6-1, Super PA3-6). 2), Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6 (Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2), Super PB3-3 (Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2), Super PB4 -3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, Special PG1-4, the all-revariable display operation that is executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, the symbol display of “right” Use table for determining the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped at the rear 9R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "middle" symbol display area 9C. Selected as.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3 (Super PA3-3-1 and Super PA3-3-2), Super PA3-6 (Super PA3-6-1, Super PA3-6). 2), Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6 (Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2), Super PB3-3 (Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2), Super PB4 -3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, Special PG1-4, the all-revariable display operation that is executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed When the remaining number of times is “2” or more, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, the “right” symbol Use to determine the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area 9R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "middle" symbol display area 9C. Selected as a table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 64A corresponds to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. , A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first quasi-continuous change, and the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-3, KZ2-2 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 64B corresponds to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. , A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first quasi-continuous change of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-3, KZ3-2 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 64C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the middle temporary stop symbol 3-3, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for temporary stop symbol determination at the time of pseudo-second variation according to which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-3, and KZ4-2.

  65 to 67 are explanatory diagrams showing stop symbols and effects in pseudo-continuous variation. FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 show a stop symbol and an effect when the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is not executed. FIG. 67 shows a stop symbol and an effect when a chance temporary stop effect after the first slip is executed.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using the determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, each time according to the number of executions of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect symbols to be displayed in a temporary stop in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  When the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 is used, as shown in FIG. 65, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-3, and KZ2-2 in the third variation. After the chance eye is displayed as a temporary stop, the effect of sliding the right temporary stop symbol is executed, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the chance first temporary stop effect after the first slip is executed, it is constituted by a combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-3, KZ4-2 with the first fluctuation. The reach formation symbol formed by setting the left symbol and the right symbol to the symbol corresponding to the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1 is stopped (temporarily stopped) before the pseudo consecutive chance is displayed. After that, an effect of changing the right pattern in a sliding manner (an opportunity to temporarily stop after the first slip as shown in FIG. 51) is executed. Thereby, in the display, the right symbol is changed from the reach formation symbol corresponding to the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1 to the temporary stop symbol by the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2 due to the effect of the slip fluctuation.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol variation control pattern table. The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 68. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 68, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the effect symbols starts until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as an effect display operation in the reach effect, an effect display operation in the reach effect, and an effect display operation in the specific effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, a variety of representation symbol variation displays such as a representation control process timer setting value, a representation control process timer determination value, a representation display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the production operation is included, and various types of production control content, production control switching timing, and the like are set in time series.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of an effect control pattern table. Among the control pattern tables stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the various production control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 69 includes various production control during the period in which the big hit gaming state is controlled. A plurality of types of data indicating contents are stored as production control patterns. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, and an end code corresponding to the progress of the effect operation in the big hit gaming state The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, etc. are set in time series.

  Next, specific examples of the first notice effect and the second notice effect executed during the variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 70 and 71, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in these drawings, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the button notice of the first notice effect is executed as an example of the notice effect. In FIG. 70, (A) to (F) show the display states when the button notice is executed during the pseudo-variable display as time elapses. The button notice is executed as a first notice effect.

  Referring to FIG. 70, as shown in (A) and (B), “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol displays corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols in the special symbol variation display, etc. The change of the effect design is started in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is decided to execute the button advance notice, as shown in (C), an image showing an envelope (hereinafter referred to as an envelope image) in a changing state where the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. 9P is displayed, an image indicating an operation button (hereinafter referred to as an operation button image) 9Q, an image indicating an operation request message “Please press the button” (hereinafter referred to as an operation request message image) 9S, Is displayed.

  In the envelope image 9P, the color of the envelope is selected according to the ratio of the big hit after the notice effect (for example, “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue)”, and In order of “third color display (yellow)”, a color is selected so as to indicate that the reliability of the big hit after the button notification is high (the relationship between the big hit reliability is the first color display <the second color display < (Third color display))), the display showing the reliability of the big hit. Thereby, since the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the color of the envelope before the button notice is given, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the operation of the operation button 30 by the player can be promoted. Such a display indicating the reliability of the big hit is called a color reliability display. Further, the display of the operation button image 9Q and the operation request message image 9S is performed as a button operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the operation button 30. Regarding the color reliability display in the button notice, the color reliability display is not performed for all the fluctuations in the pseudo-ream, but the color reliability display for a specific part of the fluctuations. It may be performed. That is, regarding the color reliability display in the button notice, the color reliability display may be performed for at least one variation.

  In “first color display” to “third color display”, the color reliability display of the same color may be selected a plurality of times in succession, or may be selected out of order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the order of the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a reverse manner (for example, the second color display is not selected after the third color display is selected). It is. Specifically, for example, when the first color display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, the first color display having a reliability higher than the first color display in the second variation. The color display with the above reliability color is selected. Further, for example, when the second color display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, the color display with a color with a reliability higher than the second color display is performed in the second variation. Selected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from having a low degree of reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  The button operation promotion effect may be any effect as long as it is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example. Further, the button operation promotion effect is not limited to the effect display device 9 that displays the effect image, but the one that outputs a predetermined sound from the speaker 27, for example, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect. A lighting device such as an LED 85c that lights or blinks in a predetermined lighting pattern, for example, a movable member provided in an effect accessory provided in the game area 7 or outside the game area 7 such as the movable member 78. It is also possible to use a combination of any of these.

  When the button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. And if operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped as shown in FIG. Of the plurality of types of effect modes determined, a notice is given that a big hit will be made in any of the effect modes. Specifically, the envelope image 9P is opened, and an effect is shown in which a notice message written on the document as the contents is displayed. As a plurality of types of production modes, a plurality of production modes with different notice messages written in the document are determined in advance, and any one of these production modes is selected, and the notice message according to the selected production mode Is displayed.

  The notice message includes, for example, the messages “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK”, and any one message is selected. Is displayed. The notice message has a selection ratio set so that the ratio of winning a big hit after the notice effect is different. In this embodiment, the degree of the ratio that becomes a big hit after the notice effect is referred to as the big hit reliability. For example, the reliability of the jackpot is set higher for the other notice messages than for the notice message “... Also, the reliability of the jackpot is set higher for the warning messages “Fever”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” than for “CHANCE”. Further, “REACH” is set to be selectable only when reaching after the notice effect. In addition, “FEVER” is set so that it can be selected only when a big hit occurs after the notice effect. As shown in (C) and (D), the button notice as the first notice effect is performed using a relatively wide display area of the effect display device 9.

  As described above, in the button notice, when the operation button 30 is operated by the player, the notice message according to the reliability of the jackpot is displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  After the display of the button notice as shown in (D) is finished, as shown in (F), in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, Display control is performed so as to be in a stop state (when re-change remains) or a complete stop state (when last change).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period, the display relating to the button notice as in (D) is not performed, and as shown in (E) and (F), The variation display is continued in the display mode, and the display control is performed so that the effect symbol is in a temporarily stopped state (when re-variation still remains) or a complete stop state (when it is the last variation).

  Note that “REACH” may be set to be selectable even when reach is not achieved after the notice effect. Further, “FEVER” may be set so that it can be selected even when a big hit is not made after the notice effect. In addition, for all notice messages of "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", "Intense heat", "FEVER", and "GOOD LUCK", both when it comes off and when it is a big hit In some cases, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different by making the selection possible as a notice and changing the ratio of winning the jackpot after the notice.

  In addition, for the color reliability display in the button notice, a basic color (for example, white) is predetermined as the envelope color, and the envelope color is specified from the basic color according to the reliability level of the big hit. By performing display control to change to a color (for example, yellow), the reliability for the big hit may be indicated (for example, when the reliability for the big hit is less than a predetermined level, the envelope color is the basic color) When the reliability that is a big hit is equal to or higher than a predetermined level, display control is performed so that the envelope color is a specific color).

  Moreover, in the button notice mentioned above, the example which displays the envelope image 9P of the same shape in each fluctuation | variation of the pseudo | simulation series was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and display control for displaying envelope images having different shapes according to fluctuations in the pseudo-series (some shapes may be different, all shapes may be different, or sizes may be different). May be performed. Further, the reliability of the big hit may be indicated by the shape of the envelope image 9P. For example, instead of color reliability display, by changing the shape of the envelope image according to the reliability of the big hit, such as making the shape of the envelope image a specific shape when the reliability of the big hit is high, the envelope You may make it show the reliability which becomes a big hit by the shape of an image.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed as an example of the notice effect. In FIGS. 71A to 71E, the display states when the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed during pseudo-variable display are shown as time elapses. In addition, FIG. 71 shows an example when the basic advance notice is selected as the first step notice.

  First, the basic development notice will be described. Referring to FIG. 71, as shown in (A) and (B), “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol variation display, etc. The change of the effect design is started in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is decided to execute the basic advance notice, after that, as shown in FIGS. 71 (B) to (D), in the changing state in which the production symbols are not stopped in any of the symbol display areas, a plurality of steps are performed. A basic advance notice composed of these steps is executed.

  Specifically, in the basic advance notice, the notice indicating that it will be a big hit is divided into a plurality of steps (for example, three steps of Step 1 to Step 3). In the quasi-continuous, up to five times of variation display (including re-variation) are continuously performed. As for the basic advance notice, three notice steps from Step 1 to Step 3 are executed to the maximum in each fluctuation display of the pseudo-series. For each of the notice steps from Step 1 to Step 3, images (hereinafter referred to as character images) 91T, 92T, and 93T showing three humanoid characters having different colors are prepared. One or a plurality of (three at the maximum) notice steps are selected and displayed from step 1 to step 3 for each variation display of a series of variation display performed continuously like a pseudo-ream. As a result, a character image corresponding to the selected step is displayed.

  In principle, the basic advance notice is a step 1 in which a first character image 91T with a first color (for example, black) is displayed, and a second color with a second color (for example, green). Display in a manner that steps up in multiple steps according to the order of step 2 in which the character image 92T is displayed and step 3 in which the third character image 93T with a third color (for example, red) is displayed. Is done. Therefore, for example, when a variable display is performed with a pseudo-continuous change pattern, the character image is switched and displayed each time the advance notice step is stepped up.

  For Step 1 to Step 3 constituting the basic advance notice, the reliability of the big hit is set in the order of Step 1 <Step 2 <Step 3 so that the ratio of the big hit when it is displayed increases thereafter. ing. As a result, when viewed from the player, in the order of the first character image 91T <the second character image 92T <the third character image 93T, the ratio of the big hit after being displayed is increased. The reliability that is a big hit is set.

  These step 1 to step 3 may be selected by repeating the same step a plurality of times, or may be selected by skipping the order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a manner in which the order is reversed (for example, step 1 is not selected after step 2 is selected). Specifically, for example, when the notice step of Step 1 is selected for the first time during the fluctuation of the pseudo-ream, the step of Step 1 or more is selected as the next notice step. Further, for example, when the notice step of Step 2 is first selected during the fluctuation of the pseudo-ream, the step of Step 2 or more is selected as the next notice step. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from having a low degree of reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  In FIG. 71, a display example of a typical basic advance notice in which three character images are displayed in the principle order as described above is shown. As shown in (B), in step 1, which is the first step in the basic advance notice, the first character image 91T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Then, in step 2, which is the second step in the basic advance notice, as shown in (C), the second character image 92T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Furthermore, in step 3, which is the third step in the basic advance notice, as shown in (D), a third character image 93T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen).

  As described above, in the basic development notice, character images of different colors may be sequentially displayed in all of steps 1 to 3 constituting the basic development notice.

  In addition, the character image displayed in each step of the basic advance notice is attached with one pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of patterns in which the selection ratio is set so that the ratio of the big hit after the notice effect is different. (For example, in the order of “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display (striped pattern)”, and “third pattern display (spotted pattern)”, the reliability that becomes a big hit after the basic development notice The pattern display is selected so as to indicate that it is high (the relationship of the big hit reliability is the first pattern display <the second pattern display <the third pattern display)). Thereby, in the basic advance notice, a pattern according to the reliability of the jackpot is attached to the character image and displayed at each step, so that the player's interest can be improved. Such a display indicating the reliability of the big hit is called a pattern reliability display. As for the pattern reliability display in the basic advance notice, the pattern reliability display is not performed for all steps, but may be performed for a specific part of the steps. Good. That is, regarding the pattern reliability display in the basic development notice, the pattern reliability display may be performed for at least one step. In particular, if the pattern reliability display is performed for step 1 as a specific partial step, the player's interest is attracted at the start of the notice effect, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Such a pattern reliability display is also performed when the reach branch notice using the character image similar to the case of the basic development notice is performed and when the button branch notice is performed. Is done.

  In “first pattern display” to “third pattern display”, pattern reliability display of the same pattern may be selected several times in succession, or may be selected out of order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the order of the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a reverse manner (for example, the second pattern display is not selected after the third pattern display is selected). It is. Specifically, for example, when the first pattern display is first selected during the fluctuation of the pseudo-series, the pattern reliability display having the reliability higher than the first pattern display is selected as the next pattern reliability display. Further, for example, when the second pattern display is first selected during the fluctuation of the pseudo-series, a step higher than the second pattern display is selected as the next pattern reliability display. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from having a low degree of reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  Then, when a big hit occurs after the notice effect, as shown in (E), when the last variation display is performed, all the character images displayed in the series of variation display are displayed (for example, the end of the screen). Appear from the department). For the basic advance notice, a fourth step (step 4) for performing display as shown in (E) may be provided as a notice step.

  In this way, in the basic advance notice, when the variable display is continuously performed, the character image is displayed in such a manner that the reliability of the jackpot is stepped up every time the variable display is performed. Interest can be improved.

  As for the basic advance notice described above, an example in which a character image having a different color appears in each of the plural notice steps is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and character images having different shapes (some shapes may be different, all shapes may be different, or sizes may be different) appear in each of the plurality of notice steps. Display control may be performed. As for the basic advance notice, an example is shown in which the pattern reliability display indicating the reliability of the big hit is performed by changing the type of the pattern attached to the character image according to the reliability of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color reliability display indicating the reliability of the big hit may be performed by changing the color type of the character image according to the reliability of the big hit. When performing such color reliability display, the character image appearing in each notice step has a basic color (for example, black), and the character image is displayed according to the reliability level that is a big hit. Display control may be performed to change the color of the character from a basic color to a specific color (for example, red) (for example, when the reliability of the big hit is less than a predetermined level, the color of the character image is set as the basic color, When the reliability of the big hit is equal to or higher than a predetermined level, display control is performed so that the color of the character image is a specific color).

  Next, the second step-up notice will be described. Referring to FIG. 71, a second step-up notice composed of a plurality of steps in a changing state where the effect symbols are not stopped in any of the symbol display areas as shown in (B) to (D). Is executed. The second step-up notice is executed independently of the first notice effect as a second notice effect different from the first notice effect including the first step-up notice and the button notice described above. FIG. 71 shows an example in which the second step-up notice is executed in parallel with the first step-up notice.

  Specifically, a monitor 95 as a virtual display device is displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 9, and in the display screen area of the monitor 95, a notice indicating that a big hit is made in a plurality of steps ( For example, it is divided into three stages (step A to step C). In the quasi-continuous, up to five times of variation display (including re-variation) are continuously performed. For the second step-up notice, the three notice steps, Step A to Step C, are executed at the maximum in each pseudo-variation display. For each notice step of Step A to Step C, three character images (referred to as monitor character images) 951, 952, and 953 having different shapes are prepared. One or a plurality of (three at the maximum) notice steps are selected and displayed among the steps A to C in each series of variation display performed continuously like a quasi-ream. As a result, the monitor character image corresponding to the selected advance notice step is displayed.

  The second step-up notice basically includes step A in which the first monitor character image 951 having the first shape (the body is circular) is displayed, and the second shape (the body is square). In accordance with the order of Step B in which the second monitor character image 952 formed is displayed and Step C in which the third monitor character image 953 having the third shape (the body is triangular) is displayed in a plurality of stages. Displayed in a step-up manner. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is performed with a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the monitor character image is switched and displayed each time the advance notice step is stepped up.

  Regarding Step A to Step C constituting the second step-up notice, the reliability of the big hit is such that the ratio of the big hit after the display becomes higher in the order of Step A <Step B <Step C. Is set. As a result, when viewed from the player, in the order of the first monitor character image 951 <the second monitor character image 952 <the third monitor character image 953, the rate of subsequent big hits when displayed is high. The reliability that is a big hit is set.

  In these steps A to C, the same step may be selected several times in succession, or may be selected out of order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a manner in which the order is reversed (for example, step A is not selected after step B is selected). Specifically, for example, when the notice step of step A is selected for the first time during the fluctuation of the pseudo-ream, a step greater than step A is selected as the next notice step. Further, for example, when the notice step of step B is first selected during the fluctuation of the pseudo-ream, a step equal to or higher than step B is selected as the next notice step. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from having a low degree of reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  Referring to FIG. 71, for example, at the stage of executing step 1 of the first step-up notice as shown in (B), the first monitor character is executed by step A which is the first step in the second step-up notice. An image 951 is displayed. At the stage of executing step 2 of the first step-up notice as shown in (C), the second monitor character image 952 is displayed by step B which is the second step in the second step-up notice. Then, at the stage of executing step 3 of the first step-up notice as shown in (D), the third monitor character image 953 is displayed by step C which is the third step in the second step-up notice.

  As described above, in the second step-up notice, character images having different shapes may be sequentially displayed in all of Steps A to C constituting the second step-up notice.

  Then, when a big hit occurs after the notice effect, although not shown, all monitor character images displayed in the series of variable display are displayed at the stage where the stop operation of the effect symbol is started.

  In this way, in the second step-up notice, when the variable display is continuously performed, the monitor character image is displayed in such a manner that the reliability of the jackpot is increased every time the variable display is performed. The interest of the player can be improved.

  Such a second step-up notice is executed when the determination as to whether or not to execute is performed separately from the first notice effect, and when it is determined to be executed. Therefore, the second step-up notice is executed as a notice effect when the second step-up notice is executed alone, simultaneously with the button notice, and simultaneously with the first step-up notice. There is a time.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the notice effect, when only one of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is executed, and when both are executed in parallel. There is. Therefore, as a mode in which the notice effect is executed, when only the button notice is executed, only the first step-up notice is executed, only the second step-up notice is executed, the button notice and the second There are times when the step-up notice is executed in parallel and when the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed in parallel.

  Next, another example of the first step-up notice will be described. As described above, as the first step-up notice, in addition to the basic development notice shown in FIG. 71, a reach branch notice and a button branch notice can be executed. Here, the reach branch notice will be described with reference to FIG. 72, and the button branch notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a timing chart for explaining the reach branch notice as the first notice effect. In FIG. 72, (A) shows a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, and (B) shows specific contents of the reach branch notice. In FIG. 72, a description will be given of an example of reach branch notice when there are three pseudo-reams.

  As shown to (A), in a pseudo | simulation series, the fluctuation | variation display of multiple times including re-variation is performed like the 1st fluctuation | variation display-the 3rd fluctuation | variation display, for example. The display that reaches the reach state is executed at the time of the last variation display such as the third variation display. The effect of reaching the reach branch is performed at the time of each variation display of the first variation display to the third variation display in the pseudo-ream. In FIG. 72, as a representative example of the content of the effect, the content of the effect executed at the time of the last variation display such as the third variation display is shown in (B).

  Referring to FIG. 72, in the third change display (re-change) when the reach branch notice is executed, the first character image is displayed in the first step as in the case of the basic development notice, In the second step, the second character image is displayed. In this way, by executing the notice step similar to the basic development notice, the player can recognize that the step-up notice is being executed. Then, in the third time, the notice step branches into a reach confirmation effect step indicating that the reach state is established and a reach unconfirmed effect step indicating that the reach state is not established. . Even when the reach branch notice is selected, depending on the execution mode selected, the notice effect may end at the first step or the second step without proceeding to the third step (FIG. 92). , See FIG. 93).

  In the step of reach determination production, in the stage before reaching the reach state, various types of production devices display an image indicating that the reach is confirmed (production display device 9), sound generation (speaker 27), and light emission ( Various lamps) are performed. The image showing that the reach is confirmed is a specific type of effect different from the image displayed in the previous effect so that the effect branched from the step-up effect displayed so far becomes clear By using the image, it is an image that can be recognized as a notice effect branched from a series of step-up notice effects. By performing such an effect, the player can grasp that the reach is determined.

  On the other hand, in the reach undetermined effect step, the image display (effect display device 9) and sound generation (speaker) that can specify that the reach has not been determined by various effect devices at the stage before reaching the reach state. 27) and effects such as light emission (various lamps) are performed. The image that can specify that the reach has not yet been determined may be a continuation of a series of step-up notice effects by using an image that is related to the image of the step-up effect that has been displayed so far. It is a recognizable image. In the step of reach undecided effect, the step of reach confirmed effect is shown by indicating that a series of step-up notices are continued using images related to the image of the step-up effect displayed so far. Is executed, the reach confirmation effect can be further emphasized as an effect branched from the step-up notice effect.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the reach confirmation effect step and the reach unconfirmed effect step may be any relationship as long as the effect can indicate whether or not reach is confirmed. For example, let the step of reach confirmation effect be the step of performing an effect with the same level of effect effect as the image displayed in the effect so far, and display the step of reach indefinite effect in the effect so far It may be possible to indicate whether or not reach is confirmed by performing the step of performing an effect (plain effect) having a lower level of effect than the image that has been performed.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing a display example on the effect display device 9 for explaining the button branch notice as the first notice effect. In FIG. 73, (A) to (G) show the display state when the button branch notice is executed during pseudo-variable display as time elapses.

  When the effect symbols as shown in (A) are stopped, when the effect symbols start to change in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R as shown in (B), the effect of the basic development notice is given. Similarly to the above, the character image 91T displayed in the first notice step of the step is displayed. In this way, by executing the notice step similar to the basic development notice, the player can recognize that the step-up notice is being executed.

  When the button branching step is selected as the second notice step, the notice step branches to the notice step of the operation notice effect that performs the notice effect according to the operation of the operation button 30 (such as this The branch of the flow of the production is called button branch), and the button operation promotion production as shown in (C) is performed. Specifically, in the button operation promotion effect, an image showing a parcel (hereinafter referred to as a parcel image) 96 is displayed, and an operation button image 9Q is displayed, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the operation button 30 is performed. . As the button operation promotion effect, an operation request message image 9S as shown in FIG. 70 may be displayed together with the button notice. The button operation promotion effect is performed in any effect mode such as display on the display screen of the effect display device 9, sound output of the speaker 27, and operation of the movable member, as in the case of the button notice described above. Also good. On the other hand, when the button branching step is not selected as the second notice step, that is, when the button branch notice is not performed, as shown in FIG. The character image 92T displayed in the second notice step is displayed, then the image fades out, and the button branch notice is finished. In this case, an effect that can use the operation button 30 is not performed, and button branch notice is not substantially performed.

  When the button operation promotion effect as shown in (C) is performed, it is an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. And if operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped as shown in FIG. Of the plurality of types of effect modes determined, a notice is given that a big hit will be made in any of the effect modes. Specifically, an effect of opening the parcel in the parcel image 96 and showing the contents (hereinafter also referred to as a notice content display effect) is performed. As a plurality of types of production modes, a plurality of production modes with different contents of the parcel are determined in advance, and one of these production modes is selected, and the contents of the parcel are displayed according to the selected production mode. Is done. Specifically, an image selected from images displaying gold bullion, bill bundles, and no content is displayed at a predetermined rate according to the game situation. In this example, the relationship of reliability that is a big hit is set as a relationship of gold bullion> bill bundle> contents. Thereafter, as shown in (G), the parcel image 96 is erased and the variable display is continued. (G) shows an example of a reach state. Thus, the timing when the reach state is reached is the same timing for the effect that proceeds by branching the button by (C) to (G) and the effect that proceeds without branching the button by (F) to (G). To be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period, the display for opening the parcel is not performed as shown in (E). Therefore, the effect of showing the contents of the parcel is not performed, and thereafter, as shown in (G), the parcel image 96 is deleted and the variable display is continued.

  Thus, in the button branch notice, when the operation button 30 is operated by the player, the contents of the parcel corresponding to the reliability of the jackpot are displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In addition, as the notice content display effect in the button branch notice, it is only necessary to produce an effect so that the notice contents can be recognized in a distinguishable manner. Expectation of jackpot depends on character type), number image (expectation of jackpot depends on number type), character image (expectation on jackpot depends on character type), etc. These various images may be used. In addition, in the button branch notice, as the notice effect performed in response to the operation of the operation button 30, a predetermined effect indicating the degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be performed in addition to the notice content display effect. For example, in the button branch notice, as a notice effect performed in response to the operation of the operation button 30, instead of the notice contents display effect, an image of a predetermined character (the character appears in advance during the button operation promotion effect). Or may appear after a button operation.) An effect that says a different kind of dialogue depending on the degree of expectation of jackpot (an effect that says dialogue by character display, an effect that says speech by voice, or a dialogue by character display and voice) Any production of productions that say) may be performed.

  Next, the relationship between the first notice effect and the second notice effect when pseudo-variable display is performed will be described. FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the first notice effect and the second notice effect when pseudo-variable display is performed. In FIG. 74, (A) and (B) show the following states. (A) includes a fluctuating pattern, a state of a first step-up notice as a first notice effect, a state of a second step-up notice as a second notice effect, and a button notice as a first notice effect. The state of is shown. Also, (B) shows the specific production contents of the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) when the pseudo-variable display is performed, and the second step-up notice. The specific contents of the (monitor notice) and the specific contents of the button notice are shown. In FIG. 74, a description will be given by way of an example of a notice effect that is performed at the time of three pseudo-reams.

  As shown to (A), in a pseudo | simulation series, the fluctuation | variation display of multiple times including re-variation is performed like the 1st fluctuation | variation display-the 3rd fluctuation | variation display, for example. The display to reach the reach state is executed at the time of the last variation display such as the third variation display at the time of the pseudo series three times. As shown in (A), each of the first notice effect (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice, button notice) and second notice effect (monitor notice) is displayed for the first time fluctuation display to 3 in the pseudo-ream. This is performed at each fluctuation display of the first fluctuation display. As shown in (A), for each of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, the first step-up notice and the first-step change display in the pseudo-ream, each step of the change display, the first step up to the maximum. -Step-up effect is performed in the third notice step. In the figure, the basic advance notice, the reach branch notice, the button branch notice, and the button notice as the first step up notice are shown in parallel. Only one is executed. Also, the second step-up notice can be executed as the second notice effect in parallel with the first step-up notice or the button notice that is the first notice effect.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in (B), for each of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, effects corresponding to the times of each change display of the first change display to the third change display (first time The start timing of the change notice to the third change notice is the timing after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start timing of each change display of the first change display to the third change display. For each of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the end timing of the effects corresponding to the times of each change display of the first change display and the second change display (first change notice and second change notice) The timing is before the end timing of each variation display of the first variation display and the second variation display. For each of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the end timing of the effect corresponding to the third change display (the third change notice) is basically the timing before the end of the third change display. Yes, specifically the timing before the timing when the reach state occurs. That is, each of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is performed at a timing before the timing at which the reach state occurs.

  For each of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the end timing of the effect corresponding to the third change display (the third change notice) is the third change display in the second step-up notice effect of (B). Control may be performed so that it may occur at a timing later than the timing at which the reach state occurs, as in step S3 of the third time. If the notice effect is performed at a timing later than the timing at which such a reach state occurs, the variation of the effect becomes abundant and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in (B), for each of the first change notice to the third change notice in the first step-up notice, for example, step 1 to step 3 as in steps 1 to 3, respectively. A maximum of three notice steps (not shown in this example) are included. Similarly, as shown in (B), for each of the first change notice to the third change notice in the second step-up notice, for example, step A to step C, step S1 to step S1. A maximum of three notice steps of S3 is included. In this embodiment, the switching timing from the first step S1 to the second step S2 of the second step-up notice is more than the switching timing from the first step S1 to the second step S2 of the first step-up notice. The timing is set to be later. Further, the switching timing from the second step S2 to the third step S3 of the second step-up notice is later than the switching timing from the second step S2 to the step 3 of the first step-up notice. Is set to In this way, if the timing for switching the notice step differs between the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, the step proceeds by viewing the state of the other step-up notice when one of the step-up notices ends. You can check the progress of the step-up notice, so even if the notice effect becomes complicated, the player knows where to see the progress of the notice about the step-up notice. It can be prevented from disappearing. Further, the notice effect B for the button notice is performed at the same timing in each of the first notice at the time of change to the notice at the time of the third change. Of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, one of the step-up notices is the final notice step (step 3 for the first step-up notice, step 3 for the second step-up notice) On the condition that it is decided to step up to C), a prohibition process for prohibiting stepping up to the final notice step may be performed for the other notice of step up. If such a prohibition process is performed, since only one of the two system step-up notices is advanced to the final notice step, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, by simultaneously executing the two step-up notices, even if one of the step-up notices is completed, it is possible to produce an effect that the other step-up notice continues. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Since the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed independently, for example, even when the first step-up notice ends in the middle without stopping until the third change notice (when it is interrupted) In some cases, the second step-up notice is still continued. On the contrary, even when the second step-up notice is not completed until the third change notice, but ends in the middle (when it is interrupted), the first step-up notice may still continue. Therefore, multiple types of step-up notices that are controlled independently are performed in parallel, so that even if a certain step-up notice does not proceed until the third change notice, it continues even when it is interrupted (when it is interrupted) Due to the presence of the step-up notice being performed, it is possible to produce an effect that enables the player to maintain a sense of expectation. Further, since the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel, variations of the notice effect can be abundant, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, specific examples of the third notice effect to the fifth notice effect executed during the variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. In FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is indicated by a rectangle as in the case of FIG. 70 and FIG.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation in the effect display device 9 of the movable member 84 when the movable member notice is executed as an example of the third notice effect. In FIG. 75, (A) to (C) show the operation state of the movable member 84 when the movable member advance notice is executed during the pseudo-variable display. In FIG. 75, with respect to the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, the movable member 78, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are not shown.

  Referring to FIG. 75, when the movable member is notified, the movable member 84 has a movable member operation A as shown in (A), a movable member operation B as shown in (B), and (C). The movable member is operated in any one of the operation modes as shown in FIG. The movable member operation A shown in (A) is a notice pattern that rotates at a low speed as the first rotation speed. The movable member operation B shown in (B) is a notice pattern that rotates at a medium speed (higher than the first rotation speed) as the second rotation speed. The movable member operation C shown in (C) is a notice pattern that rotates at a high speed (higher than the second rotation speed) as the third rotation speed.

  The selection ratio of the movable member operation is set so that the ratio of rotating operation at a high speed is larger for the movable member operation selected as the advance notice of the movable member when the big hit is made than when the big hit is not made. Specifically, with respect to the movable member operation A to the movable member operation C as the advance notice pattern of the movable member advance notice, in the order of the movable member operation A <movable member operation B <movable member operation C, it is a big hit after that. The reliability that is a big hit is set so that the ratio becomes high. As a result, the player sees a low-speed operation as shown in (A) <a medium-speed operation as shown in (B) <a high-speed operation order as shown in (C), and thereafter The reliability level for the big hit is set so that the ratio of the big hit to be high.

  Thus, in the movable member advance notice, the interest of the player can be improved by operating the movable member 84 in an operation mode according to the reliability of the big hit.

  Next, a modified example of the movable member notice will be described. As a movable member for performing the movable member advance notice, a movable member including a plurality of movable bodies may be used instead of the movable member 84. For example, a movable member composed of a plurality of movable members (small movable components) that can be individually operated (for example, three) is used, and the number of movable members that can be operated is increased or decreased. Also good. As the movable member notice effect in that case, the notice effect form to be executed can be selected from a plurality of notice effect forms with different movable bodies to be operated according to the reliability that is a big hit. For example, when the movable member operation A is selected, one movable member is operated, when the movable member operation B is selected, two movable members are operated, and when the movable member operation C is selected. The effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the control of operating the three movable members. The reliability of the big hit is set so that the movable member operation A <movable member operation B <movable member operation C. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the reliability that is a big hit based on the effect operation mode of the movable member, that is, the number of movable members that operate.

  As a plurality of movable bodies that can be individually operated, a movable member composed of a plurality of (for example, three) movable members is used, and the movable members to be operated are made different depending on the reliability of the big hit. It may be. For example, when the movable member operation A is selected, only the first movable member is operated, and when the movable member operation B is selected, only the second movable member is operated, and the movable member operation C is selected. The effect control microcomputer 100 may perform control to operate the plurality of movable members in order, such as sometimes operating only the third movable member. The reliability of the big hit is set so that the movable member operation A <movable member operation B <movable member operation C. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the reliability that is a big hit based on the movable member effect operation mode of which movable member is the movable member to be operated. Further, for example, the movable member operation A is executed in the first fluctuation, the movable member operation A is executed in the second fluctuation, and then the movable member operation B is executed (the movable member operation A and the movable member operation B are performed). A plurality of movable member operations may be executed in one change. Further, as a plurality of movable bodies that can be individually operated, a movable member composed of a plurality of (for example, three) movable members having different sizes is used, and the movable member that operates according to the reliability that is a big hit. You may make it vary the magnitude | size of. For example, when the movable member operation A is selected, the smallest first movable member is operated, and when the movable member operation B is selected, a second movable member that is larger than the first movable member is operated. When the movable member operation C is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform control to operate a third movable member larger than the second movable member. The reliability of the big hit is set so that the movable member operation A <movable member operation B <movable member operation C. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the reliability that is a big hit based on the effect operation mode of the movable member, which is the size of the movable member that operates. Moreover, as a plurality of movable bodies that can be individually operated, a movable member composed of a plurality of (for example, three) movable members with different benefits is used, and the movable body that operates according to the reliability that is a big hit. You may make it vary the shape of a member. As described above, when the notice effect is performed using a movable member including a plurality of movable bodies, the movable member to be operated may be different depending on the reliability that is a big hit.

  Further, as a plurality of movable bodies that can be individually operated, a movable member composed of a plurality of (for example, three) movable members is used, and the operation timing is varied according to the reliability of the big hit. May be. For example, you may vary the timing which operates a movable member according to the reliability which becomes a big hit. For example, while predetermining a plurality of operation timings including the start of fluctuation and associating those operation timings with a reliability level that is a big hit, the big hit is when the movable member is operated at the start of the fluctuation. You may control so that reliability may become the highest. In this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit for a long period of time from the start of the change to the end of the change. In addition, a plurality of operation timings including the start time of the reach state are determined in advance, and these operation timings are associated with the magnitude of reliability that is a big hit, and the movable member is operated at the start time of the reach state. However, it may be controlled so that the reliability of the big hit is the highest. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a reach effect with high reliability that is a big hit may be executed. In addition, a plurality of operation timings including a start time when the production of the reach state develops (step up) is determined in advance, and these operation timings are associated with the degree of reliability that is a big hit, so that when the development of the reach production starts When the movable member is operated in step 1, the control may be performed so that the reliability of the big hit is the highest. In this way, since the movable member is operated at a timing that is advantageous to the player, such as when the reach production develops, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will almost be a big hit. .

  As in this modification, when the movable member to be operated varies according to the reliability of the big hit, the operation speed of the movable member is controlled to be different according to the reliability of the big hit. Also good. In other words, the operation speed of the movable member to be operated may be set and controlled such that the movable member operation A <movable member operation B <movable member operation C.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example on the effect display device 9 when the mini character notice as an example of the fourth notice effect is executed. In FIG. 76, (A) to (E) show the display states when the mini character notice is executed during pseudo-variable display, as time elapses.

  FIG. 76 shows, as an example, a display state when the mini character notice is executed when the first step-up notice is executed. As described above, since the presence / absence of execution and the notice pattern are determined separately from other notice effects as described above, the mini character notice is executed simultaneously with other notice effects, and when the mini character notice is executed alone. There is.

  From the state where the production symbol as shown in (A) is stopped, the production symbol starts to change in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R as shown in (B1), (B2), or (B3). At the stage, when the mini character notice is performed, a mini character image selected from a plurality of types of mini character images 961, 962, 963 is displayed on the effect display device 9.

  For example, the first mini character image 961 shown in (B1) is an insect-shaped mini character, and is displayed when the notice pattern of the mini character display A is selected. The second mini character image 962 shown in (B2) is a leaf-shaped mini character, and is displayed when the notice pattern of the mini character display B is selected. The third mini character image 963 shown in (B3) is a bird-shaped mini character, and is displayed when the notice pattern of the mini character display C is selected.

  For the mini character display A to the mini character display C as the notice pattern of the mini character notice, the reliability of the big hit is set in the order of the mini character display A <mini character display B <mini character display C so that the ratio of the big hit after that increases. Has been. As a result, in terms of appearance from the player, in the order of the first mini character image 961 <the second mini character image 962 <the third mini character image 963, it becomes a big hit so that the ratio of the big hit after the display becomes high. Reliability is set.

  The mini character image is provided with a plurality of types of images including the first mini character image 961 to the third mini character image 963 for performing such a mini character notice. Regardless of whether or not, any mini character image is randomly selected and displayed. Therefore, the mini-character notice using the first mini-character image 961 to the third mini-character image 963 has a lower reliability than the other notice effects.

  Since the mini character image is an image with low visibility, when performing the mini character notice as in this embodiment, it is a notice effect that is easily overlooked by a player who has little gaming experience, Since it is possible to make a notice effect that the player does not need to miss, the satisfaction of the skilled player can be enhanced.

  As the mini character image, the mini character image may not be displayed at times other than the mini character notice, or the proportion of executing the mini character image at times other than the mini character notice may be extremely low. In this way, the reliability of the mini-character notice for the big hit increases, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the mini-character image. As for the mini character image, it is limited to the first mini character image 961 to the third mini character image 963 used for the mini character notice so that the mini character image is not displayed except for the mini character notice or the mini character is not used for the mini character notice. You may make it the ratio which performs an image extremely low. In this way, with respect to a specific mini character image used for the mini character notice, the reliability of the big hit of the mini character notice increases, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the mini character image.

  In addition, although the example which displays only one mini character image was shown as the mini character display which is a notice pattern of a mini character notice, it is not restricted to this, You may make it display a some mini character image as a mini character display. Further, when displaying a plurality of mini character images, an effect may be provided in which the number of mini character images to be displayed increases as time elapses. In this way, when a plurality of mini character images can be displayed, the reliability of the big hit may be set so that the larger the number of mini character images, the higher the ratio of the big hit after the notice.

  In addition, as an example of the mini character display that is a notice pattern of the mini character notice, an example is shown in which only the mini character image selected from the different types of mini character images is displayed. Alternatively, mini character images having different image display sizes (display areas) may be displayed. When displaying the same type of mini character images with different display sizes, the reliability of the big hit may be set so that the larger the mini character image display size, the higher the percentage of the big hit after the notice. Good.

  Further, as a mini character display that is a notice pattern of the mini character notice, a combination of mini character images selected from different types of mini character images may be displayed according to the reliability that is a big hit. For example, a mini character image to be displayed may be selected from among three types of mini character images, the selected mini character image may be displayed, and the reliability of the big hit may vary depending on the combination of the displayed mini character images. For example, for each of the three types of mini character images, a mini character image selection table is provided for each mini character image with different ratios for determining whether or not to select according to the reliability of the big hit. Make a decision. As a result, since the ease of selecting a mini character image differs depending on the reliability that is a big hit, a combination of displayed mini character images (a mini character image may not be selected or only one mini character image may be selected) In other words, the reliability of the big hit can be made different. In this way, the fun of the production using the mini character image is improved, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. Note that a mini character image to be displayed in combination is provided with one pre-defined mini character image combination selection table in a mode in which the selection ratio varies depending on the reliability of the big hit, and the mini character image is selected using the mini character image combination selection table. It is also possible to perform control for collectively selecting the combinations (the mini character image may not be selected or only one mini character image may be selected). In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing burden on the production control microcomputer 100 when selecting a combination of mini character images.

  As described above, in the mini character notice, the mini character image is displayed in a production manner corresponding to the reliability of the big hit, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example on the effect display device 9 when the group notice is executed as an example of the fifth notice effect. In FIG. 77, (A) to (J) show the display states when the group notice is executed during pseudo-variable display, as time elapses. The group notice is an effect of notifying that a big hit will be obtained when a plurality of images of the same or different types of characters, figures, character strings, etc. are displayed in groups.

  FIG. 77 shows, as an example, a display state when the group notice is executed when the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed. As described above, whether or not a group notice is executed separately from other notice effects and a notice pattern are determined. There is.

  After the effect symbols as shown in (A) are stopped, the effect symbols start to change in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R as shown in (B), and then (C) to (F As shown in (), the effect symbols are stopped as the variation time elapses. Then, as shown in (F), when the same stop symbols come together and reach the state in the stage where the effect symbols stop in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, as shown in (G). Then, the operation button image 9Q is displayed, and a button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 30 is performed. As the button operation promotion effect, an operation request message image 9S as shown in FIG. 70 may be displayed together with the button notice. The button operation promotion effect is performed in any effect mode such as display on the display screen of the effect display device 9, sound output of the speaker 27, and operation of the movable member, as in the case of the button notice described above. Also good.

  When the button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. Then, when an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, as shown in FIG. A group display as a notice pattern is performed. The group display is a display for giving a big hit notice by displaying a group of predetermined character images. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, as a character image used in the group notice, as shown in (H), a humanoid character of the same type as the character images 91T, 92T, and 93T used in the first step-up notice. A group display for displaying a group of images 94 is performed. In the group display, for example, as shown in (H), a display in which a large number of character images 94 appear in groups is performed. Note that even when a button operation promotion effect is performed and the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, control may be performed so that the group notice is not executed at a predetermined rate. . If it does so, the interest about displaying a group notice increases, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  As the group display, any one of the plurality of types of presentation modes is selected, and the group display according to the selected production mode is performed. In the case of this embodiment, as a plurality of types of effect modes that can be selected for the group notice, a plurality of types of effect modes with different numbers of character images 94 displayed as a group are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 77, since the character image 94 displayed in the group notice is the same type of image as the character image used in other effects, the content produced using the character images has a sense of unity, and the effects are interesting. Can be improved.

  As the notice pattern of group notice, three notice patterns of group display A, group display B, and group display C are provided, and the notice pattern to be displayed is selected and determined from these notice patterns. The group display A to the group display C display the same type of character images 94 as described above, and the number of character images 94 displayed in groups in the order of group display A <group display B <group display C. There are many. In addition, regarding the group display A to the group display C as the notice pattern of the group notice, in the order of the group display A <the group display B <the group display C, the ratio of the big hit after that is increased. The reliability that is a big hit is set. As a result, from the viewpoint of the player, the order of group display A <group display B <group display C, that is, the greater the number of character images 94 displayed in the group, the later the big hit when displayed. The reliability that is a big hit is set so that the ratio becomes high.

  In addition, as the effect mode of the group display, any effect mode may be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes in which the types of character images displayed in the group are different (the number of character images is the same and the character image is the same). The type of character image may be set so that the reliability level that is a big hit is distinguished, the type of character image that is distinguished from the level of reliability that is a big hit, and the type of character image that has a high reliability level that is a big hit It may be set so that the number of character images to be displayed in a group increases as the value increases.) In addition, as a group display effect mode, any one of the effect modes can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes in which at least one of the types of character images and the number of character images displayed in the group is different. May be. Further, as a group display effect mode, character images used only for the group notice effect may be displayed in groups, and as shown in FIG. 77, character images used in other effects may be displayed in groups. . In addition, as an effect mode of group display, any effect mode may be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes in which colors such as colors of character images displayed in groups are different. In addition, as an effect mode of group display, a character image scheduled to be displayed in a group after reaching a reach state is displayed in advance in a manner that does not form a group in a stage before entering the reach state (for example, A number of character images that do not form one group are displayed in advance), and the character images may be displayed in groups after reaching the reach state. If it does in that way, in group notice, since a production connection is produced before and after the reach state, the interest of production can be improved. The group notice may be executed not only after reaching the reach state but also before reaching the reach state. At that time, the group advance notice may be executed each time the pseudo-series change (re-change) is executed. However, when a group notice is executed every time a pseudo-series change (re-change) is performed, the reliability that becomes a big hit every time the change is performed by performing the same prohibition processing as other notice effects. It is necessary to select the group display in such a manner that does not decrease.

  Thus, in the group notice, the group display is performed in the production mode according to the reliability of the big hit, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the notice effect that is executed in response to the operation button 30 being operated has been described as the fifth notice effect that is performed after reaching the reach state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fifth notice effect that is performed after reaching the reach state may be a notice effect that is executed regardless of the operation of the operation button 30. In addition, as the fifth notice effect performed after reaching the reach state, an example in which group notice is performed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fifth notice effect may be a notice effect that produces an effect other than the group notice. For example, as the fifth notice effect, an effect other than the group notice such as a step-up notice or a mini character notice may be performed.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200 stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. The first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200 is a table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the first notice effect, or the notice pattern type in the case of executing the first notice effect. In the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type indicates “no first notice effect” and “button notice” in accordance with the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command. It is assigned to either the notice pattern type CY1 which is the notice pattern type or the notice pattern type CY2 which is the “first step-up notice”.

  In the setting of the first announcement effect notice pattern type determination table 200, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach deviation variation” (hereinafter referred to as a non-reach deviation deviation pattern) and a fluctuation in which the fluctuation display result is “reach deviation”. A pattern (hereinafter referred to as “reach off variation pattern”) and a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a “big hit variation pattern”) whose variation display result is “big hit”, “no first notice effect”, “button notice”, and “ The value of the random number SR7 corresponding to each selection item is set so that the allocation for each selection item of the “first step-up notice” is different.

  Specifically, in the setting of the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200, there is no first notice effect in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the case of the reach deviation deviation pattern. A small percentage is selected. Thereby, when it is a big hit, it is easier to perform the first notice effect than when it is lost. Thereby, when the first notice effect by the button notice or the first step-up notice is performed, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit.

  Further, in the setting of the first notice effect presentation pattern type determination table 200, the ratio of selecting the button notice is larger for the big hit fluctuation pattern than for the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation fluctuation pattern. Many. As a result, when the big hit is made, the first notice effect of the button notice is more easily performed than when it is lost, so when the notice effect by the button notice is made, the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit is increased. be able to. In addition, the ratio of the button notice is selected more in the case of the reach deviation variation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation variation pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the first notice effect presentation pattern type determination table 200, the first step-up notice is selected for the big hit fluctuation pattern than for the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern. There are many ratios. As a result, when a big hit is made, it is easier to perform the first step-up advance notice than when the player loses, so when the button advance notice is given, the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit is given. Can be increased. Further, the ratio of the first step-up notice is selected more in the case of the reach deviation variation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation variation pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the first notice effect presentation pattern type determination table 200, the button notice is selected for the big hit fluctuation pattern compared to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern. Is greater than the rate at which the first step-up notice is selected. Thereby, when a big hit is made, the button notice is more easily selected than the first step-up notice. Therefore, when the button advance notice is selected, the player's sense of expectation regarding the occurrence of the big hit can be enhanced more than when the first step-up advance notice is selected. It should be noted that the distribution of the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200 may be set so that the first step-up notice is more easily selected than the button notice when it is off. In addition, the ratio of the first step-up notice is selected in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern as compared with the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the case of the reach deviation deviation pattern. You may set so that it may become more. In addition, the ratio of selecting the button notice and the ratio of selecting the first step-up notice are the same for the big hit fluctuation pattern, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, and the reach deviation deviation pattern. You may set so that.

  78 shows an example in which there are two types of notice pattern types that can be selected as the notice effect, button notice and first step notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice pattern types that can be selected as the notice effect may be three or more kinds. FIG. 78 shows an example in which only one of a plurality of types of notice pattern types is selected as a selectable notice pattern type. The reason for this is to prevent the effects from overlapping on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect of the announcement is executed simultaneously with a plurality of types of the notice pattern. Therefore, when a plurality of types of notice pattern types are provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 so that the effects do not overlap, a process for selecting whether or not to execute each of the notice pattern types is performed. Depending on the type, a plurality of selected notice pattern types may be executed simultaneously.

  In addition, in the first advance notice / announcement pattern type determination table 200 shown in FIG. 78, for each of the non-reach deviation variation pattern, the reach deviation variation pattern, and the jackpot variation pattern, according to the number of pseudo continuous variations in the variation pattern, The rate at which each of the first notification effect, the button notification, and the first step-up notification is executed (the rate at which the selection is determined) is made different (for example, the first notification effect is selected as the number of pseudo-variable fluctuations increases). The ratio to be determined may be increased, and the ratio at which the first notice effect is executed may be increased). In the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200, the ratio of the button notice to be executed (the ratio to be selected and determined) and the first step-up notice are executed according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the change pattern. The ratio (the ratio determined and determined) may be different. Further, in the first notice effect presentation pattern type determination table 200, there is no first notice effect, button notice, and first step-up notice depending on whether or not a big hit is made and the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern. The ratio at which each is executed (the ratio at which selection is determined) is made different (for example, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the higher the ratio at which the first notice effect is selected, and the first notice when the big hit is made) The rate of execution may be varied by increasing the rate at which the effects are selected.

  When execution of the first step-up notice is selected using the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200, basic advance notice, reach branch notice, and Select and decide which of the button branch notices to execute.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a first step-up notice content determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. When the first step-up notice content determination table is selected to execute the first step-up notice, any one of the basic advance notice, reach branch notice, and button branch notice is used as the first step up notice. It is a table that is referred to in order to select and decide whether to execute. In the first step-up notice content determination table, the random number SR20 for determining the first step-up notice content is changed to “basic development notice”, “reach branch notice”, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. , "Button branch notice" is assigned.

  In the setting of the first step-up notice content determination table, the fluctuation display results are “non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern”, “reach deviation fluctuation pattern”, and “big hit fluctuation pattern”, “basic development notice”, “reach branch” The value of the random number SR20 corresponding to each selection item is set so that the allocation of the selection items “notice” and “button branch notice” is different.

  In the setting of the first step-up notice content determination table, specifically, in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern, the ratio of selection is high because of the relation of button branch notice> reach branch notice> basic development notice. In addition, when the reach deviation variation pattern is selected, the ratio of selection is high because of reach branch notice> button branch notice> basic development notice. In the case of a non-reach deviation variation pattern, the ratio of selection is high because basic development advance notice> reach branch notice> button branch notice. Therefore, when the button branch notice is executed, the reliability of the big hit is the highest, so that the player's expectation about the big hit can be enhanced most. In addition, when the button branch notice or the reach branch notice is executed, since the reliability of the reach state is higher than when the basic development notice is performed, the player's expectation and reach for reaching the reach state is high. The expectation about becoming a big hit from the state can be raised.

  In the first step-up notice content determination table, each of the basic advance notice, reach branch notice, and button branch notice is selected and decided according to whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern. (For example, the greater the number of pseudo-variables, the higher the rate at which the button branch notice is selected, and the higher the rate at which the button branch notice is selected for a big hit) Also good.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a button notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after it is decided to execute a button notice. .

  80A shows a big hit button notice selection table. In FIG. 80, (B) shows a button advance notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 80, (C) shows a non-reach off button notice selection table.

  The jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of this. In the big hit button notice selection table, data is set so that different notice message decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Has been.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice selection table shown in (A), the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern that does not become a pseudo-continuous (hereinafter referred to as “no pseudo-continuous”) is designated, or the variation pattern that becomes a pseudo-continuous includes a first variation, a total of two variations are displayed. When a variation pattern for performing variation display is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the first notice message determination table 201A shown in FIG. Is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern in which a total of three variation displays including the first variation, that is, a variation display in which three variation representations are performed, is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, or Of these, when a variation pattern that includes the first variation and displays a total of four variations, that is, a variation display that displays four pseudo-variations is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the second notice message determination table 201B shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, the third notice message determination table 201C shown in FIG. 82 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  In addition, when a variation pattern in which a total of five variations including the first variation are displayed, that is, a variation pattern for which five variations are displayed, is specified, the notice message determination table is as follows. Selected. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), a fourth notice message determination table 201D shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, the fifth notice message determination table 201E shown in FIG. 82 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change. Then, the sixth notice message determination table 201F shown in FIG. 82 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change.

  The reach failure button notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when the button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the reach deviation variation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is specified. It is a data table for selecting a notice message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the reach-out button notice selection table, data is selected so that a different notice message determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. It is set.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach button notice selection table shown in (B), the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. A seventh notice message determination table 201G shown in FIG. 83 is used to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine a notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. An eighth notice message determination table 201H shown in FIG. 83 is used to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine a notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the ninth notice message determination table 201I shown in FIG. 82 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  The non-reach miss button notice selection table shown in (C) shows that a button notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a non-reach miss change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, a different notice message determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. It may be.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. The tenth notice message determination table 201J shown in FIG. 83 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a basic development notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after it is decided to execute the basic development notice. It is.

  In FIG. 81, (A) shows a basic development notice selection table for big hits. In FIG. 81, (B) shows a basic development advance notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. In FIG. 81, (C) shows a non-reach out of time basic development notice selection table. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot basic development notice selection table shown in (A) is used to determine a specific notice pattern when the basic development notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the big hit fluctuation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice step determination table to be used. In the big hit time basic advance notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice step determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the jackpot basic development advance notice selection table shown in (A), the advance step determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the first notice step determination table 202A shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the second notice step determination table 202B shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change, the third notice step determination table 202C shown in FIG. 84 is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times” is designated, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), a fourth notice step decision table 202D shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-variation) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the fifth notice step determination shown in FIG. Table 202E is selected. Then, the sixth notice step determination table 202F shown in FIG. 84 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach-out basic development advance notice selection table shown in (B) is when the basic advance notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the reach-out change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out” is designated. In addition, it is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach basic development advance notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice step determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the production control command. Is set.

  In the out-of-reach basic development notice selection table shown in (B), the notice step determination table is specifically selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), a seventh notice step decision table 202G shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), an eighth notice step decision table 202H shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change, the ninth notice step determination table 202I shown in FIG. 85 is selected.

  The non-reach miss basic development notice selection table shown in (C) determines the basic advance notice as the first step-up notice when a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step determination table to be used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach out of basic development advance notice selection table, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set as described above.

  In the non-reach out of basic development advance notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the advance step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. The tenth notice step decision table 202J shown in FIG. 85 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  For the big hit button notice selection table, the reach failure button notice selection table, the big hit basic development notice selection table, and the reach failure basic development notice selection table, the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation respectively. Example of providing three or two tables as tables used for determining a notice pattern at the time (notice message determining table, notice step determining table), and using different tables according to the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change, and the one table is pseudo-connected. The notice selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the presence / absence of and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit button notice selection table, the first notice message determination table 201A, the second notice message determination table 201B, and the fourth notice message determination table 201D are shared.

  Also, for each of the big hit button notice selection table and the big hit basic development notice selection table, tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third change and the fourth change (the notice message decision table, the notice) An example is shown in which two tables are provided as step determination tables), and the tables are selectively used in accordance with the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third variation and the fourth variation are created, and the one table is used as the number of times of variation in the pseudo-series. The notice selection table may be set so that it can be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice selection table, whether the third notice message determination table 201C and the fifth notice message determination table 201E are shared by one table or not is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Separate and share the table.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the notice selection table, the notice selection table for the first change and the second change and the notice selection table for the third change and the fourth change are used. Or the first change time notice selection table and the second change time notice selection table may be used in common.

  In addition, each of the big hit button notice selection table, the reach out button notice selection table, and the reach out button notice selection table has different data setting contents, for example, for each variation of the first to fifth rounds. A notice message determination table may be provided. Also, the basic development notice selection table at the time of big hit, the basic development notice selection table at the time of out of reach, and the non-reach out of basic development notice selection table at the time of non-reach, for example, different for each variation of the first to fifth times. A notice step determination table for data setting contents may be provided.

  Next, the contents of the first notice message determination table 201A to the sixth notice message determination table 201F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the first notice message determination table 201A to the sixth notice message determination table 201F.

  82, first notice message determination table 201A to sixth notice message determination table 201F are shown in (A) to (F). Each notice message determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure).

  In the first notice message determination table 201A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", "Intense heat", A setting is made so that one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, the message selected in this way is displayed in both the first variation region and the second variation. In the first notice message determination table 201A, SR8 is set so that the ratio of the notice message selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ REACH ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ FEVER ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. Numeric data is set.

  Note that “...” Of the notice messages used in the first notice message determination table 201 </ b> A may not be selected. In that way, when a big hit is caused by the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-ream”, the player is given the impression that the button notice is not executed or that the notice message is not displayed by the button notice. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice from being lowered excessively.

  In the second notice message determination table 201B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and in the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “...” “CHANCE” Either “Heat” or “GOOD LUCK” is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the second notice message determination table 201B, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of the notice message selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. . As shown in (B), in the second notice message determination table 201B, the ratio of each of “...”, “REACH”, and “FEVER” selected as compared to the first notice message determination table 201A. SR8 numerical data is set so that the ratio of “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is increased.

  In the third notice message determination table 201C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, Settings are made so that any one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams” and the third and fourth variations when the variation pattern is “quasi-ream 4 times”, one of these messages is used as a notice message. In the third notice message determination table 201C, basically, the ratio of the notice message being selected is “...”, “CHANCE”> “REACH”> “Intense heat”> “GOOD” The numerical data of SR8 is set so that “LUCK”> “FEVER”. Also, in the third notice message determination table 201C, the ratio of “...” And “CHANCE” to be selected is lower than in the second notice message determination table 201B, and “REACH” and “Intense heat”. , “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” are set so that the ratio of selecting each of them becomes high.

  However, with respect to the third notice message determination table 201C, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the 2nd (previous) change in “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process (notice message prohibition process) for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the second notice message determination table 201B in the second (previous) change of “pseudo sequence 3 times” and “pseudo sequence 4 times”, In the third (this time) change of “pseudo four times”, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” With low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition processing of such a notice message are as follows, for example. When selecting and determining a notice message as a notice pattern before executing the pseudo-variable display, the previous notice message data for identifying the decided notice message is selected according to the selection of the notice message. The data indicating the pattern is stored (updated) in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM. Data indicating the previous notice pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time a notice message is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-series. When the notice message is selected and determined for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the pseudo-ream, each time the notice message is selected and determined, for example, a message determination table such as the third notice message determination table 201C is selected. The reliability of the big hit is compared with the previous notice message specified by the previous notice message data for the current selection notice message which is the notice message. When the selected prior notice message is lower in reliability than the previous notice message, the previous notice message content is determined as the notice message in the current fluctuation so as not to decide the notice message whose reliability is lower than the previous fluctuation. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice message is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice message, the current selection notice message is determined as the notice message in the current variation. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the types of notice messages, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated with each other in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the larger the numerical value). A flag corresponding to the type of the notice message is set as data indicating the previous notice message. Then, the flag set as the previous notice message is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice message in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical value of the flag, whichever is the selected notice message or the previous notice message Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the fourth notice message determination table 201D in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five times of pseudo-ream”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is a warning message. Is selected and displayed. In the fourth notice message determination table 201D, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected is "..."> "CHANCE"> "Intense heat"> "GOOD LUCK". . As shown in (D), in the fourth notice message determination table 201D, compared to the second notice message determination table 201B, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is lower. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is high.

  In the fifth notice message determination table 201E in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is a notice message. Is selected and displayed. As shown in (E), in the fifth notice message determination table 201E, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is lower than in the fourth notice message determination table 201D. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is high.

  However, with respect to the fifth notice message determination table 201E, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, the “pseudo-continuation 5” is not compared with the previously selected notice effect. For the third time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “five consecutive times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fourth notice message determination table 201D for the second (previous) change of “5 pseudo-reams”, the third (current) of “5 pseudo-reams” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth notification message determination table 201E.

  In the sixth notice message determination table 201F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", "Intense heat", based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, A setting is made so that one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the fifth change in the case of the “five pseudo-five” change pattern, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the sixth notice message determination table 201F, basically, the ratio at which the notice message is selected is “extreme heat”> “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH” >> “GOOD LUCK”> “FEVER”. Numerical data is set so that Further, in the sixth notice message determination table 201F, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is lower than in the fifth notice message determination table 201E, and “REACH” and “Intense heat”. , “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” are set so as to increase the ratio of selection of SR8 numerical data.

  However, with respect to the sixth notice message determination table 201F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the 5th (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fifth notice message determination table 201E in the fourth (previous) change of “5 pseudo-continuations”, the fifth (current) of “5 pseudo-continuations” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth notification message determination table 201F.

  Next, the contents of the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the tenth notice message determination table 201O.

  83, (A) to (D) show the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the tenth notice message determination table 201J. Each notice message determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure).

  In the seventh notice message determination table 201G in (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages of “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the message selected in this way is displayed for both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the seventh notice message determination table 201A, the SR8 numerical data is set so that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ REACH ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. Is set. As shown to (A), in the 7th notice message determination table 201G, compared with the 1st notice message determination table 201A at the time of a big hit, each ratio of "..." and "CHANCE" is selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “REACH”, “extreme heat”, and “FEVER” becomes low.

  In the eighth notice message determination table 201H in (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-reams” and the variation of the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern of “quasi-ream 4 times”, “...”, “CHANCE” , “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” are selected and displayed as the notice message. As shown in (B), in the eighth notice message determination table 201H, the ratio of selecting “...” And “REACH” is lower than in the seventh notice message determination table 201G. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of each of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” to be selected increases. In addition, in the eighth notice message determination table 201H, the ratio of selecting “CHANCE” and “extreme heat” is lower than that in the second notice message determination table 201B in the case of a big hit. ”And“ GOOD LUCK ”are set so as to increase the ratio of selection of SR8 numerical data.

  In the ninth notice message determination table 201I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages of “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, any one of these messages is used for the third fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-reams” and the third and fourth fluctuations in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “quasi-ream 4 times”. Is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the ninth notice message determination table 201I, a numerical value is basically set such that the ratio of the notice message selected is “... >>“ REACH ”>“ CHANCE ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. Data is set. Also, in the ninth notice message determination table 201I, the ratio of selecting “...”, “CHANCE”, and “GOOD LUCK” is lower than in the eighth notice message determination table 201H. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “REACH” and “extreme heat” is high. Also, in the ninth notice message determination table 201I, the ratio of selecting “...” Is higher than in the third notice message determination table 201C when a big hit is made, and other notice messages are selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio is low.

  However, with respect to the ninth notice message determination table 201I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the eighth notice message determination table 201H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo three times” and “pseudo four times”, “pseudo three times” In addition, in the third (current) change of “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” With low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth notification message determination table 201I.

  In the tenth notice message determination table 201J of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, one of the notice messages of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set to be selected. Accordingly, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “two quasi-continuous” deviations in reach, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message in the first and second fluctuations. In the tenth notice message determination table 201J, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. Also, in the tenth notice message determination table 201J, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is higher than in the seventh notice message determination table 201G, and other messages are not selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set in

  Further, in each of the notice message determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for determining the selection of the notice message may be set differently for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, the notice message prohibition processing as described above is performed by selecting and determining in advance the contents of the notice message at the start (before the start) of the fluctuation display of the pseudo series for all fluctuations in the pseudo series. This is done when making the selection decision. Then, in the production control microcomputer 100, the content of the notice message selected and determined at the start of the pseudo-series variable display is stored in the RAM, and on the basis of the stored information, the button notice at the time of all changes in the pseudo-series is displayed. Control to be performed is performed. Further, in the production control microcomputer 100, the first step-up advance notice step prohibition process described later and the second step-up advance notice step prohibition process described later are also simulated for all variations in the pseudo-ream. This is performed when the content of the advance notice step is selected and determined in advance at the start (before the start) of the continuous variation display, and the selection is determined. Then, in the production control microcomputer 100, the contents of the notice step selected and determined at the start of the pseudo-series variable display are stored in the RAM, and on the basis of the stored information, the step-up notice at the time of all changes in the pseudo-series. Control to perform is performed.

  Further, the notice message prohibition process as described above may be executed on condition that the contents of the notice message are actually displayed in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  Next, the contents of the first notice step determination table 202A to the sixth notice step determination table 202F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice step determination table 202A to the sixth notice step determination table 202F.

  In each advance step determination table for determining the advance step of the first step-up advance notice (basic development advance notice, reach branch advance notice, and button branch advance notice) shown in the following description, the data “step 1” is the step of the advance step. Data indicating that 1 is displayed. Therefore, when the notice step data of step 1 is selected, the advancement of the notice step to step 1 is performed. In the notice step determination table described below, the data “step 2” is data indicating that it is displayed up to step 2 of the notice step. Therefore, when the notice step data of step 2 is selected, for example, the advancement to step 2 is performed such that the notice step is step 1 or step 2. The data “step 3” is data indicating that the display is performed up to step 3 of the advance notice step. Therefore, when the notice step data of step 3 is selected, for example, the advancement of the notice step to step 3 is performed, such as step 1, step 2, and step 3.

  In FIG. 84, (A) to (F) show the first notice step determination table 202A to the sixth notice step determination table 202F. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9 and the display contents of the notice step to be selected (notice step in the figure).

  In the first notice step determination table 202A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, “none (do not display the notice step)”, “step 1”, “step” based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Settings are made such that either “2” or “Step 3” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, any of “none”, “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3” is selected. Is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the first notice step determination table 202A, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”> “step 3”.

  Note that “None (do not display the notice step)” of the notice steps used in the first notice step determination table 202A may not be selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first step-up notice from not being executed when a big hit is caused by the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, It is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice from deteriorating excessively.

  In the second notice step determination table 202B in (B), any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous 4 times” variation pattern, “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” Is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the second notice step determination table 202B, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. Further, in the second notice step determination table 202B, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “Step 1” and “Step 2” is higher than that in the first notice step determination table 202A. Is set.

  In the third notice step determination table 202C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third variation and the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous four times”, “step 2” and “step 3” Is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the third notice step determination table 202C, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 3”. Also, in the third notice step determination table 202C, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” and “step 1” are not selected as compared with the second notice step determination table 202B. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the third notice step determination table 202C as compared with the notice effect selected previously. In other words, by selecting the notice step using the third notice step determination table 202C for the third (this time) change at the time of the big hit “3 times of the quasi series” and “4 times of the quasi series”, the “pseudo series” is selected. The prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change at the time of “3 times” and “4 times of pseudo-continuous” will be performed.

  In the fourth notice step determination table 202D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1 ”Or“ Step 2 ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the fourth notice step determination table 202D, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the fourth notice step determination table 202D, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the second notice step determination table 202B.

  In the fifth notice step determination table 202E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, based on the extracted value of the random number SR9, among the “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3” Either one is selected, and settings are made so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “Step 1”, “Step 2”, and “Step 3” is selected, and these One of them is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 3”> “step 1”. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, numerical data of SR9 is set so that “None” is not selected as compared with the fourth notice step determination table 202B. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “Step 3” is higher than that in the third notice step determination table 202C.

  However, with respect to the fifth notice step determination table 202E, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed as compared with the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the third time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process that prohibits selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “five consecutive times” (notice step) Forbidden processing). For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the fourth notice step determination table 202D for the second (previous) change in “five consecutive 5 times”, the third (current) of “five consecutive 5 times”. In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition process of such a notice step are, for example, as follows. When selecting and determining a notice step as a notice pattern before executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice step data for specifying the decided notice step is selected according to the notice step selected and decided. Data indicating the pattern is stored (updated) in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM. Data indicating the previous notice pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time a notice step is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-series. When selecting and determining the advance notice step for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the pseudo-ream, each time the advance step is selected and determined, for example, a step decision table such as the fifth advance step decision table 202E is selected. For the current selection advance notice step, which is an advance notice step, the previous notice step specified by the previous notice step data is compared with the reliability that is a big hit. When the selected advance notice step has a lower reliability than the previous advance notice step, the content of the previous advance notice step is determined as the advance notice step in the current change so that the advance notice step having a lower reliability than the previous change is not decided. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice step is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice step, the current selection notice step is determined as the notice step in the current variation. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the plurality of types of advance notice steps, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the flag value is set so that the numerical value becomes larger). As a data indicating the previous notice step, a flag corresponding to the type of the notice step is set. Then, the flag set as the previous notice step is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice step in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relation of the numerical value of the flag, which is the current notice step or the previous notice step? Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the sixth notice step determination table 202F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do. Therefore, in the fifth variation when the variation pattern is “five pseudo-reams”, one of “Step 2” and “Step 3” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the sixth notice step determination table 202F, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 3”> “step 2”. Also, in the sixth notice step determination table 202F, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 3” is selected is higher than that in the third notice step determination table 202C.

  However, with respect to the sixth notice step determination table 202F, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 5th (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation”. . For example, when “Step 3” is selected based on the fifth notice step determination table 202E for the fourth (previous) change of “5 pseudo-continuations”, the fifth (this time) ), A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 2” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification step prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth notification step determination table 202F. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the sixth notice step determination table 202F as compared with the previously selected notice effect.

  Next, the contents of the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the fifteenth notice step determination table 202O used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the tenth notice step determination table 202J.

  In FIG. 85, (A) to (D) show the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the tenth notice step determination table 202J. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9 and the display contents of the notice step to be selected (notice step in the figure).

  In the seventh notice step determination table 202G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “none (do not display the notice step)” or “step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The notice step is selected and other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and “step 1” is selected. The notice step is displayed only when In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the step selected in this way is displayed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the seventh notice step determination table 202G, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than “step 1”.

  In the eighth notice step determination table 202H in (B), any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-ream” and the variation of the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern of “quasi-continuous 4 times”, “none”, “step 1”, One of “Step 2” is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the second notice step determination table 202B, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratios for the notice step are “step 1”> “none” and “step 2”. Also, in the eighth notice step determination table 202H, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “Step 1” and “Step 2” is higher than that in the seventh notice step determination table 202G. It is set. In the eighth notice step determination table 202H, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than that in the second notice step determination table 202B in the case of a big hit.

  In the ninth notice step determination table 202I in (C), either “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. It is set to do. Accordingly, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reason 3 pseudo-ream” and the third variation and the fourth variation in the variation pattern of “quasi-ream 4 times”, “step 1” and “ One of “Step 2” is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the ninth notice step determination table 202I, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 1”> “step 2”. Also, in the ninth notice step determination table 202I, numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” is not selected as compared with the eighth notice step determination table 202H. Also, in the ninth notice step determination table 202I, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 1” is selected is higher than that in the third notice step determination table 202C when it is a big hit. .

  However, with respect to the ninth notice step determination table 202I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed from the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the eighth notice step determination table 202H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, “pseudo train 3 times” ”And“ pseudo sequence 4 times ”, the prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that“ step 1 ”with low reliability is not selected in the third change (this time). As such a prohibition process, the notification step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth notification step determination table 202I. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the ninth notice step determination table 202I as compared to the notice effect selected previously.

  In the tenth notice step determination table 202J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Settings are made so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and “twice pseudo-continuous” that are out of reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and “step 1” is selected. Only notice step is displayed. In the tenth notice step determination table 202J, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than “step 1”.

  Further, in each of the notice step determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice step may be set different for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  As shown in FIG. 78, when the type of the first notice effect is selected and determined, if “no notice effect” can be selected, the notice step “none” as shown in each of the notice step determination tables described above is selected. A notice step determination table that cannot be selected may be used. That is, it suffices if it is possible to select not to perform the notice effect at any time when selecting and determining the type of the notice effect or when selecting and determining a specific notice step.

  FIG. 86 shows a configuration example of a notice reliability selection table as a data table used for selecting a table to be used when determining the display mode of the notice reliability display indicating the reliability of the notice effect when performing the notice effect. It is explanatory drawing shown. The notification reliability display in this case corresponds to the color reliability display performed at the time of button notification shown in FIG. 70 and the pattern reliability display performed at the time of the first step-up notification shown in FIG.

  86A shows a big hit button notice reliability selection table. In FIG. 86, (B) shows a loss button notice reliability selection table. In FIG. 86, (C) shows a step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of big hit. In FIG. 86, (D) shows a step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of loss. These notice reliability selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The big hit button notice reliability selection table shown in (A) determines the display mode of the color reliability display when the button notice is given when the big hit variation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. 4 is a data table for selecting a color reliability determination table used for the purpose. In the big hit button notice reliability selection table, a different color reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice reliability selection table shown in (A), the reliability display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The first color reliability display determination table 205A shown in 87 is selected.

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The second color reliability display determination table 205B shown in FIG. 87 is selected. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the third variation and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the third color reliability shown in FIG. The display determination table 205C is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The fourth color reliability display determination table 205D shown in FIG. 87 is selected. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the third variation and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the fifth color reliability shown in FIG. The display determination table 205E is selected. Then, the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F shown in FIG. 87 is selected in order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the fifth change (during re-change).

  In the missed button notice reliability selection table shown in (B), when a notice change pattern (including both reach and non-reach) in which the fluctuation display result is “miss” is designated, the button notice is performed. 5 is a data table for selecting a color reliability determination table used for determining a display mode of color reliability display in FIG. In the off button notice reliability selection table, a different color reliability display determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the missed button notice reliability selection table shown in (B), the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The seventh color reliability display determination table 205G shown in 88 is selected.

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The eighth color reliability display determination table 205H shown in FIG. 88 is selected. In order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the third variation and to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the ninth color reliability shown in FIG. The display determination table 205I is selected.

  The jackpot step-up notice reliability selection table shown in (C) shows the pattern reliability display when the first step-up notice is performed when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the pattern reliability determination table used for determining a display mode. In the big hit time step-up notice reliability selection table, a different pattern reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of variation displays (including re-variation) performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table shown in (C), the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the first variation (at the time of the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second variation (at the time of re-variation) A first pattern reliability determination table 206A shown in FIG. 89 is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the pattern reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the first variation (at the time of the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability at the time of the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The second pattern reliability determination table 206B shown in 89 is selected. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the third variation and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the third pattern reliability shown in FIG. The decision table 206C is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern “pseudo-continuous 5 times” is designated, the pattern reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The fourth pattern reliability determination table 205D shown in FIG. 89 is selected. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the third variation, and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the fifth pattern reliability shown in FIG. The decision table 206E is selected. Then, the sixth pattern reliability determination table 206F shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the fifth change (during re-change).

  The step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of failure shown in (D) shows a pattern reliability display when an error variation pattern (including both reach and non-reach) in which the variation display result is “miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a pattern reliability determination table used for determining a specific pattern reliability display mode when a step-up notice is determined as the display mode type. In the off-step step-up notice reliability selection table, a different pattern reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of variation displays (including re-variation) performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of loss shown in (D), the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the first variation (at the time of the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second variation (at the time of re-variation) A seventh pattern reliability determination table 206G shown in 90 is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the pattern reliability display determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation) and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the second variation (at the time of re-variation) The eighth pattern reliability determination table 206H shown in FIG. 90 is selected. 90. In order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the third variation and to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the fourth variation, the ninth pattern reliability shown in FIG. The decision table 206I is selected.

  In addition, for the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the losing button notice reliability selection table, the big hit step up notice reliability selection table, and the losing button notice reliability selection table, the first and second time respectively. Three or two tables are provided as reliability display determination tables (color reliability display determination table, pattern reliability display determination table) used for determining the reliability display at the time of fluctuations, and the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations and pseudo The example which uses a table properly according to the frequency | count of a change in a series was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the reliability display at the time of the first and second fluctuations. The notice reliability selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the first color reliability display determination table 205A, the second color reliability display determination table 205B, and the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D are displayed. The table is shared according to whether or not it is a big hit, such as common to one table.

  Further, for each of the big hit button notice reliability selection table and the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table, the reliability display determination used for determining the reliability display at the time of the third and fourth fluctuations. As an example of the table (color reliability display determination table, pattern reliability display determination table), two tables are provided, and the table is selectively used according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the reliability display at the time of the third and fourth fluctuations are made in common, and the one table is changed according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. The notice reliability selection table may be set for common use. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the third color reliability display determination table 205C and the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E are shared. The table is shared according to whether or not it is a big hit.

  In addition, with regard to the above-described step-up notice, an example is shown in which step 3 is not selected in the final change (change that is one of the first to fifth times) when the step-up notice is lost. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the allocation of the notice step determination table may be set so that step 3 can be selected in the final change (change that is one of the first to fifth times). As for the step-up notice described above, an example is shown in which step 3 is not selected in the first fluctuation when a big hit is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the allocation of the notice step determination table may be set so that step 3 can be selected in the first fluctuation.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the notice reliability display determination table, the reliability display determination table for the first and second fluctuations and the reliability display determination for the third and fourth fluctuations are used. Any one of the tables may be shared, and the reliability display determination table for the first and second fluctuations and the reliability display determination table for the third and fourth fluctuations. Both may be shared.

  In addition, for each of the big hit button notice reliability selection table and the off button notice reliability selection table, a color reliability display determination table having different data setting contents is provided for each of the first to fifth fluctuations. You may make it provide. Also, for each of the big hit step-up reliability notice selection table and the off-beat big hit step up, the pattern reliability display determination table having different data setting contents for each of the first to fifth fluctuations. May be provided.

  Next, the contents of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F used when the variation display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F.

  87A to 87F, the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F are shown. In each color reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR10 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue) based on the extracted value of the random number SR10. ) "And" third color display (yellow) "are selected. Thereby, regarding the button notice at the time of big hit, the color corresponding to the color display determined in any of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, as shown in FIG. Color reliability display is performed. Specifically, the color reliability display is performed by displaying the envelope image 9P in the color display color thus determined.

  In the first color reliability display determination table 205A in (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the selection ratio of the color display is “first color display”> “second color display”> “third color display”. The numerical data is set so that “

  In the second color reliability display determination table 205B in (B), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the first color reliability display determination table 205A as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “no pseudo-continuous” fluctuations. “Second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than the first variation of the pattern and the first and second times of “pseudo-continuous two times”. .

  In the third color reliability display determination table 205C in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the second color reliability display determination table 205B. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “third color display” is selected increases. As a result, in the third variation of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous four times”, the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” The “third color display” is selected at a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations and the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”.

  However, for the third color reliability display determination table 205C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared with the previously selected color reliability display, The third (current) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” are less reliable than the second (previous) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of color reliability display is performed. For example, when “second color display” or “third color display” is selected on the basis of the second color reliability display determination table 205B, the third time in “pseudo-continuous three times” and “pseudo-continuous four times” ( In this variation, a prohibition process (color reliability prohibition process) is performed to change the setting so that a color display having a lower color reliability is not selected.

  The content of such color reliability prohibition processing is, for example, as follows. When the color reliability display (any one of the first color display to the third color display) is selected and determined as the reliability display pattern before the pseudo-variable display is performed, the determined color reliability display is specified. The previous color reliability display data which is the previous reliability display data is stored (updated) in the previous color reliability display storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous color reliability display pattern. Data indicating the previous color reliability display pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time a notice message is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-series. When the notice message is selected and determined for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the pseudo-ream, each time the notice message is selected and determined, for example, a color reliability display determination table such as the third color reliability display determination table 205C. For the currently selected color reliability display, which is the color reliability display selected using, the previous color reliability display specified by the previous color reliability display data is compared with the reliability that is a big hit. If the selected color reliability display is lower than the previous color reliability display, the contents of the previous color reliability display are directly applied so that the color reliability display with lower reliability than the previous variation display is not determined. It is determined as the previous color reliability display in this variation. On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected color reliability display is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous color reliability display, the currently selected color reliability display is determined as the color reliability display in the current variation display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that is a big hit for the color reliability display in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the multiple types of color reliability display, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the higher the numerical value). As the data indicating the previous color reliability display, a flag corresponding to the type of the previous color reliability display is set. Then, the flag set as the previous color reliability display is compared with the flag corresponding to the color reliability display in the current variation, and the currently selected color reliability display and It is determined which has higher reliability in the previous color reliability display.

  In the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D in (D), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the second color reliability display determination table 205B, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “5 pseudo-reams”, the first fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-reams”, the first and second fluctuations of “2 pseudo-reams” "Second color display" and "Change" at a higher rate than the fluctuations, the first and second fluctuations of "pseudo-continuous 3 times", and the first and second fluctuations of "pseudo-continuous 4 times". “Third color display” is selected.

  In the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “third color display” is selected increases. As a result, the third and fourth fluctuations of the “five pseudo-five” variation pattern have a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations of the “five-five continuous” fluctuation pattern. “Third color display” is selected.

  However, with respect to the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state from being reduced after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display, For the third (current) change in “5 pseudo-continuations”, the color reliability display is selected with a lower reliability than the color reliability display selected in the second (previous) change in “5-pseudo continuous” Prohibition processing that prohibits For example, when “second color display” is selected on the basis of the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D for the second (previous) change of “5 pseudo-continuations”, 3 of “5 pseudo-continuations” is selected. In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E. As a result, the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E does not have a lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  In the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second color display” and “third color display” is increased. As a result, in the fifth variation in the variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations”, “third color display” is selected at a higher rate than in the third and fourth variations. Become.

  However, with respect to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, For the fifth (this time) variation of “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, the selection of the color reliability display having a lower reliability than the color reliability display selected in the fourth (previous) variation of “pseudo-continuous 5 times” Prohibition processing that prohibits For example, when “second color display” is selected on the basis of the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E for the fourth (previous) change of “pseudo continuous 5 times”, “pseudo continuous 5 times” 5 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F. As a result, the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F does not have a lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the color reliability display previously selected.

  Next, the contents of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L used when the variation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I.

  88, (A) to (C) show the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I. In each color reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR10 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I, the random number is the same as in the case of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F. Based on the extracted value of SR10, any one of “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue)”, and “third color display (yellow)” is selected. . Thereby, regarding the button notice at the time of disconnection, the color corresponding to the color display determined in any of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L, as shown in FIG. Color reliability display is performed. Specifically, the color reliability display is performed by displaying the envelope image 9P in the color display color thus determined.

  In the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G in (A), as shown in the numerical setting of SR10, the selection ratio of the color display is “first color display”> “second color display”> “third color display”. The numerical data is set so that “ In the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G, compared to the first color reliability display determination table 205A in the case of a big hit, the ratio of “first color display” is selected, and “second color display” is selected. In addition, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “third color display” is selected decreases. Note that the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G is selected when it is out of place and there is no pseudo-continuation, so only “first color display” is selected, and “second color display” and “second color display” are selected. The numerical value of SR10 may be set so that “three-color display” is not selected.

  In the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H in (B), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “no pseudo-continuous” fluctuations. “Second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than the first variation of the pattern and the first and second times of “pseudo-continuous two times”. In the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H, the ratio of “first color display” to be selected is higher than that in the second color reliability display determination table 205B in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “display” and “third color display” are selected decreases.

  In the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second color display” and “third color display” is increased. As a result, in the third variation of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous four times”, the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” "Second color display" and "Third color display" are selected at a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations of the first and second fluctuations, and the fluctuation pattern of the "quasi-continuous four times" fluctuation pattern. Will be. In the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I, the ratio of “first color display” to be selected is higher than that in the third color reliability display determination table 205C in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  However, for the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, from being lowered. The third (current) fluctuations in “pseudo-three times” and “pseudo-four times” are less reliable than the second (previous) fluctuations in “pseudo-three times” and “pseudo-four times” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of color reliability display is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected on the basis of the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H for the second (previous) change in “pseudo three times” and “pseudo four times”, “ In the third (this time) change in the “pseudo sequence 3 times” and the “pseudo sequence 4 times”, a prohibition process is performed so that the “first color display” having a lower reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I. As a result, the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I does not have a lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  In addition, regarding the determination of the color reliability display described above, an example in which the display determination table is separately selected and determined in two cases, when the variation display result is a big hit and when the variation display result is off. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the color reliability display includes three cases: when the variation display result is a big hit, when the variation display result is out of reach, and when the variation display result is out of reach. In such a case, the display determination table may be separately selected and determined. As for the color reliability display, when the variation display result is a non-reachable display result, a prohibition process is performed so that the color reliability is not increased in the re-variation when the display result is not likely to be a big hit. It may be. Further, when a pseudo-ream that does not become reach is performed, a prohibition process may be performed so that the color reliability does not increase in the re-variation. By performing such prohibition processing, it is possible to ensure that color reliability display according to the reliability that is a big hit is performed.

  In addition, for each color reliability display determination table as described above, random values used for selection determination of color reliability for the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth variations, respectively. The upper limit value may be set differently. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  Next, the contents of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F used when the variation display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F.

  89, first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F are shown in (A) to (F). In each pattern reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR11 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, based on the extracted value of the random number SR11, “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display ( One of the pattern displays is selected from “stripe pattern” and “third pattern display (spot pattern)”. Thereby, regarding the first step-up notice at the time of the big hit, the pattern according to the pattern display determined in any of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F is shown in FIG. The pattern reliability display as shown is performed. Specifically, the pattern reliability display is performed by displaying the character images 91T, 92T, and 93T in the pattern thus determined.

  In the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A of (A), as shown in the numerical setting of SR11, the selection ratio of the pattern display is “first pattern display”> “second pattern display”> “third pattern display”. The numerical data is set so that “

  In the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B in (B), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared with the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “no pseudo-continuous” fluctuations. “Second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are selected at a higher rate than the first variation of the pattern and the first and second times of “pseudo-continuous two times”.

  In the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C in (C), “first pattern display” and “second pattern display” are compared with the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “3rd pattern display” is increased and the ratio of selecting “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, in the third variation of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous four times”, the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” “Third pattern display” is selected at a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations and the first and second fluctuations of the “quasi-continuous four times” fluctuation pattern. However, regarding the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display, The third (current) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” are less reliable than the second (previous) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the pattern reliability display is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” or “third pattern display” is selected on the basis of the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B, the third time (in the “pseudo sequence 3 times” and “pseudo sequence 4 times”) ( In this variation, a prohibition process (pattern reliability prohibition process) is performed to change the setting so that a pattern display having a lower pattern reliability is not selected.

  The contents of such pattern reliability prohibition processing are as follows, for example. When the pattern reliability display (any one of the first pattern display to the third pattern display) is selected and determined as the reliability display pattern before the pseudo continuous variation display is executed, the determined pattern reliability display is specified. The previous pattern reliability display data, which is the previous reliability display data, is stored (updated) in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous pattern reliability display pattern. Data indicating the previous pattern reliability display pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time a notice message is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-series. When the notice message is selected and determined for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the pseudo-ream, each time the notice message is selected and determined, for example, a pattern reliability display determination table such as the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C. For the presently selected pattern reliability display, which is the pattern reliability display selected using, the previous pattern reliability display specified by the previous pattern reliability display data is compared with the reliability that is a big hit. When the selected pattern reliability display is lower than the previous pattern reliability display, the contents of the previous pattern reliability display are not changed so that the pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the previous variation display is not determined. It is determined as the previous pattern reliability display in this variation. On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected pattern reliability display is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous pattern reliability display, the currently selected pattern reliability display is determined as the pattern reliability display in the current variation display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit for the pattern reliability display in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the plurality of types of pattern reliability display, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the higher the numerical value). As the data indicating the previous pattern reliability display, a flag corresponding to the type of the previous pattern reliability display is set. Then, the flag set as the previous pattern reliability display is compared with the flag corresponding to the pattern reliability display in the current variation, and the currently selected pattern reliability display and It is determined which has higher reliability in the previous pattern reliability display.

  In the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D in (D), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared with the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations”, the first fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuations”, the first and second fluctuations of “two pseudo-continuations” “Second pattern display” and “Fluctuation 3 times” at a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations, and the first and second fluctuations of “pseudo-continuation 4 times”. “Third pattern display” is selected.

  In the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, “first pattern display” and “second pattern display” are compared with the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third pattern display” is selected increases. As a result, the third and fourth fluctuations of the variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations” have a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous five times”. “Third pattern display” is selected.

  However, regarding the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is performed after the notice effect is performed, compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display, Selection of pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the pattern reliability display selected in the second (previous) change of “5 pseudo simulations” for the third (current) simulation of “5 pseudo simulations” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected on the basis of the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D for the second (previous) change of “5 pseudo-continuations”, “5 pseudo-continuations” 3 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E. As a result, the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E does not have lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed, as compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  In the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, compared to the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E, “first pattern display” and “second pattern display”. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third pattern display” is selected increases. As a result, in the fifth variation when the variation pattern is “five times of pseudo-continuations”, “third pattern display” is selected at a higher rate than in the third and fourth variations. Become.

  However, with respect to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is performed after the notice effect is performed, as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display, For the fifth (this time) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, the selection of the pattern reliability display whose reliability is lower than the pattern reliability display selected in the fourth (previous) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 5 times” Prohibition processing that prohibits For example, when “second pattern display” is selected on the basis of the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E for the fourth (previous) change of “pseudo series 5 times”, “pseudo series 5 times” 5 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F. As a result, regarding the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed does not decrease as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  Next, the contents of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L used when the variation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I.

  90, (A) to (C) show the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I. In each pattern reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR11 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, as in the case of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, random numbers are used. Based on the extracted value of SR11, any one of “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display (striped pattern)”, and “third pattern display (spotted pattern)” is displayed. Selected. Thereby, regarding the first step-up notice at the time of loss, the pattern corresponding to the pattern display determined in any of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I is shown in FIG. The pattern reliability display as shown is performed. Specifically, the pattern reliability display is performed by displaying the character images 91T, 92T, and 93T in the pattern thus determined.

  In the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G in (A), as shown in the numerical setting of SR11, the selection ratio of the pattern display is “first pattern display”> “second pattern display”> “third pattern display”. The numerical data is set so that “ In the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G, compared to the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A at the time of a big hit, the ratio of selecting “first pattern display” is higher, and “second pattern display” is selected. And the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio at which “third pattern display” is selected becomes low. It should be noted that the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G is selected when it is out of place and there is no pseudo-continuation, so only “first pattern display” is selected, and “second pattern display” and “second pattern display” are selected. The numerical value of SR11 may be set so that “3 pattern display” is not selected.

  In the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H in (B), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared to the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, in the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the first and second fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “no pseudo-continuous” fluctuations. “Second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are selected at a higher rate than the first variation of the pattern and the first and second times of “pseudo-continuous two times”. Further, in the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H, the ratio of “first pattern display” to be selected is higher than that in the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  In the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, the ratio of “first pattern display” is lower than that in the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H. Thus, the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, in the third variation of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations of the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous four times”, the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous three times” "Second pattern display" and "Third pattern display" are selected at a higher rate than the first and second fluctuations of the first and second fluctuations and the "pseudo-continuous four times" fluctuation pattern. Will be. Further, in the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, the ratio of “first pattern display” to be selected is higher than that in the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  However, with respect to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, in order to prevent the reliability in which the big hit gaming state is obtained after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the pattern reliability display previously selected, The third (current) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” are less reliable than the second (previous) fluctuations in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the pattern reliability display is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected based on the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H for the second (previous) change in “pseudo-series three times” and “pseudo-series four times”, “ In the third (current) change in “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I. As a result, regarding the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed does not decrease as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  As for the determination of the pattern reliability display described above, an example in which the display determination table is separately selected and determined in two cases, that is, when the variation display result is a big hit and when the variation display result is lost. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the pattern reliability display includes three cases when the variation display result is a big hit, when the variation display result is out of reach, and when the variation display result is out of reach. In such a case, the display determination table may be separately selected and determined.

  For each pattern reliability display determination table as described above, the first and second variations, the third variation, the fourth variation, and the fifth variation are used for determining the pattern reliability. The upper limit value of the numerical value may be set differently. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reach branch notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after it is decided to execute reach branch notice. It is.

  91A shows a big hit hour reach branch notice selection table. 91 (B) shows a reach-branch reach branch notice selection table. In FIG. 91, (C) shows a reach branch notice selection table for non-reach out of reach. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot reach branch notice selection table shown in (A) is used to determine a specific notice pattern when the reach branch notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the big hit fluctuation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice step determination table to be used. In the big hit reach branch notice selection table, the data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. It is set.

  Specifically, in the jackpot reach branch notice selection table shown in (A), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), a 21st notice step determination table 401A shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 22nd notice step decision table 401B shown in FIG. Selected. Then, the 23rd notice step decision table 401C shown in FIG. 92 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  When the variation pattern “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 24th notice step decision table 401D shown in FIG. Is selected. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-variation) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the 25th notice step decision shown in FIG. A table 401E is selected. Then, the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F shown in FIG. 92 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  (B) The reach branch notice selection table at the time of miss reach is determined when the reach notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the reach drift change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is designated. In addition, it is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the reach break reach advance notice selection table, data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the reach lag reach branch notice selection table shown in (B), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 27th notice step decision table 401G shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 28th notice step decision table 401H shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, the 29th notice step decision table 401I shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  (C) The reach reach notice selection table at the time of non-reach break is determined as the first step up notice when the non-reach break change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach break” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step determination table to be used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach out of reach reach branch notice selection table, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set as described above.

  In the non-reach lag reach branch notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 30th notice step decision table 401J shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Note that the jackpot reach branch notice selection table and the reach break notice notice selection table described above are the same as those for the big hit button notice notice table described above when the first change and the second change. Create a single table that shares three or two tables used to determine the notice pattern, and use the notice selection table so that one table can be used in common according to the presence or absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. May be set. In addition, for the big hit reach branch notice selection table, the same table is used to determine the notice pattern for the third change and the fourth change. However, the notice selection table may be set so that the one table is commonly used according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Further, the table may be shared according to whether or not it is a big hit, and further divided according to whether or not it will reach in the case of a loss.

  In addition, each of the big-breach reach branch notice selection table, the reach-breach notice selection table at the time of a missed reach, and the reach-branch notice select table at the time of a non-reach break differs, for example, for each of the first to fifth fluctuations. A notice step determination table of data setting contents may be provided.

  Next, the contents of the 21st notice step determination table 401A to the 26th notice step determination table 401F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the 21st notice step determination table 401A to the 26th notice step determination table 401F.

  In each notice step determination table for determining the notice step of the reach branch notice shown in the following description, the data “step 3A” indicates that the data is displayed up to step 3A which is the step of the reach undecided effect among the notice steps. It is data. Therefore, for example, the advancement from step 2 to step 3A is performed such that the notice step is step 1, step 2, and step 3A. Further, the data “Step 3B” is data indicating that display is performed up to Step 3B which is a step of reach confirmation effect in the notice step. Therefore, for example, the advancement from step 2 to step 3B is performed such that the notice step is step 1, step 2, and step 3B.

  In FIG. 92, (A) to (F) show the 21st notice step determination table 401A to the 26th notice step determination table 401F. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR21 and the display content of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure).

  In the 21st notice step determination table 401A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, “None (do not display notice step)”, “Step 1”, “Step” based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Settings are made such that any one of “2”, “Step 3A”, and “Step 3B” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, “none”, “step 1”, “step 2”, “step 3A”, and “step 3B” Is selected and displayed as a notice step. In the twenty-first notice step determination table 401A, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio of the notice step selected is “None”> “Step 1”> “Step 2”> “Step 3A”> “Step 3B”. Is set.

  It should be noted that “none (do not display the notice step)” of the notice steps used in the twenty-first notice step determination table 401A may not be selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the 21st step-up notice from being executed when a big hit is caused by the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, It is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice from deteriorating excessively.

  In the 22nd notice step determination table 401B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous 4 times” variation pattern, “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” Is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the twenty-second notice step determination table 401B, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. Also, in the 22nd notice step determination table 401B, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio of the notice step including “Step 1” and “Step 2” is higher than that in the 21st notice step determination table 401A. It is set.

  In (C) the 23rd notice step determination table 401C, as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. It is set to do. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third variation and the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous four times”, “step 2” and “step 3A” , And “Step 3B” are selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the twenty-third notice step determination table 401C, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 3B”> “step 3A”. Also, in the 23rd notice step determination table 401C, numerical data of SR21 is set so that “None” and “Step 1” are not selected as compared with the 22nd notice step determination table 401B. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the 23rd notice step determination table 401C as compared to the previously selected notice effect. That is, for the third (this time) change at the time of the big hit “pseudo-ream 3 times” and “pseudo-ream 4 times”, by selecting a notice step using the 23rd notice step determination table 401C, The prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change at the time of “3 times” and “4 times of pseudo-continuous” will be performed.

  In the 24th notice step determination table 401D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1 ”Or“ Step 2 ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the twenty-fourth notice step determination table 401D, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the twenty-fourth notice step determination table 401D, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the twenty-second notice step determination table 401B.

  In the 25th notice step determination table 401E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, among “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3A” based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Settings are made so that either one is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations”, any one of “Step 1”, “Step 2”, and “Step 3A” is selected, and these One of them is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the twenty-fifth notice step determination table 401E, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 3A”> “step 1”. Also, in the 25th notice step determination table 401E, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that “None” is not selected as compared with the 34th notice step determination table 401B. Also, in the 25th notice step determination table 401E, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio of selecting “Step 3A” is higher than that in the 23rd notice step determination table 401C.

  However, with respect to the 25th notice step determination table 401E, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 3rd (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process that prohibits selection of the advancement effect that is less reliable than the advancement effect selected in the 2nd (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation” (notification step) Forbidden processing). For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the 24th notice step determination table 401D for the second (previous) change of “pseudo-ream 5 times”, the third “pseudo-ream 5 times” (current) In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the advancement step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 25th advancement step determination table 401E.

  In the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. It is set to do. Therefore, in the fifth variation when the variation pattern is “five pseudo-reams”, one of “Step 2” and “Step 3” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 3B”> “step 2”> “step 3A”. In the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that “step 1” is not selected and “step 3B” is selected compared to the twenty-fifth notice step determination table 401E. . Also, in the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio of “step 3A” and “step 3B” is higher than that in the twenty-third notice step determination table 401C. .

  However, regarding the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state will be achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 5th (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation”. . For example, when “Step 3” is selected based on the 25th notice step determination table 401E for the fourth (previous) change of “5 pseudo-reams”, the fifth time (currently “5th pseudo-reams”) ), A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 2” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the advancement step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 26th advancement step determination table 401F. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the twenty-sixth notice step determination table 401F as compared to the notice effect selected previously.

  Next, the contents of the 27th notice step determination table 401G to the 45th notice step determination table 401O used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the 27th notice step determination table 401G to the 30th notice step determination table 401J.

  In FIG. 93, (A) to (D) show the 27th notice step determination table 401G to the 30th notice step determination table 401J. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR21 and the display content of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure).

  In the (A) 27th notice step determination table 401G, one of “None”, “Step 1”, “Step 2”, “Step 3A”, and “Step 3B” is selected. Has been. Accordingly, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous”, “none”, “step 1”, “step 2”, “step 3A”, and “ Any of “Step 3B” is selected and selected as the advance notice step and displayed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two quasi-continuations” that is out of reach, the step selected in this way is displayed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the twenty-seventh notice step determination table 401G, the numerical data of the SR 21 is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”> “step 3A”> “step 3B”. Is set.

  In the 28th notice step determination table 401H in (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-ream” and the variation of the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern of “quasi-continuous 4 times”, “none”, “step 1”, One of “Step 2” is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the twenty-eighth notice step determination table 401H, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. Also, in the 28th notice step determination table 401H, the ratio of selecting “none” is lower than in the 27th notice step determination table 401G, and the ratio of selecting “step 1” and “step 2” respectively. The numerical data of SR21 is set so that “step 3A” and “step 3B” are not selected. In the twenty-eighth notice step determination table 401H, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio at which “none” is selected is higher than that in the twenty-second notice step determination table 401B when a big hit is made.

  In the 29th notice step determination table 401I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, “Step 1”, “Step 2”, “Step 3A” and “Step 3B” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR21. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of three pseudo-reams” and the third variation and the fourth variation in the variation pattern of “quasi-continuous four times”, “step 1”, “ Any one of “Step 2”, “Step 3A”, and “Step 3B” is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the 29th notice step determination table 401I, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 1”> “step 2”> “step 3A”> “step 3B”. ing. In the 29th notice step determination table 401I, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that “None” is not selected and “Step 3B” is selected, compared to the 28th notice step determination table 401H. Also, in the 29th notice step determination table 401I, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that “step 1” is selected as compared with the 23rd notice step determination table 401C at the time of a big hit.

  However, regarding the 29th notice step determination table 401I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the 2nd (previous) change in “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “step 2” is selected on the basis of the 28th notice step determination table 401H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, “pseudo train 3 times” ”And“ pseudo sequence 4 times ”, the prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that“ step 1 ”with low reliability is not selected in the third change (this time). As such a forbidden process, the foreseeable step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 29th foretelling step determination table 401I. As a result, the 29th notice step determination table 401I is not less reliable than the notice effect that was selected before, when the notice effect is executed.

  In the 30th notice step determination table 401J in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR21, one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR21, Settings are made so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and “twice pseudo-continuous” that are out of reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and “step 1” is selected. Only notice step is displayed. In the 30th notice step determination table 401J, the numerical data of SR21 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than “step 1”.

  Further, in each of the notice step determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice step may be set different for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  As shown in FIG. 78, when the type of the first notice effect is selected and determined, if “no notice effect” can be selected, the notice step “none” as shown in each of the notice step determination tables described above is selected. A notice step determination table that cannot be selected may be used. That is, it suffices if it is possible to select not to perform the notice effect at any time of selecting and determining the type of the notice effect or selecting and determining a specific notice step.

  Further, as the reach branch notice, an example is shown in which a notice effect is produced in which the effect branches at the stage where the third step, which is the final notice step, is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notice effect in which the effect branches in the middle of the third step may be performed. Further, not limited to the third time, control may be performed so that the effect branches at a stage at the start of the second step, a stage in the middle of the second time, or a stage in the middle of the first time. Is not limited to the final notice step. In addition, as an example of the branch destination of the reach branch notice production, an example in which two branch destinations of a reach confirmation production step and a reach undecidation production step are provided, but is not limited thereto. A plurality of branch destinations may be provided. In addition, after the notice step branches, the reach branch notice may be branched in a plurality of stages by branching a plurality of steps so that the notice step can be further branched.

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a button branch notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after it is decided to execute the button branch notice. It is.

  94A shows a big hit button branch notice selection table. In FIG. 94, (B) shows a button branch notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 94, (C) shows a button branch notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot button branch notice selection table shown in (A) is used for determining a specific notice pattern when a button branch notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the big hit fluctuation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice step determination table to be used. In the big hit button branch notice selection table, data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the jackpot button branch notice selection table shown in (A), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. The 31st notice step decision table 402A shown in FIG. 95 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. A thirty-second notice step decision table 402B shown in FIG. 95 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the 33rd notice step decision table 402C shown in FIG. 95 is selected to decide the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  When the variation pattern “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. A thirty-fourth notice step decision table 402D shown in FIG. 95 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-variation) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the 35th notice step determination shown in FIG. Table 402E is selected. Then, the 36th notice step decision table 402F shown in FIG. 95 is selected in order to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach-out button branch notice selection table shown in (B) shows that when a reach-out change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out” is specified, the button branch notice is determined as the first step-up notice. In addition, it is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the reach-out button branch notice selection table, data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach button branch notice selection table shown in (B), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. A 37th notice step decision table 402G shown in FIG. 96 is used to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and a notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. A thirty-eighth notice step determination table 402H shown in FIG. 96 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the 39th notice step decision table 402I shown in FIG. 95 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  In the non-reach off button branch notice selection table shown in (C), the button branch notice is determined as the first step-up notice when the non-reach deviation change pattern with the fluctuation display result of “non-reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step determination table to be used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button branch notice selection table, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set.

  In the non-reach off button branch notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 40th notice step decision table 402J shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Note that the big hit button branch notice selection table and the reach out button notice notice selection table described above are the same as the big hit button notice selection table described above and the like at the time of the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. Create a single table that shares three or two tables used to determine the notice pattern, and use the notice selection table so that one table can be used in common according to the presence or absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. May be set. In addition, for the big hit button branch notice selection table, the same table is used to determine the notice pattern for the third change and the fourth change. However, the notice selection table may be set so that the one table is commonly used according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Further, the table may be shared according to whether or not it is a big hit, and further divided according to whether or not it will reach in the case of a loss.

  Further, each of the big hit button branch notice selection table, the unreachable button branch notice selection table, and the non-reach out button branch notice selection table, for example, is different for each of the first to fifth fluctuations. A notice step determination table for data setting contents may be provided.

  Next, the contents of the 31st notice step determination table 402A to the 36th notice step determination table 402F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the 31st notice step determination table 402A to the 36th notice step determination table 402F.

  In each notice step determination table for determining the notice step of the button branch notice shown in the following description, the data “button branch” is data indicating that the button branch effect step of the notice step is displayed. Therefore, for example, an effect of proceeding from the step 1 to the button branch effect step instead of the step 2 such that the notice step is “step 1” or “button branch” is performed.

  95, (A) to (F) show the 31st notice step determination table 402A to the 36th notice step determination table 402F. In each notice step determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR22 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure) is shown.

  In the 31st notice step determination table 402A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, “none (do not display the notice step)”, “step 1”, “step” based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. The setting is made to select either “2” or “button branch”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, one of “none”, “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” is selected. Is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the 31st notice step determination table 402A, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”> “button branch”.

  It should be noted that “none (do not display the notice step)” of the notice steps used in the 31st notice step determination table 402A may not be selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first step-up notice from not being executed when a big hit is caused by the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, It is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice from deteriorating excessively.

  In the thirty-second notice step determination table 402B in (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and the variation pattern of the “pseudo-continuous 4 times” variation pattern, “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” Is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the thirty-second notice step determination table 402B, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the thirty-second notice step determination table 402B, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “step 1” and “step 2” is higher than that in the thirty-first notice step determination table 402A. Is set.

  In the 33rd notice step determination table 402C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, either “step 2” or “button branch” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. It is set to do. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third variation and the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous four times”, “step 2” and “button branch” Is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the 33rd notice step determination table 402C, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “button branch”. Also, in the thirty-third notice step determination table 402C, numerical data of SR22 is set so that “none” and “step 1” are not selected as compared with the thirty-second notice step determination table 402B. As a result, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the 33rd notice step determination table 402C as compared to the previously selected notice effect. In other words, by selecting the notice step using the 33rd notice step determination table 402C for the third change (current time) at the time of the big hit “3 times of quasi series” and “4 times of quasi series”, The prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change at the time of “3 times” and “4 times of pseudo-continuous” will be performed.

  In the 34th notice step determination table 402D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1 ”Or“ Step 2 ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the thirty-four notice step determination table 402D, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the thirty-fourth notice step determination table 402D, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the thirty-second notice step determination table 402B.

  In the 35th notice step determination table 402E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, among the “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. Settings are made so that either one is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” is selected, and these One of them is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the thirty-fifth notice step determination table 402E, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “button branch”> “step 1”. Also, in the 35th notice step determination table 402E, numerical data of SR22 is set so that “None” is not selected as compared with the 32nd notice step determination table 402B. Also, in the 35th notice step determination table 402E, numerical data of SR22 is set so that “step 1” is selected as compared with the 33rd notice step determination table 402C.

  However, regarding the 35th notice step determination table 402E, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-ream 5” is set in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed. For the third time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process that prohibits selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “five consecutive times” (notice step) Forbidden processing). For example, when “Step 2” is selected based on the 34th notice step determination table 402D for the second (previous) change of “5 pseudo-continuations”, the third (current) of “5 pseudo-continuations” is selected. In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the advance notice step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 35th advance notice step determination table 402E. As a result, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the 35th notice step determination table 402E as compared with the previously selected notice effect.

  In (F), the 36th notice step determination table 402F, as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, either “step 2” or “button branch” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. It is set to do. Therefore, in the fifth change in the case of the “five pseudo-five times” change pattern, either “Step 2” or “Button Branch” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the thirty-sixth notice step determination table 402F, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “button branch”> “step 2”. In the thirty-sixth notice step determination table 402F, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio of selecting “button branch” is higher than that in the thirty-third notice step determination table 402C.

  However, regarding the 36th notice step determination table 402F, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 5th (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation”. . For example, when “button branch” is selected based on the 35th notice step determination table 402E for the fourth (previous) change of “5 pseudo-reams”, the fifth time (this time) ), A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 2” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the advance notice step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 36th advance step determination table 402F. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the 36th notice step determination table 402F as compared to the previously selected notice effect.

  Next, the contents of the 37th notice step determination table 402G to the 40th notice step determination table 402J used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both out of reach and out of reach) will be described. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the 37th notice step determination table 402G to the 40th notice step determination table 402J.

  In FIG. 96, (A) to (D) show the 37th notice step determination table 402G to the 40th notice step determination table 402J. In each notice step determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR22 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure) is shown.

  In the 37th notice step determination table 402G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. Settings are made so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and “two quasi-continuous” fluctuation patterns, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and “step 1” is selected. The notice step is displayed only when In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two quasi-continuations” that is out of reach, the step selected in this way is displayed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the thirty-seventh notice step determination table 402G, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio at which “none” is selected is higher than “step 1”.

  In the 38th notice step determination table 402H of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-ream” and the variation of the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern of “quasi-continuous 4 times”, “none”, “step 1”, One of “Step 2” is selected, and a notice step is displayed when “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. In the thirty-eight notice step determination table 402H, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”, “step 2”> “none”. Also, in the thirty-eight notice step determination table 402H, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “step 1” and “step 2” is higher than in the thirty-seven notice step determination table 402G. Is set. Also, in the thirty-eight notice step determination table 402H, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio at which “none” is selected is higher than in the thirty-second notice step decision table 402B when a big hit is achieved.

  In the 39th notice step determination table 402I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, one of “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of three pseudo-reams” and the third variation and the fourth variation in the variation pattern of “quasi-continuous four times”, “step 1”, “ One of “Step 2” and “Button Branch” is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the advance step.In the 39th advance step determination table 402I, the advance step is basically selected. The numerical data is set so that the ratio is “step 1”> “step 2”> “button branch”. In the 39th notice step determination table 402I, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that “None” is not selected as compared with the 38th notice step determination table 402H. In the 39th notice step determination table 402I, the ratio of selecting “Step 1” is higher than that in the 33rd notice step determination table 402C when a big hit is made, and “button branch” is selected. The numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio is low.

  However, regarding the 39th notice step determination table 402I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “step 2” is selected on the basis of the 38th notice step determination table 402H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, “pseudo train 3 times” ”And“ four pseudo-continuations ”for the third time (this time), a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that“ step 1 ”with low reliability is not selected. As such a forbidden process, the foreseeable step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 39th foretelling step determination table 402I. As a result, regarding the 39th notice step determination table 402I, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered as compared with the previously selected notice effect.

  In the 40th notice step determination table 402J of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR22, one of the notice steps of “none” and “step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR22, and Settings are made so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and “twice pseudo-continuous” that are out of reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and “step 1” is selected. Only notice step is displayed. In the 40th notice step determination table 402J, the numerical data of SR22 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than “step 1”.

  Further, in each of the notice step determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice step may be set different for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  As shown in FIG. 76, when selecting and determining the type of the first notice effect, if “no notice effect” can be selected, the notice step “none” as shown in each of the notice step determination tables described above is performed. A notice step determination table that cannot be selected may be used. That is, it suffices if it is possible to select not to perform the notice effect at any time when selecting and determining the type of the notice effect or when selecting and determining a specific notice step.

  Next, a button branch notice content selection table used to determine the notice contents to be displayed when an effect is shown to show the contents of the parcel (hereinafter referred to as the notice contents) in accordance with the button operation in the button branch notice. The notice content determination table will be described.

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the button branch notice content selection table and the notice content determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. The button branch notice content selection table shown in (A) is a table (notice that is used when determining the notice contents to be displayed in response to the button operation when the button branch notice is decided to be executed. It is a data table used for selecting a content determination table. Further, the first to third notice content determination tables shown in (B) to (D) are tables that are referred to in order to specifically determine the notice contents to be displayed in response to the button operation. Yes, selected by button branch notice content selection table.

  In the button branch notice content selection table shown in (A), a different notice content determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set to do. When the variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when the variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice content determination table is selected as follows. The first notice content shown in (B) to determine the notice contents at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and the notice contents at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change) The object determination table 500A is selected. When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice content determination table is selected as follows. The first notice content shown in (B) to determine the notice contents at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and the notice contents at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change) The object determination table 500A is selected. In order to determine the notice contents at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) and to determine the notice contents at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the second shown in (C) The notice content determination table 500B is selected. When the variation pattern “pseudo continuous 5 times” is designated, the notice content determination table is selected as follows. When the fluctuation pattern of “5 pseudo-continuations” is specified, to determine the notice content at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change), and the notice content at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change) Is determined, the first notice content determination table 500A shown in (B) is selected. In order to determine the notice contents at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) and to determine the notice contents at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the second shown in (C) The notice content determination table 500B is selected. Then, the third notice content determination table 500C shown in (D) is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  In each of the notice contents determination tables shown in (B) to (D), the random number SR23 for determining the notice contents is “No notice contents” and “No notice contents” in accordance with the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. It is allocated to either “Band bundle” or “Gold”. In the setting of the notice content determination table, allocation for each of the selection items of “no notice contents”, “was bundle”, and “gold bullion” is set as “reach off fluctuation pattern” and “big hit fluctuation pattern”. Differently, the value of the random number SR23 corresponding to each selection item is set. It should be noted that, even in the case of “reach deviation variation pattern”, the button branch notice may be executed, and the notice content may be determined using the notice content determination table. In the case of “no quasi-continuous” and “two quasi-continuous”, the button branch notice is selected only when a big hit is made (see FIG. 95A). The random number SR23 is allocated to the notice contents only for the “big hit fluctuation pattern”. In the case of “pseudo sequence 3 times” and “pseudo sequence 4 times”, the button branch notice is selected in each of the cases where a big hit and a reach are lost (FIGS. 95C and 95E). 96 (C)), in the second notice content determination table 500B, the random number SR23 is assigned to the notice contents in the “big hit fluctuation pattern” and “reach off fluctuation pattern”. In the case of “5 pseudo-continuations”, the button branch notice is selected only in the case of a big hit (see FIG. 95 (F)), so the third notice content determination table 500C is “big hit fluctuation pattern”. The random number SR23 is assigned only to the notice contents.

  In the setting of the notice content determination table, specifically, in the case of the big hit variation pattern, the selection ratio is high because of the relationship of gold bullion> bill bundle> no notice content. Further, in the case of the reach deviation variation pattern, the ratio selected based on the relationship of the bill bundle> gold bullion> no notice content is high. Therefore, when the gold bullion is displayed as the notice content, the reliability of the big hit is the highest, so that the player's expectation about the big hit can be enhanced most.

  In addition, as the button branch notice, an example is shown in which a notice effect is produced in which the effect branches at the stage where the third step, which is the final notice step, is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notice effect in which the effect branches in the middle of the third step may be performed. Further, not limited to the third time, control may be performed so that the effect branches at a stage at the start of the second step, a stage in the middle of the second time, or a stage in the middle of the first time. Is not limited to the final notice step. In addition, as the branch destination of the effect of the button branch notice, the example in which the two branch destinations of the effect of displaying the notice content and the effect of not displaying the notice content is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, three or more branch destinations may be provided. Also, after the notice step is branched by button branching, button notice is made possible by branching the button so that the notice step can be branched by button branching. Also good.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A is a table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the second notice effect. In the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A, the random number SR12 for determining the execution of the second notice effect is “No second notice effect” or “ Allotted to one of “second step-up notice”.

  In the setting of the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach deviation”, the reach deviation deviation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach deviation”, and the fluctuation display. Each selection item so that the allocation for each selection item of “no second notice effect” and “second step-up notice (monitor notice)” differs according to the big hit fluctuation pattern that results in “big hit” The value of the random number SR12 corresponding to is set.

  Specifically, in the setting of the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A, the second step-up notice (in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern is more in the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern). Monitor monitor) is often selected. Thereby, when it is a big hit, it is easier to perform the second notice effect than when it is lost. For this reason, when the second notice effect by the second step-up notice is performed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit. Also, when the reach is lost, the second notice effect is more easily performed than when the non-reach is lost. For this reason, when the second notice effect by the second step-up notice is performed, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation regarding the occurrence of reach.

  In FIG. 98, an example is shown in which there is only one type of target notice pattern type that can be selected as the second notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the notice pattern type that can be selected as the second notice effect may be two or more kinds.

  In addition, in the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A shown in FIG. 98, for each of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, the reach deviation deviation pattern, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern, according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern, Different ratios for selecting and determining each of the second step-up notice and the second step-up notice (for example, the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the ratio of selecting the second step-up notice) It may be.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after determining whether or not to execute the second notice effect.

  In FIG. 99, (A) shows the second step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit. (B) shows the second step-up notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. In FIG. 99, (C) shows a second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The second step-up notice selection table at the time of jackpot shown in (A) is a table for determining a specific notice pattern when the second step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the big hit fluctuation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice step determination table used for this. In the big hit second step-up notice selection table, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set.

  Specifically, in the second step up notice selection table at the time of big hit shown in (A), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. An eleventh notice step decision table 208A shown in FIG. 100 is used to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and a notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. A twelfth notice step decision table 208B shown in FIG. 100 is used to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and a notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Selected. Then, the thirteenth notice step decision table 208C shown in FIG. 100 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  When the variation pattern “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 14th notice step decision table 208D shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-variation) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the fifteenth notice step determination shown in FIG. Table 208E is selected. Then, the 16th notice step decision table 208F shown in FIG. 100 is selected in order to decide the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  In the second step-up advance notice selection table shown in (B), the second step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the second step-up notice selection table at the time of reach losing, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the second step-up notice selection table at the time of out-of-reach shown in (B), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 17th notice step decision table 208G shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the 18th notice step decision table 208H shown in FIG. Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change, the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I shown in FIG. 101 is selected.

  The second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach deviation shown in (C) shows the second step-up notice as the notice pattern type when a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation display result is “non-reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern when is determined. In the second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set to select.

  Specifically, in the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (C), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the twentieth notice step decision table 208J shown in FIG. Is selected.

  Each of the second step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit and the second step-up notice selection table at the time of losing reach are tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change ( An example in which three or two tables are provided as the notice step determination table) and the table is selectively used according to the presence / absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change, and the one table is pseudo-connected. The notice selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the presence / absence of and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit second step-up notice selection table, the eleventh notice step decision table 208A, the twelfth notice step decision table 208B, and the fourteenth notice step decision table 208D are common to one table. Turn into.

  As for the second step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit, two tables are provided as tables (notification step decision table) used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third change and at the time of the fourth change. An example of using different tables according to the number of fluctuations in was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third variation and the fourth variation are created, and the one table is used as the number of times of variation in the pseudo-series. The notice selection table may be set so that it can be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice selection table, whether or not the big hit is made such that the thirteenth notice step decision table 208C and the fifteenth notice step decision table 208E are shared by one table. Separate and share the table.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the second step-up notice selection table, the second step-up notice selection table for the first and second fluctuations and the third and fourth fluctuations for the second fluctuation notice Either one of the two step-up notice selection tables may be shared, and the second step-up notice selection table for the first and second fluctuations and the third and fourth fluctuations are used. Both the second step-up notice selection table may be shared.

  In addition, each of the second step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit, the second step-up notice selection table at the time of losing reach, and the second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach losing, for example, for the first to fifth times. For each variation, a notice step determination table having different data setting contents may be provided.

  Next, the contents of the eleventh notice step determination table 208A to the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the eleventh notice step determination table 208A to the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F.

  In FIG. 100, eleventh notice step determination table 208A to sixteenth notice step determination table 208F are shown in (A) to (F). Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR13 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure).

  In each notice step determination table for determining the notice step of the second step-up notice shown in the following description, the data “step A” is data indicating that it is displayed up to step A of the notice step. Therefore, when the notice step data of step A is selected, the advancement of the notice step to step A is performed, for example. Further, in the notice step determination table shown in the following description, the data “step B” is data indicating that it is displayed up to step B of the notice step. Therefore, when the notice step data of step B is selected, for example, the advancement to step B is performed such that the notice step is step A or step B. The data “Step C” is data indicating that the display is performed up to Step C of the advance notice step. Therefore, when the data of the notice step “step C” is selected, for example, the notice step proceeds to step C such as step A, step B, and step C.

  In the eleventh notice step determination table 208A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, "None (do not display notice step)", "Step A", "Step" based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. A setting is made so that one of “B” and “Step C” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, one of “none”, “step A”, “step B”, and “step C” is selected. Is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the eleventh notice step determination table 208A, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step A”> “step B”> “step C”.

  In the twelfth notice step determination table 208B of (B), any one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13, as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “none”, “step A”, and “step B” ”Is selected, and when“ Step A ”or“ Step B ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the twelfth notice step determination table 208B, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step A”> “step B”> “none”. In the twelfth notice step determination table 208B, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “step A” and “step B” is higher than that in the eleventh notice step determination table 208A. Is set.

  In the thirteenth notice step determination table 208C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, either “Step B” or “Step C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. It is set to do. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third variation and the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous four times”, “step B” and “step C” Is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the nineteenth notice step determination table 208C, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step B”> “step C”. In the thirteenth notice step determination table 208C, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that “none” and “step A” are not selected as compared with the twelfth notice step determination table 208B. As a result, regarding the thirteenth notice step determination table 208 </ b> C, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered as compared with the previously selected notice effect. In other words, by selecting the advance step using the thirteenth advance step determination table 208C for the third change (this time) at the time of the big hits “pseudo sequence 3 times” and “pseudo sequence 4 times”, The prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change at the time of “3 times” and “4 times of pseudo-continuous” will be performed.

  In the fourteenth notice step determination table 208D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, any one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected, and “step A ”Or“ Step B ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the fourteenth notice step determination table 208D, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step A”> “step B”> “none”. In the fourteenth notice step determination table 208D, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio at which “step B” is selected is higher than that in the twelfth notice step determination table 208B.

  In the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, among the “step A”, “step B”, and “step C” based on the extracted value of the random number SR13, Either one is selected, and settings are made so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “five pseudo-five times”, any one of “Step A”, “Step B”, and “Step C” is selected, and these One of them is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step B”> “step C”> “step A”. Also, in the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E, numerical data of SR13 is set so that “none” is not selected as compared with the fourteenth notice step determination table 208D. Also, in the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E, numerical data of SR13 is set so that “step C” is selected as compared with the fourteenth notice step determination table 208D.

  However, with respect to the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the third time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process that prohibits selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “five consecutive times” (notice step) Forbidden processing). For example, when “step B” is selected based on the 14th notice step determination table 208D for the second (previous) change in “five consecutive 5 times”, the third (current) of “five consecutive 5 times”. In the variation, the prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step A” with low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition process of such a notice step are, for example, as follows. When selecting and determining a notice step as a notice pattern before executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice step data for specifying the decided notice step is selected according to the notice step selected and decided. Data indicating the pattern is stored (updated) in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM. Data indicating the previous notice pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time a notice step is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-series. When selecting and determining the advance notice step for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the pseudo-ream, each time the advance step is selected and determined, for example, a step decision table such as the fifteenth advance notice step decision table 208E is selected. For the current selection advance notice step, which is an advance notice step, the previous notice step specified by the previous notice step data is compared with the reliability that is a big hit. When the selected advance notice step has a lower reliability than the previous advance notice step, the content of the previous advance notice step is determined as the advance notice step in the current change so that the advance notice step having a lower reliability than the previous change is not decided. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice step is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice step, the current selection notice step is determined as the notice step in the current variation. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the plurality of types of advance notice steps, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the flag value is set so that the numerical value becomes larger). As a data indicating the previous notice step, a flag corresponding to the type of the notice step is set. Then, the flag set as the previous notice step is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice step in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relation of the numerical value of the flag, which is the current notice step or the previous notice step? Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, either “Step B” or “Step C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. It is set to do. Therefore, in the fifth variation when the variation pattern is “five pseudo-reams”, one of “Step B” and “Step C” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step C”> “step B”. Also, in the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F, the ratio of selecting “Step B” is lower and the ratio of selecting “Step C” is higher than in the fifteen notice step determination table 208E. Numeric data is set. In the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that “step A” is not selected.

  However, with respect to the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 5th (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of “5th pseudo-continuation”. . For example, when “step C” is selected based on the fifteenth notice step determination table 208E for the fourth (previous) variation of “five pseudo-continuations”, the fifth (pseudo-continuous five times) (this time) ), A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step B” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such a prohibition process, the notification step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the sixteenth notice step determination table 208F as compared with the previously selected notice effect.

  Next, the contents of the seventeenth notice step determination table 208G to the twentieth notice step determination table 208J that are used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventeenth notice step determination table 208G to the twentieth notice step determination table 208J.

  In FIG. 101, (A) to (D) show the 17th notice step determination table 208G to the 20th notice step determination table 208J. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR13 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure).

  In the seventeenth notice step determination table 208G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, either “none (do not display the notice step)” or “step A” is selected based on the extracted value of random number SR13. The notice step is selected, and other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, either “none” or “step A” is selected, and “step A” is selected. The notice step is displayed only when In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two quasi-continuations” that is out of reach, the step selected in this way is displayed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the seventeenth notice step determination table 208G, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the rate at which “none” is selected is higher than “step A”.

  In the eighteenth notice step determination table 208H of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, any one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Accordingly, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of 3 pseudo-reams” and the variation of the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern of “quasi-ream 4 times”, “none”, “step A”, In addition, when any one of “Step B” is selected and “Step A” or “Step B” is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the eighteenth notice step determination table 208H, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step A”> “step B”> “none”. In the eighteenth notice step determination table 208H, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “step A” and “step B” is higher than that in the seventeenth notice step determination table 208G. Is set. Also, in the eighteenth notice step determination table 208H, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio at which “none” is selected is higher than that in the twelfth notice step determination table 208B when it is a big hit.

  In the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, either “step A” or “step B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13. It is set to do. Therefore, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of“ pseudo-continuous three times ”and the third variation and the fourth variation in the case of the variation pattern of“ pseudo-continuous four times ”,“ step A ”and“ One of “Step B” is selected, and one of these is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step A”> “step B”. Also, in the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I, numerical data of SR13 is set so that “step C” is not selected as compared with the eighteenth notice step determination table 208H. Also, in the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the ratio at which “step A” is selected is higher than that in the thirteenth notice step determination table 208C when it is a big hit. .

  However, with respect to the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, compared with the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “step B” is selected based on the 18th notice step determination table 208H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, “pseudo train 3 times” ”And“ four pseudo-reams ”, the prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that“ step A ”with low reliability is not selected in the third (current) change. As such a forbidden process, the foreseeable step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the 19th foretelling step determination table 208I. As a result, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the nineteenth notice step determination table 208I as compared to the notice effect selected previously.

  In the twentieth notice step determination table 208J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR13, one of the notice steps “None” and “Step A” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR13, Settings are made so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and “twice quasi-continuous” out of reach, either “None” or “Step A” is selected, and “Step A” is selected. Only notice step is displayed. In the twentieth notice step determination table 208J, the numerical data of SR13 is set so that the rate at which “none” is selected is higher than “step A”.

  Further, in each of the notice step determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice step may be set different for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  In the case where the second notice effect is to be executed and the notice pattern at the time of execution is selected and determined using one random value, the second notice effect is not provided for each variation pattern in FIG. The random number SR12 is set to the value of the random announcement value SR12 and the plurality of types of notice patterns, such as 1 notice pattern (with the second notice effect), second notice pattern (with the second notice effect),. Allotted to each, and based on the extracted value of the random number SR12, whether or not to execute the second notice effect, and the notice pattern at the time of execution may be selected and determined. In that case, the various tables shown in FIGS. 99 to 101 are not used. In such a case, the data table for selecting and determining whether or not the second notice effect is to be executed using one random value is used for the second notice effect. There is no reaming, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times), and such a data table may be properly used according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the third notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200B stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The third notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200B is a table referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the third notice effect. In the third notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200B, the random number SR14 for determining the execution of the third notice effect is “No third notice effect” or “ Allotted to one of “movable member notice”.

  In the setting of the third notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200B, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach deviation”, the reach deviation deviation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach deviation”, and the fluctuation display. The random number SR14 corresponding to each selection item is different so that the allocation for each selection item of “No third notice effect” and “Moveable member notice” differs from the big hit fluctuation pattern in which the result is “big hit”. Value is set.

  In the setting of the third notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200B, specifically, the movable member notice is selected for the big hit fluctuation pattern than for the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation fluctuation pattern. There are many ratios. Thereby, when it is a big hit, the third notice effect is more easily performed than when it is lost. For this reason, when the third notice effect by the notice of the movable member is performed, the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit can be enhanced. In addition, when the reach is lost, the third notice effect is more easily performed than when the non-reach is lost. For this reason, when the 3rd notice production by a movable member notice is performed, a player's expectation about the occurrence of reach can be raised.

  In FIG. 102, an example is shown in which there is one type of target for the notice pattern type that can be selected as the third notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the notice pattern type that can be selected as the third notice effect may be two or more kinds.

  In addition, in the third notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200B shown in FIG. 102, for each of the non-reach deviation variation pattern, the reach deviation variation pattern, and the big hit variation pattern, according to the number of pseudo continuous variations in the variation pattern, There may be different ratios for selecting and determining each of the third notice effect and the movable member notice (for example, the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the ratio for selecting the movable member notice). .

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after determining whether or not to execute the third notice effect.

  In FIG. 103, (A) shows the big hit time movable member notice selection table. (B) shows a movable member notice selection table at the time of detachment. In FIG. 103, (C) shows a movable member notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The big hit time movable member notice selection table shown in (A) is a movable that is used to determine a specific notice pattern when a movable member notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a big hit variation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting a member operation | movement determination table. In the big hit time movable member notice selection table, data is selected so that a different movable member operation determination table is selected according to the total number of variation displays (including re-variation) performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the big hit time movable member notice selection table shown in (A), the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. When the variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when the variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The first movable member operation determination table shown in FIG. 104 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). 301A is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The second movable member operation determination table 301B shown in FIG. 104 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the third movable member operation determination table 301C shown in FIG. 104 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The fourth movable member operation determination table shown in FIG. 104 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). 301D is selected. The fifth movable member operation shown in FIG. 104 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change). The decision table 301E is selected. Then, the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F shown in FIG. 104 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  (B) The reach-out movable member notice selection table shown in (B) indicates that when a reach-out change pattern in which the change display result is “reach out” is designated, and the moveable member notice is determined as the notice pattern type, It is a data table for selecting the movable member operation | movement determination table used for determination of a specific notice pattern. In the movable member notice selection table at the time of detachment, a different movable member operation determination table is selected according to the total number of fluctuation displays (including re-variation) performed in the fluctuation pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set.

  Specifically, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows in the reach-out movable member notice selection table shown in (B). For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The seventh movable member operation determination table shown in FIG. 105 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). 301G is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The eighth movable member operation determination table shown in FIG. 105 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). 301H is selected. Then, the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I shown in FIG. 105 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  In the non-reach shift movable member notice selection table shown in (C), when a non-reach shift change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach break” is specified, the movable member notice is determined as the notice pattern type. It is a data table for selecting a movable member operation determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach movable member advance notice selection table, a different movable member operation determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set so as to.

  In the non-reach shift movable member notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the movable member operation determination table is selected as follows. The tenth movable member operation determination table shown in FIG. 105 in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). 301J is selected.

  Note that, for each of the big hit movable member notice selection table and the reach failure movable member notice selection table, a table (movable member operation decision) used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first variation and the second variation is used. In this example, three or two tables are provided as the table), and the table is selectively used according to the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change, and the one table is pseudo-connected. The notice selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the presence / absence of and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit movable member notice selection table, the first movable member operation determination table 301A, the second movable member operation determination table 301B, and the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D are combined into one table. Make common.

  As for the big hit time movable member notice selection table, two tables (movable member operation decision tables) used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third change and the time of the fourth change are provided. An example of using different tables according to the number of changes was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third variation and the fourth variation are created, and the one table is used as the number of times of variation in the pseudo-series. The notice selection table may be set so that it can be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice selection table, whether or not the big hit is made such that the third movable member operation determination table 301C and the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E are shared by one table. Divide them into common tables.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the movable member notice selection table, the movable member notice selection table for the first and second fluctuations and the movable member notice selection table for the third and fourth fluctuations are used. And the movable member notice selection table for the first and second fluctuations and the movable member notice selection table for the third and fourth fluctuations. May be shared.

  Further, each of the big hit time movable member notice selection table, the reach failure movable member notice selection table, and the non-reach break movable member notice selection table is different for each of the first to fifth variations, for example. You may make it provide the movable member notice determination table of the data setting content.

  Next, the contents of the first movable member operation determination table 301A to the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F used when the variation display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first movable member operation determination table 301A to the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F.

  104, (A) to (F) show the first movable member operation determination table 301A to the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F. In each movable member operation determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR15 and the contents of the selected movable member operation (movable member operation in the figure) is shown.

  In each movable member motion determination table for determining the movable member motion of the movable member notice shown in the following description, the data “movable member motion A” is data indicating that the movable member motion A of FIG. 75A is performed. It is. Therefore, when the movable member operation data “movable member operation A” is selected, an effect of executing the movable member operation A is performed. In the movable member operation determination table described below, the data “movable member operation B” is data indicating that the movable member operation B in FIG. 75B is performed. Therefore, when the movable member operation data “movable member operation B” is selected, an effect of executing the movable member operation B is performed. The data “movable member operation C” is data indicating that the movable member operation C in FIG. 75C is performed. Therefore, when the movable member operation data “movable member operation C” is selected, an effect of executing the movable member operation C is performed.

  In the first movable member motion determination table 301A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, “movable member motion A”, “movable member motion B”, and “movable Settings are made such that any one of “member motion C” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “movable member operation A”, “movable member operation B”, and “movable member operation C” Is selected, and the selected movable member operation is performed. In the first movable member operation determination table 301A, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio of the movable member operation selected is “movable member operation A”> “movable member operation B”> “movable member operation C”. Has been.

  In the second movable member operation determination table 301B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, among the “movable member operation A” and “movable member operation B”. Settings are made so that either one is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “movable member operation A” and “movable member operation B”. "Is selected, and the selected movable member operation is performed. In the second movable member operation determination table 301B, numerical data is set so that the selected ratio regarding the movable member operation is “movable member operation A”> “movable member operation B”.

  In the third movable member motion determination table 301C in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, either “movable member motion B” or “movable member motion C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous four times”, “movable member operation B” and “movable” Any one of “member motion C” is selected, and the selected movable member motion is performed. In the third movable member operation determination table 301C, numerical data is set so that the ratio at which the movable member operation is selected is “movable member operation B”> “movable member operation C”. Further, in the third movable member operation determination table 301C, numerical data of SR15 is set so that “movable member operation A” is not selected as compared with the second movable member operation determination table 301B. Thereby, the third movable member operation determination table 301 </ b> C does not decrease the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the notice effect that is selected previously. In other words, by selecting the movable member operation using the third movable member operation determination table 301C for the third (this time) variation in the case of the big hits “3 times of pseudo-ream” and “4 times of pseudo-ream”, “ The prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change at the time of “pseudo series 3 times” and “pseudo series 4 times” is performed.

  In the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, among “movable member operation A” and “movable member operation B”. Settings are made so that either one is selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, either “movable member operation A” or “movable member operation B” is selected and selected. A movable member operation is performed. In the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D, numerical data is set so that the selected ratio of the movable member operation is “movable member operation A”> “movable member operation B”. In the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio of selecting “movable member operation B” is higher than that in the second movable member operation determination table 301B.

  In the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, among “movable member operation B” and “movable member operation C”. Settings are made so that either one is selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations when the fluctuation pattern is “five pseudo-five times”, either “movable member operation B” or “movable member operation C” is selected and selected. A movable member operation is performed. In the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E, numerical data is set so that the ratio at which the movable member operation is selected is “movable member operation B”> “movable member operation C”. In the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that “movable member operation C” is selected as compared with the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D.

  In the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E, numerical data of SR15 is set so that “movable member operation A” is not selected as compared with the fourth movable member operation determination table 301D. As a result, the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E does not have a lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed as compared with the notice effect that is selected previously. In other words, with respect to the third (current) fluctuation of the big hit “pseudo-ream 5 times”, by selecting the movable member motion using the fifth movable member motion determination table 301E, the second “pseudo-ream 5 times” ( The prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the previous variation is performed.

  In the sixth movable member motion determination table 301F in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, either “movable member motion B” or “movable member motion C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the fifth variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, either “movable member operation B” or “movable member operation C” is selected, and the selected movable member operation is performed. Done. In the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F, numerical data is basically set such that the ratio of the movable member operation selected is “movable member operation C”> “movable member operation B”. Also, in the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F, the ratio of selecting “movable member operation B” is lower than in the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E, and the ratio of selecting “movable member operation C”. The numerical data of SR15 is set so that becomes higher. In the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that “movable member operation A” is not selected.

  However, with respect to the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the For the 5th (current) change of the “5th”, a prohibition process (movable) prohibiting the selection of the advancement effect that is less reliable than the noticeable effect selected in the 4th (previous) change of the “pseudo-run 5” Member operation prohibition processing) is performed. For example, when “movable member operation C” is selected based on the fifth movable member operation determination table 301E for the fourth (previous) change of “pseudo sequence 5 times”, the fifth “pseudo sequence 5 times” is selected. In the (current) fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that the “movable member operation B” with low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of such a prohibition process of the movable member operation are as follows, for example. When selecting and determining the movable member operation as the advance notice pattern before executing the pseudo-variable display, the previous movable member operation data for specifying the determined movable member operation in response to the selection and determination of the movable member operation. Is stored (updated) in the previous movable member operation storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous notice pattern. Such data indicating the previous notice pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time the movable member operation is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo sequence. When the movable member operation is selected and determined for the second and subsequent fluctuations (revariations) in the quasi-ream, for example, an operation determination table such as the sixth movable member operation determination table 301F is used every time the movable member operation is selected and determined. For the presently selected movable member operation, which is the selected movable member operation, the previous movable member operation specified by the previous movable member operation data is compared with the reliability of the big hit. When the currently selected movable member motion is less reliable than the previous movable member motion, the previous movable member motion content is moved as it is in the current variation so that the movable member motion with lower reliability than the previous variation is not determined. Determined as member motion. On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected movable member operation is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous movable member operation, the currently selected movable member operation is determined as the movable member operation in the current variation. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the plurality of types of movable member operations, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability of the big hit, the higher the numerical value). The flag corresponding to the type of the movable member operation is set as data indicating the previous movable member operation. Then, the flag set as the previous movable member operation is compared with the flag corresponding to the movable member operation in the current variation, and the currently selected movable member operation and the previous movable member are based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical values of the flags. It is determined which is more reliable by operation.

  Next, the contents of the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G to the tenth movable member operation determination table 301J that are used when the fluctuation display result is out of order (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G to the tenth movable member operation determination table 301J.

  105, (A) to (D) show the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G to the tenth movable member operation determination table 301J. In each movable member operation determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR15 and the display content of the selected movable member operation (movable member operation in the figure) is shown.

  In the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, one of “movable member operation A” and “movable member operation B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15. Settings are made so that the movable member operation is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous”, either “movable member operation A” or “movable member operation B” is selected and selected. The movable member operation is performed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two quasi-continuations” that is out of reach, the movable member operation selected in this way is executed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio of selecting “movable member operation A” is higher than “movable member operation B”.

  In the eighth movable member motion determination table 301H of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, among the “movable member motion A” and “movable member motion B” Settings are made so that either one is selected. Accordingly, in the first and second fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of“ pseudo-continuous 3 times ”and the fluctuation pattern of“ pseudo-continuous 4 times ”,“ movable member operation A ”and One of the “movable member operations B” is selected, and the selected movable member operation is performed. In the eighth movable member operation determination table 301H, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio of the movable member operation is “movable member operation A”> “movable member operation B”. In the eighth movable member operation determination table 301H, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio of selecting “movable member operation B” is higher than that in the seventh movable member operation determination table 301G. In addition, in the eighth movable member operation determination table 301H, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the rate at which “movable member operation B” is selected is lower than that in the second movable member operation determination table 301B when the big hit is achieved. Is set.

  In the ninth movable member motion determination table 301I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, either “movable member motion A” or “movable member motion B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of three pseudo-reams” and the third variation and the fourth variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “movable member operation A”. And “movable member operation B” are selected, and the selected movable member operation is performed. In the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the movable member operation is selected is “movable member operation A”> “movable member operation B”. Further, in the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio at which “movable member operation B” is selected is higher than that in the eighth movable member operation determination table 301H. Further, in the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I, “movable member operation C” cannot be selected and “movable member operation A” can be selected as compared with the third movable member operation determination table 301C when the big hit. The numerical data of SR15 is set so that

  However, with respect to the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the More reliable than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) variation of “3 times of pseudo-ream” and “4 times of pseudo-ream” for the third (current) variation of “3 times” and “4 times of pseudo-ream” A prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of a notice effect with a low degree. For example, when “movable member motion B” is selected based on the eighth movable member motion determination table 301H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, In the third (current) change of “three consecutive times” and “four pseudo-continuous times”, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “movable member operation A” with low reliability is not selected. As such a prohibition process, the movable member operation prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the ninth movable member operation determination table 301I as compared with the notice effect produced previously.

  In the tenth movable member motion determination table 301J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR15, either “movable member motion A” or “movable member motion B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach, either “movable member operation A” or “movable member operation B” is selected, and “the selected movable member operation is performed. In the 10 movable member operation determination table 301J, the numerical data of SR15 is set so that the ratio of selecting “movable member operation A” is higher than “movable member operation B”.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the example which selects the production | presentation aspect performed from among the production | presentation aspect (movable member operation | movement AC) provided in multiple types was shown about movable member operation | movement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is only one kind of effect mode for the movable member operation, and when it is determined to execute the movable member notice, only the movable member operation of the one type of effect mode is executed. You may set as follows. In this way, when it is determined that only the movable member operation of one kind of effect mode is executed when it is determined to execute the movable member advance notice, for example, the greater the number of pseudo-series fluctuations, the more What is necessary is just to make it easy to select performing member operation.

  Further, regarding the movable member operation, when it is determined to execute the movable member notice based on the extracted value of the random number SR14, among the effects of the movable member selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR15, An option not to execute the movable member notice such as “no movable member operation” may be provided. For example, the ratio at which “no moving member operation” is selected may be reduced as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. In this way, it is clearly possible to vary the ratio of whether or not to execute the movable member notice according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations.

  In addition, in each movable member operation determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for determining the selection of the movable member operation may be set differently for each of the first to fifth variations. . By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  In addition, in the case where the third notice effect is to be executed and the notice pattern at the time of execution is selected and determined using one random value, there is no third notice effect for each variation pattern in FIG. The random number SR14 is set to the value of the random announcement value SR14 and the plurality of types of notice patterns, such as 1 notice pattern (with the third notice effect), second notice pattern (with the third notice effect),. Allotted to each, and based on the extracted value of the random value SR14, whether or not to execute the third notice effect, and the notice pattern at the time of execution may be selected and determined. In that case, the various tables shown in FIGS. 103 to 105 are not used. In such a case, the data table for selecting and determining whether or not the third notice effect is to be executed and the notice pattern at the time of execution using one random number value is used as the number of pseudo-variations (pseudo). There is no reaming, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times), and such a data table may be properly used according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. The fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C is a table referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the fourth notice effect. In the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C, the random number SR16 for determining the execution of the fourth notice effect is “no fourth notice effect” or “in accordance with the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command”. It is assigned to one of the “mini character notice”.

  In the setting of the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach deviation”, the reach deviation deviation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach deviation”, and the fluctuation display. The value of the random number SR16 corresponding to each selection item so that the allocation for each selection item of “No 4th notice effect” and “Mini character notice” is different from the big hit fluctuation pattern in which the result is “big hit” Is set.

  Specifically, in the setting of the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C, the mini character notice is selected for the big hit fluctuation pattern than for the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern. A large percentage. Thereby, when it is a big hit, the fourth notice effect is more easily performed than when it is a loss. For this reason, when the 4th notice production by a mini character notice is performed, a player's expectation about a big hit occurrence can be raised. Further, when the reach is lost, the fourth notice effect is more easily performed than when the non-reach is lost. For this reason, when the 4th notice production by a mini character notice is performed, a player's expectation about the occurrence of reach can be raised. In addition, the mini-character notice is set so that the proportion selected when it is out of date is much higher than other notice effects such as the aforementioned movable member notice. Note that the mini character notice may be set so that the selected ratio is equal to or lower than other notice effects such as the aforementioned movable member notice. In addition, since the mini character notice is performed using an image that is less visible than other images such as production symbols, it is more likely to be selected when it comes off, and other notices The reliability that is a big hit is considered to be significantly low.

  FIG. 106 shows an example in which there is only one type of target notice pattern type that can be selected as the fourth notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the notice pattern type that can be selected as the fourth notice effect may be two or more kinds.

  Further, in the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C shown in FIG. 106, for each of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, the reach deviation deviation pattern, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern, according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern, There may be different ratios for selecting and determining each of the fourth notice effect and the mini character notice (for example, the greater the number of pseudo-series fluctuations, the higher the ratio for selecting the mini character notice).

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after determining whether or not to execute the fourth notice effect.

  In FIG. 107, (A) shows a big hit mini character notice selection table. (B) shows a mini-character notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 107, (C) shows a non-reach off-time mini character notice selection table. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot mini character notice selection table shown in (A) is a mini character display decision to be used for determining a specific notice pattern when a mini character notice is decided as a notice pattern type when a big hit variation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting a table. In the big hit time mini character notice selection table, data is set to select a different mini character display determination table according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Has been.

  In the big hit mini character notice selection table shown in (A), specifically, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated or when a variation pattern of “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. First mini character display determination table 302A shown in FIG. 108 in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. The second mini character display determination table 302B shown in FIG. 108 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the third mini character display determination table 302C shown in FIG. 108 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change. The

  When the variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. The fourth mini character display determination table 302D shown in FIG. 108 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change), the fifth mini character display decision shown in FIG. A table 302E is selected. Then, the sixth mini character display determination table 302F shown in FIG. 108 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fifth change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach-out mini character notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a mini-character notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a reach-out change pattern is specified in which the change display result is “reach out”. FIG. 10 is a data table for selecting a mini character display determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. FIG. In the non-reach mini-character notice selection table, the data is selected so that a different mini-character display determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  In the out-of-reach mini-character notice selection table shown in (B), specifically, the mini-character display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. The seventh mini character display determination table 302G shown in FIG. 109 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. The eighth mini character display determination table 302H shown in FIG. 109 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected. Then, the ninth mini character display determination table 302I shown in FIG. 109 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change.

  The non-reach out-of-reach mini character notice selection table shown in (C) indicates that when a non-reach out-of-flight variation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach out of place” is designated, and the mini character notice is determined as the notice pattern type. This is a data table for selecting a mini character display determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off-time mini character notice selection table, a different mini character display determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set in

  In the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “two quasi-continuous” is designated, the mini character display determination table is selected as follows. The tenth mini character display determination table 302J shown in FIG. 109 is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change) and to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change). Is selected.

  In addition, each of the mini character notice selection table at the time of a big hit and the mini character notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach is a table (mini character display decision table) used for determining a notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change. An example is shown in which three or two tables are provided, and the tables are selectively used according to the presence / absence of a pseudo-continuous and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-continuous. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change and the second change, and the one table is pseudo-connected. The notice selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the presence / absence of and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit mini character notice selection table, the first mini character display determination table 302A, the second mini character display determination table 302B, and the fourth mini character display determination table 302D are shared.

  As for the big hit mini character notice selection table, two tables are provided as tables (mini character display decision table) used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third change and the fourth change, and the number of changes in the pseudo-ream The example which uses the table properly according to is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the third variation and the fourth variation are created, and the one table is used as the number of times of variation in the pseudo-series. The notice selection table may be set so that it can be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice selection table, whether the third mini character display determination table 302C and the fifth mini character display determination table 302E are shared by one table or not is determined depending on whether or not it is a big hit. Separate and share the table.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the mini character notice selection table, any of the first and second fluctuation mini character notice selection tables and the third and fourth fluctuation mini character notice selection tables. Either of these may be shared, and both the first and second fluctuation mini-character notice selection tables and the third and fourth fluctuation mini-character notice selection tables may be shared. Also good.

  In addition, for each of the fluctuations for the first to fifth rounds, for example, different data setting contents for the mini character notice selection table at the time of big hit, the mini character notice selection table at the time of non-reach, and the mini character notice selection table at the time of non-reach A mini character notice determination table may be provided.

  Next, the contents of the first mini character display determination table 302A to the sixth mini character display determination table 302F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mini character display determination table 302A to the sixth mini character display determination table 302F.

  108, first mini character display determination table 302A to sixth mini character display determination table 302F are shown in (A) to (F). In each mini character display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR17 and the selected mini character display effect contents (mini character display in the figure) is shown.

  In each mini character display determination table for determining the mini character display of the mini character notice shown in the following description, the data “mini character display A” is data indicating that the mini character display A of FIG. 76 (B1) is performed. Therefore, when mini character display data called mini character display A is selected, an effect of executing mini character display A is performed. In the mini character display determination table described below, the data “mini character display B” is data indicating that the mini character display B of FIG. 76 (B2) is performed. Therefore, when mini character display data called mini character display B is selected, an effect of executing mini character display B is performed. Further, the data “mini character display C” is data indicating that the mini character display C of FIG. 76 (B3) is performed. Therefore, when mini character display data called mini character display C is selected, an effect of executing mini character display C is performed.

  In the first mini character display determination table 302A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, “mini character display A”, “mini character display B”, and “mini character display C” based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. Is set so that one of them is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous” and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “mini character display A”, “mini character display B”, and “mini character display C” is selected. The selected mini character is displayed. In the first mini character display determination table 302A, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting the mini character display is “mini character display A”> “mini character display B”> “mini character display C”.

  In the second mini-character display determination table 302B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini-character display A” or “mini-character display B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “mini-character display A” and “mini-character display B” One of them is selected, and the selected mini character is displayed. In the second mini character display determination table 302B, the numerical data is basically set so that the selection ratio for mini character display is “mini character display A”> “mini character display B”.

  In the third mini character display determination table 302C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini character display B” or “mini character display C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to do so. Therefore, the “mini character display B” and the “mini character display” are used for the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” and the third and fourth variations in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”. "C" is selected, and the selected mini character is displayed. In the third mini character display determination table 302C, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio of selecting the mini character display is “mini character display B”> “mini character display C”. In the third mini character display determination table 302C, numerical data of SR17 is set so that “mini character display A” is not selected as compared with the second mini character display determination table 302B. As a result, the third mini character display determination table 302C does not have lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected previously. In other words, by selecting the mini character display using the third mini character display determination table 302C for the third change (this time) at the time of the big hit “3 times of quasi ream” and “4 times of quasi ream”, The prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “twice” is performed.

  In the fourth mini-character display determination table 302D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini-character display A” or “mini-character display B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the first and second fluctuations in the “five pseudo-five” fluctuation pattern, either “mini-character display A” or “mini-character display B” is selected, and the selected mini-character display is selected. Is done. In the fourth mini character display determination table 302D, the numerical data is basically set so that the selection ratio for mini character display is “mini character display A”> “mini character display B”. In the fourth mini character display determination table 302D, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting “mini character display B” is higher than that in the second mini character display determination table 302B.

  In the fifth mini-character display determination table 302E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, one of “mini-character display B” and “mini-character display C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the third and fourth fluctuations in the case of the “pseudo-continuous 5 times” fluctuation pattern, either “mini character display B” or “mini character display C” is selected, and the selected mini character display is selected. Is done. In the fifth mini character display determination table 302E, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio of selecting the mini character display is “mini character display B”> “mini character display C”. Also, in the fifth mini character display determination table 302E, numerical data of SR17 is set so that “mini character display C” is selected as compared with the fourth mini character display determination table 302D.

  Also, in the fifth mini character display determination table 302E, numerical data of SR17 is set so that “mini character display A” is not selected as compared with the fourth mini character display determination table 302D. As a result, the fifth mini character display determination table 302E is not less reliable than the previously selected notice effect, in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed. That is, for the third (this time) change of the big hit “5 pseudo-reams”, by selecting the mini character display using the fifth mini-character display determination table 302E, the second (previous) “5th pseudo-reams” The prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the change of is performed.

  In the sixth mini character display determination table 302F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini character display B” or “mini character display C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to do so. Therefore, in the fifth variation in the variation pattern of “five pseudo-reams”, either “mini character display B” or “mini character display C” is selected, and the selected mini character display is performed. In the sixth mini character display determination table 302F, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio of selecting the mini character display is “mini character display C”> “mini character display B”. Also, in the sixth mini character display determination table 302F, the ratio of selecting “mini character display B” is lower and the ratio of selecting “mini character display C” is higher than in the fifth mini character display determination table 302E. The numerical data of SR17 is set in In the sixth mini character display determination table 302F, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that “mini character display A” is not selected.

  However, with respect to the sixth mini character display determination table 302F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 5 For the 5th (current) fluctuation of “Time”, prohibition processing (mini character display) prohibits the selection of the announcement production with lower reliability than the notice production selected in the 4th (previous) fluctuation of “Pseudo 5 times” Forbidden processing). For example, when “mini character display C” is selected based on the fifth mini character display determination table 302E for the fourth (previous) change of “five pseudo trains”, the fifth (pseudo train 5 times) (this time) ), A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “mini character display B” with low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition process of such mini character display are, for example, as follows. When the mini character display as the notice pattern is selected and decided before the pseudo-variable display is executed, the previous mini character display data for identifying the decided mini character display is selected according to the selection of the mini character display. Data indicating the pattern is stored (updated) in the previous mini character display storage area of the RAM. Data indicating the previous notice pattern in the RAM is updated and stored every time the mini character display is selected and determined for each variation in the pseudo-ream. When the mini character display is selected and determined for the second or later change (re-change) in the pseudo-ream, each time the mini character display is selected and determined, for example, it is selected using an action determination table such as the sixth mini character display determination table 302F. Compared to the previous mini character display specified by the previous mini character display data, the reliability of the big hit is compared for the current selected mini character display which is the mini character display. When the selected mini character display is lower in reliability than the previous mini character display, the content of the previous mini character display is determined as the mini character display in the current change so that the mini character display with lower reliability than the previous change is not determined. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected mini character display is higher than the reliability of the previous mini character display, the currently selected mini character display is determined as the mini character display in the current variation. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the various types of mini character displays, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the larger the numerical value). The flag corresponding to the type of mini character display is set as data indicating the previous mini character display. Then, the flag set as the previous mini character display is compared with the flag corresponding to the mini character display in this change, and based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical value of the flag, which is the current selection mini character display or the previous mini character display Judge whether reliability is high.

  Next, the contents of the seventh mini-character display determination table 302G to the tenth mini-character display determination table used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out-of-reach and non-reach out-of-reach) will be described. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventh mini character display determination table 302G to the tenth mini character display determination table 302J.

  109, (A) to (D) show a seventh mini character display determination table 302G to a tenth mini character display determination table 302J. In each mini character display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR17 and the display content of the selected mini character display (mini character display in the figure) is shown.

  In the seventh mini character display determination table 302G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, the mini character display of “mini character display A” or “mini character display B” is displayed based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, either “mini character display A” or “mini character display B” is selected and selected. Mini character display is performed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” that is out of reach, the mini-character display selected in this way is executed in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. In the seventh mini character display determination table 302G, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting “mini character display A” is higher than “mini character display B”.

  In the eighth mini-character display determination table 302H of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini-character display A” or “mini-character display B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reason 3 pseudo-ream” out of reach and the first and second fluctuations of the variation pattern “quasi-ream 4 times”, “mini character display A” and “ One of the “mini character display B” is selected, and the selected mini character display is performed. In the eighth mini character display determination table 302H, the numerical data is basically set so that the selection ratio for mini character display is “mini character display A”> “mini character display B”. In the eighth mini character display determination table 302H, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of “mini character display B” is higher than that in the seventh mini character display determination table 302G. Also, in the eighth mini character display determination table 302H, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting “mini character display B” is lower than that of the second mini character display determination table 302B in the case of a big hit. Yes.

  In the ninth mini-character display determination table 302I in (C), either “mini-character display A” or “mini-character display B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17, as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17. It is set to do so. Therefore, in the third variation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reverse three times of pseudo-ream” and the third and fourth variations in the case of the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous four times”, “mini character display A” is obtained. One of “mini character display B” is selected, and the selected mini character display is performed. In the ninth mini character display determination table 302I, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio of selecting the mini character display is “mini character display A”> “mini character display B”. Also, in the ninth mini character display determination table 302I, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting “mini character display B” is higher than that in the eighth mini character display determination table 302H. Further, in the ninth mini character display determination table 302I, “mini character display C” cannot be selected and “mini character display A” can be selected as compared with the third mini character display determination table 302C when the big hit is made. Numerical data of SR17 is set.

  However, with respect to the ninth mini character display determination table 302I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 The 3rd (current) fluctuation in “Time” and “4th pseudo-run” is more reliable than the notice effect selected in the 2nd (previous) change in “3rd pseudo-run” and “4th pseudo-run” A prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice effect with a low is performed. For example, when “mini character display B” is selected based on the eighth mini character display determination table 302H for the second (previous) change of “pseudo train 3 times” and “pseudo train 4 times”, “pseudo train 3 In the third (this time) change of “times” and “four pseudo-reams”, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “mini character display A” with low reliability is not selected. As such prohibition processing, the mini character display prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth mini character display determination table 302I. As a result, the ninth mini character display determination table 302I is not less reliable than the previously selected notice effect, in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed.

  In the tenth mini character display determination table 302J of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR17, either “mini character display A” or “mini character display B” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17. It is set to be. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” that is out of reach, either “mini character display A” or “mini character display B” is selected, and “the selected mini character display is performed. In the determination table 302J, the numerical data of SR17 is set so that the ratio of selecting “mini character display A” is higher than “mini character display B”.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the example which selects the production | generation aspect performed from the production | generation aspect (mini character display AC) provided in multiple types about the mini character display was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the mini character display, there is one type of effect mode, and when it is decided to execute the mini character notice, only the mini character display of the one type of effect mode is executed. May be.

  In addition, regarding the mini character display, “mini character display” is included among the effects of mini character display selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR17 when it is decided to execute the mini character notice based on the extracted value of the random number SR16. An option of not performing “mini-character display” such as “no display” may be provided, and the ratio of selecting “no mini-character display” may be varied in accordance with the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations. For example, the ratio at which “no mini character display” is selected may be set to decrease as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. In this way, it is possible to clearly vary the ratio of whether or not to execute the mini character notice according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

  Further, in each mini character display determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for determining the selection of the mini character display may be set different for each of the first to fifth changes. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  In the case where the fourth notice effect is to be executed and the notice pattern at the time of execution is selected and determined using one random number value, no fourth notice effect is provided for each variation pattern in FIG. The random number SR16 is set to the value of the random announcement value SR16 without the fourth notice effect and a plurality of kinds of notice patterns, such as 1 notice pattern (with the fourth notice effect), second notice pattern (with the fourth notice effect),. Allotted to each, and based on the extracted value of the random value SR16, whether or not to execute the fourth notice effect, and the notice pattern at the time of execution may be selected and determined. In that case, the various tables shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 are not used. In such a case, the data table for selecting and determining whether or not the fourth notice effect is to be executed, and using one random number value as the notice pattern when the fourth notice effect is to be executed, is used. There is no reaming, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times), and such a data table may be properly used according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D is a table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the fifth notice effect. In the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D, the random number SR18 for determining the execution of the fifth notice effect is “No fifth notice effect” or “No” according to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command. Allotted to one of the group notices.

  In the setting of the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D, the fifth notice effect is defined as a reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out of reach” and a big hit change pattern in which the change display result is “big hit”. The value of the random number SR18 corresponding to each selection item is set so that the allocation of the selection items “none” and “group notice” is different. The group notice as the fifth notice effect is a notice effect executed after reaching the reach state, and therefore is not selected when the variable display result is out of reach.

  In the setting of the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D, specifically, the ratio of selecting the group notice is larger in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern than in the case of the reach deviation fluctuation pattern. Thereby, when it is a big hit, the fifth notice effect is more easily performed than when it is a loss. For this reason, when the 5th notice production by group notice is performed, a player's expectation about big hit occurrence can be raised.

  Note that FIG. 110 shows an example in which there is only one type of target notice pattern type that can be selected as the fifth notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the notice pattern type that can be selected as the fifth notice effect may be two or more kinds.

  In addition, in the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D shown in FIG. 110, for each of the reach deviation variation pattern and the jackpot change pattern, there is no fifth notice effect according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the change pattern. In addition, the ratio at which each group notice is selected and determined may be different (for example, the ratio at which the group notice is selected is increased as the number of pseudo-variable changes is larger).

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after determining whether or not to execute the fifth notice effect.

  In FIG. 111, (A) shows a big hit time group notice selection table. (B) shows a reach failure time group notice selection table. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot group notice selection table shown in (A) is a group display decision used for determining a specific notice pattern when a group notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a big hit variation pattern is designated. It is a data table for selecting a table. In the big hit time group notice selection table, data is set so that different group display determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Has been.

  Specifically, in the big hit time group notice selection table shown in (A), the group display determination table is selected as follows. When a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, or when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the first group display determination table 303A shown in FIG. Is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the second group display determination table 303B shown in FIG. 112 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations” is designated, the third group display determination table 303C shown in FIG. 112 is selected.

  The reach failure group notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a group notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach break” is designated. FIG. 10 is a data table for selecting a group display determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. FIG. In the out-of-reach group notice selection table, data is selected so that a different group display determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  In the out-of-reach group notice selection table shown in (B), specifically, the group display determination table is selected as follows. When the variation pattern “no pseudo-continuous” is designated, or when the variation pattern “two pseudo-continuous” is designated, the fourth group display determination table 303D shown in FIG. 112 is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated or when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” is designated, the fifth group display determination table 303E shown in FIG. 112 is selected.

  Next, the contents of the first group display determination table 303A to the fifth group display determination table 303E will be described. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the first group display determination table 303A to the fifth group display determination table 303E.

  112, (A) to (E) show a first group display determination table 303A to a fifth group display determination table 303E. In each group display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR19 and the contents of the selected group display effect (group display in the figure) is shown.

  In each group display determination table for determining the group display of the group notice shown in the following description, the data “group display A” is data indicating that the group display A described above is performed. When group display data called group display A is selected, an effect of executing group display A is performed. In the group display determination table described below, data “group display B” indicates that the above-described group display B in which the number of character images 94 to be displayed in the group preview is larger than the group display A is performed. It is data. When group display data called group display B is selected, an effect of executing group display B is performed. The data “group display C” is data indicating that the group display C in which the number of character images 94 to be displayed in the group preview is larger than the group display B is performed. When group display data called group display C is selected, an effect of executing group display C is performed.

  In the first group display determination table 303A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR19, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR19. Is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” when the big hit and the variation pattern of “pseudo-ream twice”, the “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” Any one is selected, and the selected group is displayed. In the first group display determination table 303A, the numerical data of SR19 is set so that the group display selection ratio is “group display A” <“group display B” <“group display C”.

  In the second group display determination table 303B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR19, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR19. Is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times” in the case of big hit, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” Is selected, and the selected group is displayed. In the second group display determination table 303B, the numerical data of SR19 is set so that “group display A” <“group display B” <“group display C”. Further, in the second group display determination table 303B, the ratio of selecting “group display C” and “group display B” is higher than in the first group display determination table 303A. The numerical data of SR19 is set so that the selected ratio is low. Therefore, in the case of the big hit, the “group display C” and the “group display B” are more in the group notice than in the “no pseudo-continuous” variation pattern when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice”. It is easy to be done.

  In the third group display determination table 303C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR19, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR19. Is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “pseudo-ream 5 times” at the time of a big hit, one of “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” is selected, and the selected group display Is done. In the third group display determination table 303C, the numerical data of SR19 is set so that “group display A” <“group display B” <“group display C”. Also, in the third group display determination table 303C, the ratio of “group display C” being selected is higher than in the second group display determination table 303B, and each of “group display A” and “group display B” is The numerical data of SR19 is set so that the selected ratio is low. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times” is changed, the variation pattern of “pseudo-ream 3 times” and the variation pattern of “pseudo-ream 4 times” are compared in the group notice. “Group display C” is easily performed.

  In the fourth group display determination table 303D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR19, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR19. Is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” when the reach is lost and the fluctuation pattern of “two quasi-continuous”, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” Is selected, and the selected group is displayed. In the fourth group display determination table 303D, the numerical data is set so that the selected ratio for group display is “group display A”> “group display B”> “group display C”. In the fourth group display determination table 303D, the ratio of “group display A” being selected is higher than in the first group display determination table 303A in the case of a big hit, and “group display C” and “group display B” are selected. The numerical data of SR19 is set so that the ratio of selecting each of these is low. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous”, the “group display C” and the “group display B” are more easily performed in the group notice in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss of reach, “Group display A” is difficult to be performed.

  In the fifth group display determination table 303E in (E), “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” based on the extracted value of the random number SR19, as shown in the numerical value setting of SR19. Is set to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” when the reach is lost and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “group display A”, “group display B”, and “group display C” "Is selected, and the selected group is displayed. In the fifth group display determination table 303E, the numerical data is set so that the selected ratio regarding the group display is “group display A”> “group display B”> “group display C”. In the fifth group display determination table 303E, the ratio of selecting “group display C” and “group display B” is higher than in the fourth group display determination table 303D, and “group display A” is selected. The numerical value data of SR19 is set so that the ratio is lower. Therefore, when the reach is out of alignment, the “group display C” and “group display B” in the group notice in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” are different from those in the variation pattern of “no pseudo-continuous”. Is easy to be done. Further, in the fifth group display determination table 303E, the ratio of selecting “group display C” is lower than that in the second group display determination table 303B when the big hit is made, and “group display A” is selected. The numerical data of SR19 is set so that the ratio is high. Therefore, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, the “group display C” is more easily performed in the group notice in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss of reach. Is hard to be done.

  In the case where the fifth notice effect is to be executed and the notice pattern at the time of execution is selected and determined using one random value, the fifth notice effect is not provided for each variation pattern in FIG. The random number SR18 is set to the value of the random announcement value SR18 and the plurality of types of notice patterns, such as 1 notice pattern (with the fifth notice effect), second notice pattern (with the fifth notice effect),. Allotted to each, and based on the extracted value of the random value SR18, whether or not to execute the fifth notice effect, and the notice pattern at the time of execution may be selected and determined. In that case, the various tables shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 are not used. In such a case, the data table for selecting and determining whether or not the fifth notice effect is to be executed using one random number value is used as the fifth notice effect. There is no connection, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times), and such a data table may be used properly depending on whether it is a big hit or not and the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation of the production symbol and the decoration symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Jackpot display processing (S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability change promotion effect, a probability change promotion effect is executed when the probability change promotion effect executing flag indicating execution of the probability change promotion effect is set. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  115 and 116 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern includes a pseudo-continuous effect based on the received variation pattern command (S500a). In the case of including a pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determining process for determining a temporary stop symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed during the pseudo-continuous effect (S500b). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control shows a random number SR4-1 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change shown in FIG. 56, a random number SR4-2 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of pseudo second change, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, temporary stop symbols for each variation are determined using temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A, 167B, and 164C shown in FIG.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 selects the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 30 if the total reserved memory number is 0 to 3, and the total reserved memory number is any of 4 to 8. For example, the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 31 is selected. It should be noted that the total pending storage number can be specifically specified by a total pending storage number designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination random number SR7. Then, based on the value of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination random number SR7, the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is referred to, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (S500c).

  The process of S500c is a re-variation effect selection process for selecting the first re-change effect or the second re-change effect as the re-change effect, or the first re-change effect and the second re-change effect as the re-change effect. Alternatively, a re-variation effect selection process for selecting a third re-variation effect in which the first re-change effect and the second re-change effect are combined is included.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not become reach (S504). In the process of S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 57 (A) is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 57 (B) is selected as the use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 58 based on the combination of the left final stop design FZ1-1 and the right final stop design FZ1-2, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 57 (C) is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of S504, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, by determining the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3, the effect symbol Don't use a stop combination or a jackpot combination. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 14 or a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S505). In the process of S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 60A is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect design to be the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 60B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 become the production symbols and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3. The design difference from the production design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the process of S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A to “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The right and left final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When it is not determined to be off (S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined suddenly (S507). Whether or not it has been determined suddenly is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command (see FIG. 32) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it has been determined with certainty, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (S508). As shown in FIG. 16, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 are all variation patterns in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in the process of S508 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-4, the process proceeds to S504, and the effect control CPU 101 becomes the final stop symbol in the process of S504. Determine the design.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 pattern, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S505.

  If it has not been determined with certainty (S507), the final stop symbol of the effect symbol of the jackpot combination is determined (S511). In the process of S511, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. When it is determined to make a big hit, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 61B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the combination of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that will be the big hit symbol is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A. Determine as a stop symbol. In addition, when it is decided to make a probable big hit, a stop symbol that generally reminds of a non-probable big hit such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the left middle right definite effect symbols. May be derived and displayed (see FIG. 61A), but in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, determination values are not assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. Then, when it is determined to be a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” may not be selected. Also, when it is decided to win a probable big hit, when “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” can be selected as the final left / right determined effect symbols, etc. In addition, by executing a so-called probability change promotion effect, the left middle right determined effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 may be changed to “7” or the like. It should be noted that in a gaming machine that does not report on the probability variation state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state (whether or not the probability variation state) by the confirmed effect symbol. May be.

  After executing any of the processes of S504, S505, and S511, or after becoming “N” in the process of S508, the CPU 101 for effect control executes a notice setting process (S516a), and then sets a specific effect. The process is executed (S516).

  117 and 118 are flowcharts showing the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines and sets the first advance notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. 78 as a table to be used (S531). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted (S532). Then, referring to the notice pattern type determination table, any one of the first notice effect, the button notice, and the first step-up notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in S532 according to the variation pattern. The notice pattern type is determined and stored by selecting (S533).

  Next, in S533, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the first step notice as the first notice effect (S5330). When it is determined that it is determined to execute the first step advance notice, the step up notice content determination table shown in FIG. 79 is determined and set (S5331). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR20 for determining the first step-up notice content is extracted (S5332). Then, referring to the step-up notice content determination table, depending on the variation pattern, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR20 extracted in S5332, any one of the basic advance notice, reach branch notice, and button branch notice is selected. By selecting, the type of the notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined and stored (S533).

  Next, the second notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200A shown in FIG. 98 is decided and set as a table to be used (S533a). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR12 for determining execution of the second notice effect is extracted (S533b). Then, with reference to the second notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200A, either the second notice effect is not provided or the second step-up notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR12 according to the variation pattern. By selecting, it is determined whether or not to execute the second step-up notice of the second notice effect and stored (S533c).

  Next, the third notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200B shown in FIG. 102 is decided and set as a table to be used (S533d). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR14 for determining execution of the third notice effect is extracted (S533e). Then, referring to the third notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200B, either the third notice effect is not selected or the movable member notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR14 according to the variation pattern. Thus, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable member notice of the third notice effect and stored (S533f).

  Next, the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200C shown in FIG. 106 is decided and set as a table to be used (S533g). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR16 for determining execution of the fourth notice effect is extracted (S533h). Then, with reference to the fourth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200C, one of the fourth notice effect and no mini character notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR16 according to the variation pattern. Thus, it is determined whether or not to execute the mini-character notice of the fourth notice effect and stored (S533i).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display result is a big hit or a reach loss ((S533j). Specifically, whether or not the big display is a big hit is determined in the display result specific command storage area by the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3). It is determined by checking whether or not a command that specifies a big hit such as a specified command is stored, and whether or not the reach is lost is stored in the display result specific command storage area. It is determined by confirming whether or not a command corresponding to the reach variation pattern has been received as the variation pattern command, whether or not to make a big hit and reach with the variation pattern command. Is specified, whether the fluctuation display result in S533j is a big hit or a reach loss In S533j, if it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit or reach is lost, it is determined whether or not the fifth notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S533j that the variation display result does not result in a big hit or reach, the process proceeds to S534 in order to determine whether or not the fifth notice effect is performed. The reason for not determining whether or not the fifth notice effect is performed when it is determined that the display result does not result in a big hit or reach is the notice effect that is executed after the group notice becomes the reach state, and does not reach the reach state. In this case, the execution condition of the group notice that is the notice effect is not satisfied.

  When the process proceeds to S533k, the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution decision table 200D shown in FIG. 110 is decided and set as a table to be used (S533k). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR18 for determining execution of the fifth notice effect is extracted (S533l). Then, with reference to the fifth notice effect notice pattern execution determination table 200D, one of the fifth notice effect and the group notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR18 according to the variation pattern. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to execute the group notice of the fifth notice effect and stored (S533m). Then, the process proceeds to S534.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S534, it is determined whether or not it is determined that there is no first notice effect in the determination of S533 (S534). If it is determined in S533 that there is no first notice effect (Y in S534), the process proceeds to S543 described later. On the other hand, if the notice pattern type is determined to be one of the button notice and the first step-up notice in S533 (N in S534), the first notice effect is executed to determine the content of the first notice effect to be executed. The process proceeds to one notice effect determination process (S535), and then proceeds to S539.

  Here, after describing the processing contents of the first notice effect determination process first, the contents after S539 of the notice setting process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the first notice effect determination process.

  Referring to FIG. 119, in S533 described above, it is determined whether or not the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined to be a button notice (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the button is not in advance, the process proceeds to S1706 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1701 that the button notification is made, the notification pattern of the button notification effect is determined in S1702 to S1705. First, as described with reference to FIG. 80, according to the information of the determined notice pattern type and the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, reach out, non-reach out) As the selection table, one of the button notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C is selected and set (S1702).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, 2 pseudo sequences, 3 pseudo sequences, 4 pseudo sequences, or 5 pseudo sequences. Using the notice selection table determined and determined in SS1702, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuous, two quasi-continuous, three quasi-continuous, four quasi-continuous, five quasi-continuous) The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (a single table, three pseudo-series and Two tables are selected and set when there are four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are selected when there are five pseudo-continuations (S1703). Specifically, in S1703, the notification message determination table for button notification is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to third times, when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the notice message determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR8 for determining the notice message is extracted (S1704).

  Next, based on the random value extracted in S1704, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S1703. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S1705). Then, the first notice effect determination process ends. In S1705, for the button notice, the notice message is determined by selecting the notice message of the required fluctuation times among the fluctuations of the first to fifth fluctuations before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started as described above. Select and decide in order by table. In the determination of the notice pattern in S1705, the prohibition process as described above (notice message prohibition process) is performed so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of fluctuations progresses. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  In S1706, it is determined whether or not the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice has been determined as the basic development notice in S533 described above (S1706). If it is determined in S1706 that it is not a basic advance notice, the process proceeds to S1711 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1706 that the basic advance notice is given, the notice pattern of the basic advance notice effect is determined in S1707 to S1710. First, as described with reference to FIG. 80, according to the information of the determined notice pattern type and the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, reach out, non-reach out) As the selection table, any one of the basic development notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 81A to 81C is selected and set (S1707).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Judging and using the notice selection table determined in SS1707, the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations) The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (one table, three pseudo-series and no pseudo-series and two pseudo-series Two tables are selected and set in the case of four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are set in the case of five pseudo-continuations (S1708). Specifically, in S1708, the advance step determination table for basic advance notice is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to the third time, and when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the notice step determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR9 for determining the notice step is extracted (S1709).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S1709, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S1708. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S1710). Then, the first notice effect determination process ends. In step S1710, for the basic advance notice, the notice step in which the notice step of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-ream is started. Select and decide in turn by the decision table. In the determination of the notice pattern in S1710, the prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  In S1711, it is determined in S533 described above whether the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice has been determined to be reach branch notice (S1711). If it is determined in S1711 that it is not a reach branch notice, the process proceeds to S1716 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1711 that it is a reach branch notice, a notice pattern of reach branch notice effect is determined in S1712 to S1715. First, as described with reference to FIG. 91, the advance notice pattern type information and the display result information specified based on the fluctuation pattern (big hit, reach miss, non-reach miss) As the selection table, one of the reach branch notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 91A to 91C is selected and set (S1712).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, 2 pseudo sequences, 3 pseudo sequences, 4 pseudo sequences, or 5 pseudo sequences. Using the notice selection table determined and determined in SS1712, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations) The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (a single table, three pseudo-series and Two tables are selected and set in the case of four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are set in the case of five pseudo-continuations (S1713). Specifically, in S1713, the advance branch determination notice step determination table is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to the third time, and when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the notice step determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number SR21 for determining the notice step is extracted (S1714).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S1714, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S1713. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S1715). Then, the first notice effect determination process ends. In step S1715, for reach branch notice, the notice step in which the notice step of the necessary fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. Select and decide in turn using the decision table. In the determination of the notice pattern in S1715, the prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1716 when the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined to be button branch notice. In S1716, as described with reference to FIG. 94, according to the information of the determined notice pattern type and the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, no reach, no reach), One of the button branch notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 94A to 94C is selected and set as the notice selection table (S1716).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Using the notice selection table determined and determined in SS1716, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations) The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (one table, three pseudo-series and no pseudo-series and two pseudo-series Two tables are selected and set when there are four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are selected when there are five pseudo-continuations (S1717). Specifically, in S1717, the notice step decision table for button branch notice is selected and decided as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to the third time, and when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the notice step determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR21 for determining the notice step is extracted according to the kind of notice (S1718).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S1718, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S1717. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S1719). Then, the process proceeds to S17190. In S1719, for the button branch notice, the notice step in which the notice step of the necessary fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. Select and decide in turn by the decision table. In the determination of the notice pattern in S1719, the prohibition process as described above (notice step prohibition process) is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S17190, it is determined whether or not the notice pattern determined in S1719 includes a notice button “branch button” (S17190). If it is determined in S17190 that there is no “button branch” notice step, the first notice effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S17190 that there is a “button branch” notice step, as described with reference to FIG. 97A, the post-button branch notice content selection table shown in FIG. 97A is set. (S1720).

  Then, in S1721, the following processing is performed. Referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to any variation pattern of no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, or five pseudo-continuous At the same time, based on the notice pattern of each variable time determined in S1719a, it is determined at which variable times it is determined to be “button branch”. Further, using the post-button branch notice content selection table set in S1720, the variation pattern determined as described above (no quasi-continuation, quasi-continuation 2 times, quasi-continuation 3 times, quasi-continuation 4 times, quasi-continuation 5 times) Based on the information and the information of the variable times that become “button branch” determined as described above, the notice content that determines the notice content that needs to be displayed according to the button operation when “button branch” is performed A decision table is determined from the above three tables and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value SR23 for determining the notice content after button branching is extracted (S1722).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S1722, the notice content determination table set in S1721 uses the notice contents after button branching at the required change times among the first to third changes. The “button branching” is determined and stored in accordance with the order of the changing times to execute (S1723). Then, the first notice effect determination process ends. In the determination of the notice content in S1723, the prohibition process (preliminary content prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in a manner that decreases in accordance with the order of the fluctuation times. It is. More specifically, among the 1st to 5th changes, the required contents of the required change times are determined according to the order of the change times. The data of the previous notice content indicating the decided notice content is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice content of the next variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the advance notice content, the advance notice content is not selected in such a manner that the reliability of the big hit decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses.

  Next, the continuation of the notice setting process will be described with reference to FIG. After the end of the first notice effect determination process, as described with reference to FIG. 86, information on the decided notice pattern type and display result information (hit and miss) specified based on the variation pattern are used. Accordingly, any of the notice reliability selection tables shown in FIGS. 86A to 86D is selected and set as the notice reliability selection table (S539). Although not shown, when the notice effect is not performed, such as when “no notice” is determined in the first step-up notice, the notice reliability is not displayed, and the processes of S539 to S542 described later are performed. Without executing, the process proceeds to S543. Even when the notice effect is not performed, the processing of S539 to S542 may be executed to display the notice reliability.

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Judging and using the notice reliability selection table determined in S539, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuation, quasi-continuation 2 times, quasi-continuation 3 times, quasi-continuation 4 times, quasi-continuation 5 times) A data table used to determine each notice reliability display pattern at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations required for the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern (one table for the case of no quasi-continuation and two quasi-continuations) Two tables are selected and set in the case of the pseudo-continuous 3 times and the pseudo-continuous 4 times, and three tables are selected and set in the case of the pseudo-continuous 5 times (S540) Specifically, in S540, when the button notice is selected, Color reliability display When the first step-up notice is selected (when the basic development notice, reach branch notice, or button branch notice is selected), the pattern reliability display decision table is selected as described above. In other words, if there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, first and second times if the pseudo-ream 2 times, first to third time if the pseudo-ream 3 times, 1 if the pseudo-ream 4 times In the case of the 4th time to the 4th time and the 5th pseudo-continuation, the color reliability display determination table or the pattern reliability display determination table used for the first to 5th change is selected and set, and depending on the type of the notice Then, numerical data indicating the random number value SR10 for determining the color reliability display or numerical data indicating the random value SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is extracted (S541).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S541, among the first to fifth fluctuations, one, two, or three notice reliability display patterns for the required fluctuation times are set in S540. Using each data table of the data table, it is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times and stored (S542). Then, the process proceeds to S543. In S542, when the button notice is selected, the color reliability display pattern of the required fluctuation times is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. When the first step-up notice is selected, the required variation number of the first to fifth variations is started before the variable display in the quasi-ream is started. The pattern reliability display patterns are sequentially selected and determined by the pattern reliability display determination table selected as described above. In the determination of the notice reliability display pattern in S542, the prohibition process as described above (color reliability prohibition process or color reliability prohibition process or Pattern reliability prohibition processing) is performed. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required reliability notification pattern of the variable times is determined according to the order of the variable times, but the warning reliability display pattern of each variable time is determined. Each time, the data of the previous reliability display pattern indicating the determined advance notice reliability display pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and the prohibition process when determining the advance notice reliability display pattern of the next fluctuation times Used for. Thereby, in the determination of the notice reliability display pattern, the notice reliability display pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses.

  When the process proceeds to S543, it is determined based on the data stored in S533c whether or not it has been determined in S533c that there is no second notice effect (second step-up notice) (S543). When it is determined that there is no second notice effect, the process proceeds to S548 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is the second notice effect, as described with reference to FIG. 99, the notice is given according to the information of the display result specified on the basis of the variation pattern (big hit, no reach, no reach). As the selection table, any of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 99A to 99C is selected and set (S544).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Using the notice selection table determined and determined in S544, the variation pattern to be executed according to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations). The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (one table, three pseudo-series and no pseudo-series and two pseudo-series Two tables are selected when there are four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are selected when there are five pseudo-continuations (S545). Specifically, in S545, the notice step determination table is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to the third time, and when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the notice step determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR13 for determining the second notice step is extracted (S546).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S546, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S545. Each data table is used to determine and store in accordance with the order of fluctuation times (S547), and the process proceeds to S548 described later. In S547, before the change display in the quasi-ream is started, among the first to fifth changes, the required change notification steps are sequentially performed according to the notification step determination table selected as described above. Before selecting and determining the fluctuation display in the pseudo-ream, the notice step of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is sequentially performed according to the notice step decision table selected as described above. Select and decide. In the determination of the notice pattern in S547, the prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S548, it is determined whether or not it is determined that there is no third notice effect in the determination of S533f (S548). If it is determined in S533f that there is no third notice effect (Y in S548), the process proceeds to S553 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a third notice effect (N in S548), as described with reference to FIG. Accordingly, any one of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 103A to 103C is selected and set as the notice selection table (S549).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Using the notice selection table determined and determined in S549, the variation pattern is executed according to the variation pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuous, two quasi-continuous, three quasi-continuous, four quasi-continuous, five quasi-continuous). The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (one table, three pseudo-series and no pseudo-series and two pseudo-series Two tables are selected and set when there are four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are selected when there are five pseudo-continuations (S550). Specifically, in S550, the movable member operation determination table is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to the third time, and when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the movable member operation determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR15 for determining the movable member operation for the movable member notice is extracted (S551).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S551, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S550. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S552). In S552, the movable member operation determination table in which the movable member advance notice operation of the required fluctuation times among the fluctuations of the first to fifth fluctuations is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. Select and determine in order. In the determination of the notice pattern in S552, the prohibition process (movable member operation prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses. It progresses to S553 after S552.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S553, it is determined whether or not it is determined in S533i that there is no fourth notice effect (S553). If it is determined in S533f that there is no fourth notice effect (Y in S553), the process proceeds to S558 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fourth notice effect is present (N in S553), as described with reference to FIG. 106, information on the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, no reach, no reach) Accordingly, any one of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 106A to 106C is selected and set as the notice selection table (S554).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, 2 pseudo sequences, 3 pseudo sequences, 4 pseudo sequences, or 5 pseudo sequences. Using the notice selection table determined and determined in S554, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuous, two quasi-continuous, three quasi-continuous, four quasi-continuous, five quasi-continuous) The data table used to determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations necessary for the fluctuation display in (a single table, three pseudo-series and Two tables are selected when there are four pseudo-continuations, and three tables are selected when there are five pseudo-continuations (S555). Specifically, in S555, the mini character display determination table is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no pseudo-ream, only the first time, when the pseudo-ream 2 times, the first and second times, when the pseudo-ream 3 times, the first to third times, when the pseudo-ream 4 times, the first time to the fourth time In the case of five pseudo-continuations, the mini character display determination table used for the first to fifth changes is selected and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR17 for determining the mini character display of the mini character notice is extracted (S556).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S556, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S555. Each data table is used for determination according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S557). In S557, before the variable display in the pseudo-ream starts, the mini character display of the required variable times among the first to fifth fluctuations is sequentially performed according to the mini character display determination table selected as described above. Select and decide. In the determination of the notice pattern in S557, the prohibition process (mini-character display prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuations proceeds. More specifically, among the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuation times is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but each time the warning pattern of each fluctuation time is decided The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the notice pattern for the next variable number of times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses. After S557, the process proceeds to S558. Note that, as described above, the mini character notice has a lower reliability than the other notice effects, so that the player generally does not tend to pay much attention to the mini character image. Therefore, in S557, the mini character display prohibition process may not be performed.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S558, it is determined whether or not it is determined in the determination of S533m that there is no fifth notice effect (S558). If it is determined in S533m that there is no fifth notice effect (Y in S558), the notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fifth notice effect is present (N in S558), as described with reference to FIG. 110, according to the display result information (big hit, reach out) specified based on the variation pattern, As the notice selection table, one of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B is selected and set (S559).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series Using the notice selection table determined and determined in S559, the variation pattern is executed according to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations). The data table used for determining the notice pattern required for the variable display after the reach state is selected and set (S560). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR19 for determining the group display of the group notice is extracted (S561).

  Next, based on the random value extracted in S561, the notice pattern after the reach state is determined and stored using the data table set in S560 (S562). After S562, the notice setting process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the color reliability is always displayed when the button is notified, and the pattern reliability is always displayed when the first step-up notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color reliability display may not be performed at a predetermined ratio when the button notification is performed. Also, the pattern reliability display may not be performed at a predetermined rate when the first step-up notice is given.

  In the notice setting process, the following process may be performed. Immediately after the determination of the presence / absence and type of execution related to the first notice effect in S533, processing such as determination of the notice content related to the first notice effect after S544 may be executed. Immediately after the determination on whether or not to execute the second notice effect is made in S533c, the process of determining the notice content related to the second notice effect after S543 may be executed. Immediately after the determination of whether or not to execute the third notice effect is made in S533f, processing such as determination of the notice content related to the third notice effect after S548 may be executed. Immediately after the determination of whether or not to execute the fourth notice effect in S533i, processing such as determining the contents of the notice regarding the fourth notice effect after S553 may be executed. Immediately after the determination of whether or not to execute the fifth notice effect is made in S533m, processing such as determination of the notice content related to the fifth notice effect after S558 may be executed. In this way, there is no need to hold data relating to the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect unnecessarily for a long period of time, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for control problems to occur due to garbled data of the held data.

  117 and 118, a series of pseudo-reams as shown in S535 (S1701 to S1723 in FIG. 113), S544 to S547, S549 to S552, S554 to S557, and S559 to S562. Prior to the start of the variable display, all of the change patterns (button notice, first step up notice, second step up notice, movable member notice, mini character notice, and group notice notice) are all determined individually. As a result, the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 during the variable display can be reduced. In addition, according to the notice setting process of FIGS. 117 and 118, as shown in S539 to S542, the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display) of each change time is started before the start of a series of change displays that are pseudo-continuous. By individually determining all the patterns or pattern reliability display patterns), it is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 during the variable display.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (“slip” or “pseudo-run”) (S1551). . If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (S1552). If it is the specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as the use table (S1553). If the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 58 is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (S1554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of S1553. . In S1554, when a sliding effect is performed in a variation pattern such as a pseudo ream and a variation pattern of a pseudo ream, a start of a slip effect start timer which is a time measuring means for measuring a time until the slip effect is started is started. Be made.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM according to the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S1554 (S1555). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined in the process of S1554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 3. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 4.

  By executing the process of S1555, each time a specific production pattern of slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 is decided, corresponding to a variation pattern that executes a specific production of “slip”. It is updated to the previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined as one of a plurality of types, data indicating the determined type of effect operation is stored.

  When the specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4), When the control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, in the process of S1554, the “slip” specific effect is determined according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. Is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Next, in S1556, the effect control CPU 101, in the case of the “slip” specific effect, based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S1554, according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. Any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted (S1557). The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3. The effect design to be either 1-3 or the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 is determined (S1558), the data indicating the determined symbol is stored in the temporary stop symbol storage area of the RAM, and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S1552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (that is, “pseudo-continuous”), data indicating the type of pseudo-continuous effect indicated by the received variation pattern command is stored in the RAM. It memorize | stores in a predetermined area | region (S1559), and transfers to S1560. In this case, the pseudo-continuous variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is based on the data indicating the type of the pseudo-continuous effect stored in S1557 and the data such as the temporary stop symbol determined in S1560 to S1568. Production will be performed at.

  In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation specified by the received variation pattern command to the pseudo-continuous number M as constant data in S1560. For example, when the number of re-variations (not including the initial variation) in the quasi-continuation is one specific effect pattern, the number of quasi-continuations M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations in the quasi-continuation (initial variation). Is not included)), the pseudo continuous number M is set to “2”. Further, “0” is set to a temporary stop counter count value N which is a count value of the temporary stop counter as variable data indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols (S1561).

  Then, a temporary stop symbol determination table for determining the temporary stop symbol used in the pseudo-continuous is selected according to the temporary stop counter count value N based on the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-continuous (S1562). Specifically, when the value of the temporary stop counter count value N is “0”, that is, when determining the temporary stop symbol at the fluctuation time one time before the fluctuation time at which the final stop symbol is stopped in the pseudo-continuous, As such, the temporary stop symbol determination table is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 64A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-3-1 and super PA3-3. -2, Super PA 3-6-1, Super PA 3-6-2, Super PA 4-3, Super PA 4-6-1, Super PA 4-6-2, Super PB3-3-1, Super PB3-3-2, In the case of one of the super PB4-3-1, super PB4-3-2, super PB5-3-1, super PB5-3-2, special PG1-3, and special PG1-4, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. Further, when the value of the temporary stop counter is “1” or more, that is, when determining the temporary stop symbol at the fluctuation time two times before the fluctuation time when the final stop symbol is stopped in the pseudo-continuous, FIG. 64 (C). The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG.

  Then, as the temporary stop symbol determination random number, the value of the pseudo-continuous first variation temporary stop symbol determination random number SR4-1 or the pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol determination random number SR4-2 is extracted ( S1563). Specifically, when the value of the temporary stop counter count value N is “0”, that is, when determining the temporary stop symbol in the variable time one time before the variable time to stop the final stop symbol in the pseudo series, SR4− 1 is extracted. When the temporary stop counter count value N is “1” or more, that is, when determining the temporary stop symbol at the fluctuation time two times before the fluctuation time when the final stop symbol is stopped in the quasi-continuous series, SR4-2 is extracted. .

  Then, based on the value of the random number SR4-1 or SR4-2 extracted in S1563, refer to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C selected in S1562. To determine the temporary stop symbol on the left middle right that becomes one of the pseudo continuous chance points GC1 to GC8 as the temporary stop symbol in the fluctuation times N + 1 times before the final stop fluctuation in the pseudo continuous train, and the determined temporary stop symbol Is stored as a temporary stop symbol of the corresponding variable times in the temporary stop symbol storage area provided for storing the temporary stop symbol at each variable time of the pseudo-series in the RAM (S1564). Specifically, as a temporary stop symbol at the fluctuation time one time before the fluctuation time to stop the final stop symbol in the pseudo-continuous, a combination of KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-3, or KZ3-1, KZ3 -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. A combination of KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 is determined as a temporary stop symbol at the fluctuation time two times before the fluctuation time when the final stop symbol is stopped in the pseudo-continuous. In S1564, each time the process is executed, the temporary stop symbol at each fluctuation time is sequentially determined in a manner that goes back one time from the fluctuation time N + 1 times before the last stop fluctuation in the pseudo-continuous.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop symbol determination execution in S1564 is at the time of determining the variable stop temporary stop symbol for performing the first-slip chance chance temporary stop effect (S1565). Specifically, in S1565, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop symbol is determined (when N + 1 = M) for the first variation time in the variation pattern in which the first slip chance chance temporary stop effect is performed. To do. If it is determined in S1565 that it is not time to determine a temporary stop symbol for the variable number of times after the slip, the process proceeds to S1567 to be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1565 that it is time to determine a temporary stop symbol for a variable number of times for performing the chance stop temporary stop effect after the slip, the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip is determined according to the temporary stop symbol determined in S1564. The reach formation symbol before executing the slip effect is determined, and the data indicating the reach formation symbol is stored in the reach formation symbol storage area before the first slip chance stop temporary effect provided in the RAM (S1566). Then, the slip production start timer is started (S1566A). The slip effect start timer is a time measuring unit that measures the time until the slip effect is started in the pseudo ream. The slip effect start timer started here is a slip variation of the right temporary stop symbol after the non-chance symbol is temporarily stopped in the first variation when the above-mentioned first chance after-slip temporary stop effect is used. This is a timer used to measure the time until display is started. Specifically, in S1566A, a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display to the time when the slip effect is started is set in the slip effect start timer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1567.

  Next, in S1567, 1 is added to the temporary stop counter count value N to be updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated temporary stop counter count value N matches the number of pseudo consecutive times M (S1567). When the updated temporary stop counter count value N matches the number of pseudo continuous operations M, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated temporary stop counter count value N does not match the number of pseudo consecutive times M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. In order to determine the temporary stop symbols (similar consecutive chances GC1 to GC8) for the fluctuating times for which the temporary stop symbol has not yet been determined in the pseudo sequence, the process returns to S1562. By such a process of determining the temporary stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol is determined in a manner as shown in FIGS.

  Referring to FIG. 115, after executing the specific effect setting process of S516, effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S517). The effect control CPU 101 determines and specifies various effect controls (effects) such as the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S516, the notice pattern determined in S538 of FIG. 62) According to the operation) pattern, any one of the effects corresponding to the determined and specified various effect operation patterns among the plurality of types of symbol fluctuation control patterns stored in the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. A control pattern is selected and determined as a usage pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the reach effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol (S518a). When it is determined that the reach effect is executed, the reach start time is set in the reach start timer (S518b). The reach start timer is a timer that is necessary for determining the timing of the start of the reach effect after the start of variation of the effect symbol. As will be described later, the effect control CPU 101 starts the reach effect based on the time out of the reach start timer (see S848 to S852 described later). On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the reach start time is not set in the reach start timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in S518 (S519).

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes process data as data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including effects other than effects on the screen). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the flashing of the light emitter and the sound output from the speaker 27 in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data. In addition, the production control CPU 101 controls the movable members 78 and 84 and the vibration motors 87a, 87b, and 87c in a manner set in the movable member control data. In the movable member control data, in addition to the control state of the movable member 78, data indicating the control state of the vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c is also set.

  In the process table, for example, different process data is set for each production operation of the design pattern such as the above-described pseudo-ream and slip. Different process data is set depending on Therefore, for example, when executing the pseudo-variation pattern, when the notice effect is performed by the notice setting process of FIG. 117, and when the notice pattern is determined, the pseudo-series variation pattern is determined according to the determination. The process data that can execute the notice effect with the decided notice pattern is selected (the same applies to the variation patterns other than the pseudo-ream). Further, when a notice effect of button notice is performed, a change display effect is performed based on the process data for executing the change display without performing the notice effect before the operation button 30 is operated. After the operation, the process data is switched, so that the effect of the variable display is performed based on the process data for performing the button notice effect and executing the variable display.

  The process table shown in FIG. 121 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. The process table corresponds to more specifically the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 62 and the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed according to the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to the effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value elapses, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, 84 and the process of controlling the vibration motors 87a, 87b, and 87c are repeated, so that an effect in a single change in the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  Referring to FIG. 115, when the processing control CPU 101 executes the process of S519, the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1) are displayed. Accordingly, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable members 78 and 84 and production motors 87a, 87b and 87c as production components) The control is started (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, drive signals for operating the movable members 78 and 84 and the vibration motors 87a, 87b, and 87c are output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the variation period and the process table when realizing the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect. In the example illustrated in FIG. 123, as an example, an example in which two temporary stop periods are provided and three re-changes (including the initial change) are performed is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 123, presentation control from the start of fluctuation to the first temporary stop is executed based on the presentation control execution data set in the process table of the first presentation, and the second time from the first temporary stop. The production control until the temporary stop is executed based on the production control execution data set in the process table of the second production, and the production control from the second temporary stop to the final stop of the symbol is 3 This is executed based on the production control execution data set in the process table for the second production.

  When the pseudo continuous effect change display is performed, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the first change in S518.

  Referring to FIG. 115, effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (S521). The variation time timer is a timer for measuring the variation time from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S521a). The variation control timer is a timer for measuring the time from displaying the display screen of the effect design to displaying the display screen of the next effect design. The variation control timer may also be used as the effect control process timer described above. The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the production control CPU 101 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right production symbols in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the image data in which the VDP 109 is written in the VRAM. Is output to the effect display device 9, and the effect display device 9 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the change in effect design. The instruction of operation from the effect control CPU 101 to the VDP 109 is executed based on a signal output at a switching timing when the drawing surface and the display surface are periodically switched when displaying an image on the effect display device 9. It may be performed by the V blank interruption process. In that case, the data instructed by the V blank interrupt process needs to be set in advance before the V blank interrupt process is executed. In the V blank interrupt processing, main processing includes processing for switching between the drawing surface and the display surface, and data transfer start processing to the VDP.

  Next, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed (S521b), the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the time until the next temporary stop (in this case, the first change in the pseudo-continuous). Is set until the temporary stop is completed (S521c). The re-variation time timer is a timer for measuring the first variation included in the pseudo-continuous and the variation time of each re-variation when the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 to the re-variation number counter for counting the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-run (S521d). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522), and the process ends.

  FIG. 124 and FIG. 125 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process (S8430) executed in the effect control process.

  In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the values of the process timer, the change time timer, and the change control timer by 1 (S840A, S840B, S840C). If the reach start timer is in operation (if it has not timed out), the value of the reach start timer is decremented by 1 (S840D). If the re-variation time timer is operating (if not timed out), the value of the re-variation time timer is decremented by 1 (S840E). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

  Until the process timer times out (S843N), the process proceeds to an operation effect process (S8430) for performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 30, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S869D.

  Here, after explaining the processing contents of the operation effect process first, the other processing contents of the effect symbol changing process will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process.

  In the operation effect process, it is first determined whether or not process data for performing a button notice effect is set as process data (S8431). Thereby, it can be confirmed whether it is the time of the variable display which can perform a button notice effect. In S8431, based on the data indicating whether or not the decision to perform the button notice effect has been made in S1705, it is confirmed whether or not it is a variable display time in which the button notice effect can be performed. Also good. If it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is not set, the process proceeds to S8437 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is set, it is confirmed whether or not the present operation is in the first operation valid period as the operation valid period in the button notice effect (S8432). . Regarding the operation effective period of the button notice effect, the time when the first timing (predetermined timing before the start of the derivation display of the symbol as shown in FIG. 70C) has elapsed since the start of the variable display has elapsed. It is set as the start time of the first operation effective period, and the time when the second timing (timing later than the first timing) has elapsed since the start of the variable display is set as the end time of the first operation effective period Has been. Thereby, at the start and end of the first operation effective period of the button notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes based on the time value of the variable time timer that starts counting from the start of the variable display. Can do. Therefore, whether or not it is during the first operation valid period in the button notice effect is determined based on the time value of the variable time timer.

  When it is determined that it is not during the first operation valid period, the process proceeds to S8437 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the first operation effective period, it is confirmed whether or not the first operated flag that is set when the operation button 30 is operated during the first operation effective period is set. (S8433). If it is determined that the first operated flag is set, the process proceeds to S8437 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first operation completed flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 30 (S8434).

  If it is determined that the operation button 30 has not been operated, the process proceeds to S8443 which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 30 is operated, the first operation completion flag is set (S8435), the execution of the button notice effect is started (S8436), and the process proceeds to S8437 described later.

  In S8437, it is determined whether or not process data for performing a button branch notice effect is set as process data (S8437). Thereby, it can be confirmed whether it is the time of the variable display which can perform a button branch notice effect. In S8437, based on the data indicating whether or not the decision to perform the button branch notice effect is made in S1719, it is confirmed whether or not it is the time of the variable display that can perform the button branch notice effect. It may be. When it is determined that the process data for performing the button branch notice effect is not set, the process proceeds to S8443 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process data for performing the button branch notice effect is set, it is confirmed whether or not the current operation is in the second operation valid period as the operation valid period in the button branch notice effect ( S8432). Regarding the operation effective period of the button branch notice effect, when the third timing (predetermined timing before starting the derivation display of the symbol as shown in FIG. 73C) has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Is set as the start time of the second operation effective period, and the time when the fourth timing (timing later than the third timing) has elapsed from the start of the variable display is the end time of the first operation effective period. Is set as Thus, at the start and end of the second operation valid period of the button branch notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes based on the time value of the variable time timer that starts counting from the start of the variable display. be able to. Therefore, whether or not it is during the second operation valid period in the button branch notice effect is determined based on the time value of the variable time timer.

  When it is determined that it is not during the second operation valid period, the process proceeds to S8443 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation valid period is in effect, it is confirmed whether or not the second operation completed flag that is set when the operation button 30 is operated during the second operation valid period is set. (S8439). If it is determined that the second manipulated flag is set, the process proceeds to S8440 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 30 (S8440).

  If it is determined that the operation button 30 has not been operated, the process proceeds to S8443 which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 30 is operated, the second operation completion flag is set (S8441), the execution of the button branch notice effect is started (S8442), and the process proceeds to S8437 described later.

  In S8443, it is determined whether or not process data for performing group notice effect is set as process data (S8443). Thereby, it can be confirmed whether it is the time of the variable display which can perform a group notice effect. In S8443, based on the data indicating whether or not the decision to perform the group notice effect is made in S533m, it is confirmed whether or not it is the time of the variable display that can perform the button notice effect. Also good. When it is determined that the process data for performing the group notice effect is not set, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process data for performing the group notice effect is set, it is confirmed whether or not the current operation is in the third operation valid period as the operation valid period in the group notice effect (S8444). . As for the third operation effective period of the group notice effect, the time when the fifth timing (the timing when the reach state as shown in FIG. 71 (G)) has elapsed from the start of the variable display is the start of the third operation effective period. In addition, the time when the sixth timing (timing later than the fifth timing) has elapsed from the start of the variable display is set as the end of the third operation effective period. Thereby, at the start and end of the third operation effective period of the group notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes based on the time value of the variable time timer that starts counting from the start of the variable display. Can do. Therefore, whether or not it is during the third operation effective period in the group notice effect is determined based on the time value of the variable time timer.

  When it is determined that it is not during the third operation valid period, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third operation valid period is in effect, it is confirmed whether or not the third operation completed flag that is set when the operation button 30 is operated during the third operation valid period is set. (S8445). When it is determined that the third operated flag is set, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third operation completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 is operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 30 (S8446).

  When it is determined that the operation button 30 has not been operated, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 30 is operated, the above-described third operated flag is set (S8447), the execution of the group notice effect is started (S8448), and the process proceeds to S846 described later.

  Referring to FIG. 124, when it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (S843Y), it is confirmed whether or not the current operation is in the first operation valid period (S843a). When it is determined that it is during the first operation valid period, the process proceeds to S843d described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the first operation valid period, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned first operation completed flag is set (S843b). When it is determined that the first operated flag is set, the first operated flag is reset (S843c), and the process proceeds to S843d. This is because the first operation completion flag is initialized in response to the end of the first operation valid period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first operated flag is not set, the process proceeds to S843d.

  When the process proceeds to S843d, it is confirmed whether or not the present is in the second operation valid period (S843d). When it is determined that the second operation valid period is in progress, the process proceeds to S843g described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the second operation valid period, it is confirmed whether or not the second operation completed flag is set (S843e). If it is determined that the second operated flag is set, the second operated flag is reset (S843f), and the process proceeds to S843g. This is because the second operation completed flag is initialized in response to the end of the second operation valid period. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second operated flag is not set, the process proceeds to S843g.

  When the process proceeds to S843g, it is confirmed whether or not the present time is in the third operation valid period (S843g). When it is determined that the third operation is valid, the process proceeds to S844 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the third operation valid period, it is confirmed whether or not the third operation completed flag is set (S843h). If it is determined that the third operated flag is set, the third operated flag is reset (S843i), and the process proceeds to S844. This is because the third operation completed flag is initialized in response to the end of the third operation valid period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third operated flag is not set, the process proceeds to S843.

  In S843, process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (S845). .

  For example, in the process data for performing the button notice effect, data for executing the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 70 (C) and the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIGS. 70 (D) and 70 (E). And data for performing after-execution. As the data for performing the effect after the button operation promotion effect is executed, the data for performing the button notice effect as shown in FIG. 70 (D) and the button notice effect as shown in FIG. 70 (E) are not performed. And data for use are set to be selectively usable. In other words, for the process data for performing the button notice effect, the data for the effect of changing the effect design while performing the button operation promotion effect and the color reliability display effect (with and without the button notice) Common data), data for changing the effect design while performing the button notice effect when the operation button 30 is operated during the first operation effective period, and the operation button 30 during the first operation effective period. And data for changing the effect design without performing the button notice effect when is not operated. The data for changing the effect design while performing the button notification effect and the data for changing the effect design without performing the button notification effect are data selectively used according to the operation of the operation button 30. is there.

  Further, in the process data for performing button branch advance notice, data for executing a button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 73 (C) and a button operation promotion effect as shown in FIGS. 73 (D) and 73 (E). And data for performing after-execution. As the data for performing the effect after the button operation promotion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), data for performing the notice content display effect for opening the parcel and showing the content, and FIG. 73 (D As shown in (), data for not performing the notice content display effect is set to be selectively usable. In other words, for the process data for performing the button branch effect, the data for performing the effect of changing the effect design while performing the button operation promotion effect (data common to the case where the button is branched and the case where the button is not branched), and thereafter When the operation button 30 is operated during the second operation valid period, data for changing the effect design while performing the notice content display effect, and when the operation button 30 is not operated during the third operation valid period Data for changing the effect design without performing the notice content display effect is included. The data for changing the effect design while performing the notice content display effect and the data for changing the effect design without performing the notice content display effect are selectively selected according to the operation of the operation button 30. Data used.

  Further, in the process data for performing the group notice effect, data for executing the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 77 (G) and the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIGS. 77 (H) and (I). And data for performing after-execution. As data for performing the effect after the button operation promotion effect is executed, data for performing the group notice effect as shown in FIG. 77 (G) and group notice effect as shown in FIG. 77 (I) are not performed. And data for use are set to be selectively usable. In other words, for the process data for performing the group notice effect, the data for changing the effect design while performing the button operation promotion effect (data common to the case where the group notice is given or not), and thereafter , Data for changing the effect design while performing the group notice effect when the operation button 30 is operated during the third operation valid period, and the group notice when the operation button 30 is not operated during the third operation valid period Data for changing the effect design without performing the effect is included. The data for changing the effect symbol while performing the group notice effect and the data for changing the effect symbol without performing the group notice effect are data selectively used according to the operation of the operation button 30. is there.

  In S846, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation control timer has timed out based on the value of the variation control timer (S846). If the variation control timer has timed out, the production control CPU 101 creates image data of the next display screen of the left, middle, and right production symbols (the screen that should be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed since the last production symbol display switching). Then, it is written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S847). The VDP 109 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 9. As such, the effect control device 9 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Then, the fluctuation control timer is reset (S848).

  Next, in S849, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the reach start timer has timed out based on the value of the reach start timer. If the reach start timer has timed out, the production control CPU 101 determines the reach symbol determined in the process of S505 (in the case of not hitting the jackpot) or the reach symbol based on the jackpot symbol determined in the process of S511 (the jackpot Reach symbols in the case: combination of effect symbols that the left and right symbols match) are stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area (symbol display line) and “right” symbol display area (symbol display line) in the effect display device 9. Control is performed (S850). Specifically, the reach pattern image data is written in a predetermined area of the VRAM.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the type of reach effect to be executed (S851). Then, a process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 (process data 1) in the selected process table is started (S852). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the image display device 9 as the production component, the production component as the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Various lamps, the speaker 27 as a production component, the motor 86 that moves the movable member 78 as a production component, and the motor 88 that moves the movable member 84 as a production component are controlled (S853).

  In S858, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the re-variation time timer has timed out based on the value of the re-variation time timer. If the re-variation time timer has timed out, the production control CPU 101 saves according to the value (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) set in the re-variation number counter for counting the number of re-variation times. The temporary stop symbol indicated by the data stored in the area (if the value of the re-variation number counter is n, the nth storage area) is the “left” symbol display area (design display line), “ Control is performed to stop and display in the “medium” symbol display area (symbol display line) and the “right” symbol display area (symbol display line) (S859). Then, the value of the re-variation number counter is incremented by 1 (S860). If the re-variation time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S869A.

  After executing the process of S860, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the re-variation number counter is a value corresponding to the last re-variation (S861). The final round of re-variation is confirmed as follows. Whether or not the value of the re-variation number counter is 2 when a variation pattern (non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-3 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16) including a pseudo-continuity of two-time variation is used Confirm. Further, for example, a variation pattern including a three-time variation pseudo-ream (super PA 3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super PA3-6-2 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, When the special PG1-4) is used, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the re-variation number counter is 3. Also, for example, a fluctuation pattern including a pseudo-continuity of four fluctuations (super PB3-3-1, super PB3-3-2, super PA4-6-1, super PA4-6-2 shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, When the super PA5-3-1, super PA5-3-2, super PB4-3-1, super PB4-3-2) are used, it is determined whether or not the value of the re-variation number counter is 4. Check. Further, for example, when a variation pattern including a pseudo sequence of five variations (super PB5-3-1 and super PB5-3-2 shown in FIG. 16) is used, the value of the re-variation number counter is set to 5. Check if it is. However, in this embodiment, when the super PA 4-3 shown in FIG. 16 is used, the slip variation performed after the third variation is the fourth variation although it is a variation pattern including a pseudo variation of the third variation. It is counted as a fluctuation, and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the re-variation number counter is 4. In this case, when the value of the re-variation number counter is 4, after that, as an effect corresponding to the fourth fluctuation, only the temporary stop symbol on the right is stopped while the temporary stop symbol on the left is stopped. A slip variation effect is performed to vary the slip.

  When the value of the re-variation number counter is a value corresponding to the last re-variation, the effect control CPU 101 uses the slip variation (ie, the super PA 4-3) as the last variation to be executed. Whether or not) (S862). If it is a slip fluctuation (Y in S862), the process proceeds to S868.

  When the value of the re-variation number counter is not a value corresponding to the last re-variation (N in S861) or when the last variation is not a slip variation (N in S862), the effect control CPU 101 A process table corresponding to the nth change (any of n = 2 to 5) of any one of the pseudo-continuations (pseudo-continuous effects in the currently executing variation pattern) is selected (S863). Then, a process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 (process data 1) in the selected process table is started (S864). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the image display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps, the speaker 27 as a production component, and the motors 86 and 88 for moving the movable members 78 and 84 as production components is executed (S865).

  When the value of the re-variation counter is not the value corresponding to the last re-variation (N in S866), the effect control CPU 101 sets the re-variation time timer until the next temporary stop. A value corresponding to time is set (S867).

  If the last change is a slip change in S862 (Y in S862), a slip effect start timer is started (S868). When the variation pattern of Super PA4-3 is used, the slip effect start timer started here ends the third variation, temporarily stops the temporary stop symbol, and then starts the slip variation display of the right temporary stop symbol. It is a timer used to measure the time until it is done. Specifically, a value corresponding to the time from the temporary stop to the time when the slip effect is started is set in the slip effect start timer. Then, the process proceeds to S874.

  In S869A, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the slip effect start timer by -1 if the slip effect start timer is in operation (if not timed out). The case where the slip effect start timer is in operation at S869A means that the slip effect in the first temporary chance stoppage effect after the first slip is performed in S1566A described above and the slip variation is performed in the last change in S868 described above. Either. If the slip effect start timer has timed out (S869A), a slip display is performed (S869C). That is, image data is created and written to the VRAM so that the right temporary stop symbol fluctuates. As a result, a display indicating that the right temporary stop symbol fluctuates when the first temporary post-slip chance temporary stop effect is executed in the first variation of the pseudo-ream, and the right temporary stop symbol slips in the last variation of the pseudo-ream. Display that fluctuates or displays that the temporary stop symbol slips and fluctuates in a variation pattern other than the pseudo-ream.

  In S869D, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out based on the value of the variable time timer (S869D). If the change time timer has timed out (Y in S869D), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (S803) (S869F). On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (N in S869D), it is confirmed whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S869E). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S869E), the effect symbol changing process ends. On the other hand, when the confirmation command reception flag is set (Y in S869E), the process proceeds to S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out (N in S869D), when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to the variation stop. For example, a long variation time due to noise between substrates is indicated. Even when the variation pattern command is received, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol is finished).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo ream” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3-1, super PA3-3-2, super PA3-6-1, super PA3-6-2, super PB3- 3-1, Super PB3-3-2, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4-3-1 , Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1, Super PB5-3-2 and Special PG1-3), the part that executes the processing of S841 to S845 This corresponds to control processing.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S880). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S887. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S886. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in S881 to S886 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S887.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether there is (S881). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol or jackpot symbol) (S882).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on this, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the jackpot symbol is not displayed in the process of S882 (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed) (S883), the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the process of receiving the variation pattern command (S800). It is updated to a value according to (S884).

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of S882, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (S886), and receives a jackpot start designation command reception flag (a jackpot start flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received. It is confirmed whether or not the sudden start designation command reception flag indicating that the 1 designation command reception flag or the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or the sudden start designation command has been received is set (S887). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S888) and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect ( S889).

  When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag. In the process of S889, when the CPU 101 for effect control is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is received). , When the process table corresponding to “15-time release game start notification” is selected and determined to be a big hit (specifically, when the display result 4 designation command is received), “2 times open” A process table corresponding to “game start notification” is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S890), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) 1) According to the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable members 78 and 84 as production components, vibration motors 87a, 87b, The control of 87c) is executed (S891). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S892).

  Through the control described above, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the production symbol to be paused and displayed between the start time and the end time of the production symbol variation executed based on the determined variation pattern. A re-variation effect is performed in which re-variation for varying display is performed once or a plurality of times. The re-variation effect is configured to include a first re-change effect of the first re-change effect mode and a second re-change effect of the second re-change effect mode different from the first re-change effect mode. ing. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pseudo-ream effect is being executed by the first re-change effect mode and the second re-change effect mode, and the pseudo-change effect mode is simulated by a plurality of types of re-change effect modes. The production effect by the rendition of the rendition can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a first re-variation effect in the first re-variation effect mode, a second re-change effect in the second re-change effect mode, or a third re-change effect mode as the re-change effect. When the re-variation effect selection process for selecting the re-variation effect is executed and the pre-deciding means decides to control to the specific gaming state, the re-variation of the first re-variation effect and the second re-variation effect is performed as the re-variation effect. The third re-variation effect is selected at a higher rate than the effect. Thereby, the production effect by a pseudo | simulation series can be improved with several types of re-variation production | presentation aspects. In addition, a pseudo-rendition effect linked to the reliability of the specific game state is executed, and the effect of the pseudo-ream effect can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 8a and second special symbol indicator 8b) as a variation display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a symbol display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27 and the like) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output lamp 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the production control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, as well as the audio output board 70, the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 to FIG. 135, an example of progress of the effect operation when the notice effect is executed for each of the first notice effect to the fifth notice effect described above will be described. Each of FIGS. 128 to 135 shows the progress state of the effect when re-variation is not performed in order to clarify the flow of the advancement of the notice effect. In addition, about the progress of production when re-variation is performed, it supplements in description of each figure.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of button notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 128 includes the advance notice determined by executing the symbol fluctuation control pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command and the process of S1705 shown in FIG. 119 in the processes of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 128, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9, the variable display of all effect symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols is started. (Step ST (hereinafter simply referred to as ST) 11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, a button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed (ST12).

  When the button operation promotion effect is started in ST12, it becomes the first operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is effectively detected (ST13). The timing at which the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing at which the first operation effective period is started may be the same timing or different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, the button operation promotion effect is obtained by setting the first operation effective period. The start timing of and the start timing of the first operation effective period may be different.

  After that, for example, whether or not the first operation effective period has ended based on control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the variation time counted by the variation time timer Is determined (ST14). For example, if the end of the first operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated. The first operation valid period may be terminated. Alternatively, the first operation valid period may be ended when the production control process timer value matches a predetermined first operation valid period end determination value. If the first operation valid period has not expired in ST14 (N in ST14), it is determined whether or not a button operation is detected by the operation button 30 by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 or the like. Determine (ST15). If it is determined in ST15 that no button operation is detected (N in ST15), the process returns to ST14.

  When it is determined in ST15 that a button operation has been detected (Y in ST15), the effect operation is switched to the notice effect of button notice, and execution of the notice effect of button notice as shown in FIG. 70 (D) is started. (ST16a). Then, after the notice effect is finished, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (ST17). Also, when it is determined in ST14 that the first operation effective period has ended (Y in ST14), the derivation display of the effect symbols is started (ST17). The start timing of the derivation display of the effect symbol shown in ST17 is the same when the operation with the operation button 30 is performed and when the operation is not performed. Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the quasi-continuous re-variation is performed, the button notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the basic advance notice as the first step-up notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 129 is the advance notice determined by executing the symbol variation control pattern determined based on the variation pattern command and the processing of S1710 shown in FIG. 119 in the processing of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 129, as in the process shown in FIG. 128, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, the execution of the effect operation of the notice effect of the basic development notice shown in FIG. 71 (B) or the like is started (ST16b). Then, after the notice effect is finished, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (ST17).

  Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed, the basic advance notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the reach branch notice as the first step-up notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 130 is performed in advance in the process of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 130, as in the process shown in FIG. 128, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, the effect of the step-up notice such as the first step and the second step shown in FIG. 72 (B) is started (ST11a).

  Then, when the reach branch timing as in the third step of FIG. 72 is reached, it is determined whether or not there is a reach branch that branches to the reach confirmation effect step, and it is decided to branch to the reach confirmation effect step. If it is, the process branches to the reach confirmation effect step, and the effect after the branch is started (ST16c). On the other hand, when the process does not branch to the reach confirmation effect step, the process branches to the reach unconfirmed effect step, and the effect after the branch is started (ST16d). Thereafter, the derivation display of the effect symbols is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (ST17).

  Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the variation time counted by the variation time timer. (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed, the basic advance notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the button branch notice as the first step-up notice is executed. 131 are determined by executing the symbol variation control pattern determined based on the variation pattern command and the processing of S1719 and S1722 illustrated in FIG. 119 in the processing of S801 to S803 illustrated in FIG. 113. It may be realized by executing the processing of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 131, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, as in the process shown in FIG. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, the effect of step-up notice as shown in FIG. 73 (B) or the like is started (ST11a). Thereafter, symbol derivation display is started in the “left” symbol display area 9L (ST11c).

  Then, when the button branch timing as shown in FIGS. 73 (C) and 73 (D) is reached, it is determined whether there is a button branch to branch to the button branch notice (ST11d), and the process branches to the button branch notice. Is determined, the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 73C is started (ST12a).

  When the button operation promotion effect is started in ST12a, it becomes the second operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is effectively detected (ST13a). The timing at which the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing at which the second operation effective period is started may be the same timing or different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, the button operation promotion effect is obtained by setting the second operation valid period. The start timing of and the start timing of the second operation effective period may be different.

  After that, for example, whether the second operation valid period has ended based on the control data read out from the symbol variation control pattern or the preview effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the variation time counted by the variation time timer Is determined (ST14a). For example, if the end of the second operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated. The second operation valid period may be terminated. Alternatively, the first operation valid period may be ended when the production control process timer value matches a predetermined second operation valid period end determination value. If the second operation valid period has not expired in ST14a (N in ST14a), it is determined whether or not a button operation has been detected by the operation button 30 by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 or the like. Determine (ST15). If it is determined in ST15 that no button operation is detected (N in ST15), the process returns to ST14a.

  When it is determined in ST15 that button operation has been detected (Y in ST15), the effect operation is switched to the notice content display effect, and execution of the notice content display effect as shown in FIG. 73 (D) is started. (ST16e). Then, after the notice effect is completed, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “right” and “middle” symbol display areas 9R and 9C (ST17a). In the button branch notice, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbols are displayed at ST17a without starting the derivation display of the effect symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L at ST11a. You may make it start the derivation display of an effect symbol in the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Also, when it is determined in ST14a that the second operation effective period has ended (Y in ST14a), the derivation display of the effect symbol is started (ST17a). The start timing of the derivation display of the effect symbol shown in ST17 is the same when the operation with the operation button 30 is performed and when the operation is not performed. Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), all of the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” and “middle” symbol display areas 9R and 9C. The effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display area (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the quasi-continuous re-variation is performed, the button notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the second step-up notice (monitor notice) is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 132 is performed by executing the symbol variation control pattern determined based on the variation pattern command and the processing of S547 shown in FIG. 118 in the processing of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 132, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, as in the process shown in FIG. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, the execution of the effect operation of the notice effect of the second step-up notice shown in FIG. 71 (C) or the like is started (ST16f). Then, after the notice effect is finished, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (ST17).

  Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the pseudo-variation is re-varied, the second step-up notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the movable member notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 133 is performed by executing the symbol fluctuation control pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command and the process of S552 shown in FIG. 118 in the processes of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 133, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, as in the process shown in FIG. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, execution of the effect operation of the notice effect of the movable member notice shown in FIG. 75 and the like is started (ST16g). Then, after the notice effect is finished, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (ST17).

  Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the re-variation of the quasi-continuous is performed, the movable member advance notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the mini character notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 134 includes the advance notice determined by executing the symbol fluctuation control pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command and the process of S557 shown in FIG. 118 in the processes of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 134, in the same manner as the process shown in FIG. 129, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, execution of the effect operation of the notice effect of the mini character notice shown in FIG. 76 (B1), (B2), (B3), etc. is started (ST16h). Then, after the notice effect is finished, the derivation display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (ST17).

  Then, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, for example, whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. Determine (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thus, the temporary stop display started in ST19 is continued until the variable display time has elapsed. When the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed, the mini character notice is executed for each re-variation by returning to ST11 after ST19. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of group notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 135 is the advance notice determined by executing the symbol fluctuation control pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command and the process of S562 shown in FIG. 118 in the processes of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 135, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9, the variation display of all effect symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols is started. (ST11). Thereafter, derivation display of effect symbols is started for each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (ST17). It is determined to execute the notice effects such as the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect as described above from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the start of the derivation display of the symbols. Sometimes, the determined notice effect is executed.

  Then, for example, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, it is determined whether or not the set reach production start timing is reached. (ST22). When it is determined in ST22 that it is the start timing of reach production, the reach state is displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (F) to start reach production (ST23).

  Next, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. ), A button operation promotion effect as shown in (G) of FIG. 77 is performed (ST24). When the button operation promotion effect is started in ST24, it becomes the third operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is effectively detected (ST25). Note that the timing when the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing when the third operation effective period is started may be the same timing or may be different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, the button operation promotion effect is obtained by setting the third operation valid period. And the start timing of the third operation valid period may be different.

  After that, for example, whether or not the third operation valid period has ended based on control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the preview effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the variation time counted by the variation time timer Is determined (ST26). For example, if the end of the third operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated. The third operation valid period may be terminated. Alternatively, the third operation effective period may be ended when the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined third operation effective period end determination value. If the third operation valid period has not expired in ST26 (N in ST26), it is determined whether or not a button operation is detected by the operation button 30 by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 or the like. Determine (ST27). If it is determined in ST27 that no button operation is detected (N in ST27), the process returns to ST26.

  When it is determined in ST27 that button operation has been detected (Y in ST27), the production operation is switched to the group announcement notice effect, and execution of the group notice announcement effect as shown in FIG. 77 (H) is started. (ST28). Thus, the group notice effect is executed. Then, for example, based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value or the variation time measured by the variation time timer, it is determined whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed. (ST29). Also, when it is determined in ST26 that the third operation effective period has ended (Y in ST26), it is determined whether or not the set variable display time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in ST29 that the set variable display time has not elapsed (N in ST29), the effect is produced in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The symbol is temporarily displayed (ST30), and the process returns to ST29. Thereby, the temporary stop display started in ST29 is continued until the variable display time elapses. When it is determined in ST30 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST29), the effect symbols are completely stopped and displayed in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. (ST31), the effect symbol variation display is terminated.

  Only one of the notice effect of the button notice shown in FIG. 128 and the notice effect of the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 129 is executed. 129 and the second step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 132 are executed in parallel, or both are executed in parallel. There is a case. In addition, the button notice shown in FIG. 128 or the first step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 129, the second step-up notice notice effect shown in FIG. 132, the movable member notice notice effect shown in FIG. 133, and 134, there are cases where only one of the notice effects is executed, and cases where any two to four notice effects are executed in parallel. If the group notice shown in FIG. 135 is executed after the reach state, the button notice or the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the movable member notice is made before the reach state is reached. There are cases where any one of the notice effects and the notice effect of the mini character notice is executed in parallel, or any two to four notice effects are executed in parallel.

  Next, a modified example of the aforementioned button branch notice will be described. As the button branch notice, the button operation promotion effect is performed after the button branch as described above, and the first operation notice effect is executed to execute the first notice on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated ( For example, this is performed in the second notice step), and after that, a button operation promotion effect is further performed, and a second notice as a special notice is executed on condition that the operation button 30 is further operated. A button branch notice effect that develops in two stages is performed by making a notice in a button branch continuous notice pattern (for example, in the third notice step in step 3).

  Such a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages may be executed in place of the aforementioned one stage button branch notice effect. In addition, such a button branch notice effect (also called a two-stage button branch notice) developed in two stages is provided together with the one-stage button branch notice (also called a one-stage button branch notice) described above. It may be executed based on the selection. For example, in the notice step determination table as shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, in addition to the button branch notice, a selection item for two-stage button branch notice is provided and the value of SR22 is allocated and selected as the button branch notice. You may do it. 95 and 96, a data table for selecting a one-step button branch notice and a two-stage button branch notice when a button branch is selected is provided. May be selected based on a random value using the data table.

  Specifically, in the first notice announcement effect determination process described above, the display to be displayed in each of the continuous first operation notice effect and second operation notice effect based on the random number SR23 for determining the notice content of the button branch notice step. A notice content determination table for determining contents at the same time is provided, and when it is determined to perform a notice effect with a button branch continuous notice pattern in the pseudo-continuous, the first operation notice effect is produced using the notice content determination table. The display contents to be displayed in each of the second operation advance notice effects are simultaneously determined. Then, an operation effective period is provided for each of the first operation advance notice effect and the second operation advance notice effect. In the operation effect process of FIG. 126, the operation button 30 is operated within the operation effective period for the first operation advance notice effect. Sometimes, the display contents determined for the first operation notice effect are displayed, and the second operation notice effect is provided on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated within the operation valid period for the first operation notice effect. The operation valid period is set for the second operation notice effect. That is, only when the operation button 30 is operated within the operation valid period for the first operation advance notice effect, the second operation advance notice effect is executed. It should be noted that in such a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages, the determination of the display contents to be displayed in each of the first operation notice effect and the second operation notice effect is performed once in the notice content determination table. Depending on the combination of the display contents in the first operation notice effect and the display contents in the second operation notice effect determined in the above, the reliability of the jackpot may be set differently. Specifically, for example, the following configuration is used. For the display contents in the first operation notice effect, for example, one of A and B display contents can be selected so that the reliability of the jackpot is display contents A> display contents B. For the display contents in the operation announcement effect, for example, either C or D can be selected so that the reliability of the jackpot is display contents C> display contents D. Then, for example, the reliability of the jackpot for the combination of the display contents in the first operation notice effect and the display contents in the second operation notice effect is selected, and the display content B is selected in the first operation notice effect. After that, the combination in which the display content D is selected in the second operation advance notice effect> the combination in which the display content D is selected in the second operation advance notice effect after the display content A is selected in the first operation advance notice effect. Set to display contents. In this way, even if the display of the first operation notification effect with a low jackpot reliability is performed, there may occur a case where the reliability of the jackpot increases depending on the display of the second operation notification effect. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered by the notice effect.

  If such control is performed, a special operation is performed on the condition that the button operation is further performed after the first operation preview effect is performed in response to the button operation performed when the operation preview effect is selected. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further improved. It should be noted that such a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages is not limited to one that develops in two stages, and may be in any number of stages as long as it develops in a plurality of stages.

  Note that the notice effect that develops in a plurality of stages in response to the button operation may be executed in the effect of the button notice shown in FIG. 70 described above.

<First Modification of Design Change Opportunity Temporary Stop Production>
Next, a first modified example of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect typified by the above-described first slip chance temporary stop effect will be described. As a first modified example, even when the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-series is the same, identification is temporarily stopped in some variation display areas in re-variation due to the variation pattern An example will be described in which control is performed to select the variable display pattern so that the selection ratio of the reach type is different according to the number of times that the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo consecutive chance by changing the information is executed.

  For example, with respect to a plurality of variation patterns in which the same number of pseudo-continuations are set, such as a variation pattern of four pseudo-continuations, for example, the first slip for the variation pattern that performs the first-slip chance stop temporary stop effect as described above. Fluctuation pattern for performing the after-chance temporary stop effect (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect once), the chance pattern temporary stop effect after the second slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect twice) And the number of times that the chance post-slip temporary stop effect after the slip is executed are different, such as a variation pattern for performing the slip and a chance stop temporary stop effect after the third slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect three times). The fluctuation pattern is provided. For these multiple types of variation patterns, data in the variation pattern selection data table is set so that the selection ratios of the reach effect types such as reach α and β described above are different. For example, the selection ratio of reach α may be set higher as the number of slips increases, and conversely, the selection ratio of reach β may be set higher as the number of slips increases. Such a change pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side or on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  If such a data table is used to select a quasi-continuous variation pattern, even if the number of re-variation executions in the selected quasi-continuous variation pattern is the same, slippage in re-variation due to the variation pattern will occur. It is possible to select the variable display pattern so that the selection ratio of the reach type differs depending on the number of times the after-chance eye temporary stop effect is executed. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution, but also to what kind of rendition is performed in the middle of the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

<Second modification of the design change chance temporary stop effect>
Next, a second modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect typified by the above-mentioned first slip chance temporary stop effect will be described. As a second modified example, control is performed to select the variable display pattern so that the reliability of the big hit is different according to the variable display area in which the temporary stop symbol is changed by performing the chance stop temporary stop effect after the slip. An example will be described.

  For example, with respect to the variation pattern for performing the first chance chance temporary stop effect after the first slip as described above, for example, the variation pattern for performing the first chance opportunity temporary suspension effect for the temporary stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area; A plurality of variation patterns are provided, including a variation pattern in which the chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip is performed on the temporary stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area. For these multiple types of variation patterns, the data of the variation pattern selection data table is changed so that the variation pattern selection ratio differs between when it is determined to be a big hit and when it is determined to be out of place. Set it. For example, the selection ratio is set in a relationship of “left” <“right” when it is determined to be a big hit, and the selection ratio is set in a relationship of “right” <“left” when it is determined to be out of place. It may be. On the other hand, when it is determined that it will be out of place, the selection ratio is set in the relationship of “left” <“right”, and when it is determined that it is a big hit, the selection ratio is set in the relationship of “right” <“left”. You may do it. In addition, when the slide effect can be executed a plurality of times as in the first modified example described above, the variation pattern having a larger number of slips when it is determined to be a big hit than when it is determined to be out of place. Alternatively, the selection ratio may be increased, and conversely, when it is determined that it is a big hit, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern having a smaller number of slips may be higher than when it is determined that it will be lost. . Such a change pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side or on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In addition, when such multiple slide effects are possible, it is a big hit when the slide effect is performed in the “right” symbol display area than when the slide effect is performed in the “left” symbol display area. The variation pattern is such that the greater the number of sliding effects, the higher the reliability that will be a big hit even if the sliding effect is performed in the same “right” symbol display area. The selection ratio may be set. On the other hand, when the reliability is a big hit when the sliding effect is performed in the “left” symbol display area than when the sliding effect is performed in the “right” symbol display area, the same “ Even when the slip effect is performed in the “right” symbol display area, the variation pattern selection ratio may be set so that the greater the number of times the slip effect is performed, the higher the reliability that is a big hit. .

  If such a data table is used to select a fluctuating variation pattern, the reliability that is a big hit according to the variation display area in which the temporary stop symbol is changed by performing the after-slip chance temporary stop effect. It is possible to select the variable display pattern so as to be different. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution but also to what kind of effect the re-variation is performed in the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. Can do. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

<Third modification of the design change chance temporary stop production>
Next, a description will be given of a third modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect typified by the above-described first slip chance temporary stop effect. As a third modified example, even when the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-series is the same, identification is temporarily stopped in some variation display areas in re-variation due to the variation pattern Explained is an example of performing control for selecting a variable display pattern so that the selection ratio of the special game state (probability change state) varies depending on the number of times that the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-chance chance by changing information is executed. To do.

  For example, with respect to a plurality of variation patterns in which the same number of pseudo-continuations are set, such as a variation pattern of four pseudo-continuations, for example, the first slip for the variation pattern that performs the first-slip chance stop temporary stop effect as described above. Fluctuation pattern for performing the after-chance temporary stop effect (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect once), the chance pattern temporary stop effect after the second slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect twice) And the number of times that the chance post-slip temporary stop effect after the slip is executed are different, such as a variation pattern for performing the slip and a chance stop temporary stop effect after the third slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect three times). The fluctuation pattern is provided. For these multiple types of variation patterns, the data of the variation pattern selection data table is set so that the selection ratio differs between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, when it is a promising big hit, it may be set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern in which the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous chance is executed is higher than when the normal big hit, When the probability variation big hit is made, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in which the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous chance is executed may be set to be higher than that in the case of the normal big hit. Such a change pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side or on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  If such a data table is used to select a quasi-continuous variation pattern, even if the number of re-variation executions in the selected quasi-continuous variation pattern is the same, slippage will occur in the re-variation due to the variation pattern. It is possible to select the variable display pattern so that the ratio of the probable big hit as the special gaming state varies depending on the number of times the after-chance temporary stop effect is executed. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution, but also to what kind of rendition is performed in the middle of the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

<Fourth Modification of Design Change Chance Temporary Stop Production>
Next, a description will be given of a fourth modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect typified by the above-described first slip chance temporary stop effect. As a fourth modified example, even when the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected quasi-continuous pattern is the same, identification is temporarily stopped in some variation display areas in the re-variation due to the variation pattern. An example of performing control to select a variable display pattern so that the selection ratio between the big hit for round 2 and the big hit for round 15 is different according to the number of times that an effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-chance chance by changing information is executed. explain.

  For example, with respect to a plurality of variation patterns in which the same number of pseudo-continuations are set, such as a variation pattern of four pseudo-continuations, for example, the first slip for the variation pattern that performs the first-slip chance stop temporary stop effect as described above. Fluctuation pattern for performing the after-chance temporary stop effect (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect once), the chance pattern temporary stop effect after the second slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect twice) And the number of times that the chance post-slip temporary stop effect after the slip is executed are different, such as a variation pattern for performing the slip and a chance stop temporary stop effect after the third slip (the effect of executing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect three times). The fluctuation pattern is provided. For these multiple types of variation patterns, the data of the variation pattern selection data table is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether it is a big hit for two rounds or a big hit for 15 rounds. For example, when the big hit is 15 rounds, it may be set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern in which the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous chance is executed is higher than when the big round 2 is a big hit, On the contrary, in the big hit of 15 rounds, it may be set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern in which the number of times that the effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo consecutive chance is executed is smaller than in the case of the big hit of 2 rounds. Such a change pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side or on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  If such a data table is used to select a quasi-continuous variation pattern, even if the number of re-variation executions in the selected quasi-continuous variation pattern is the same, slippage in re-variation due to the variation pattern will occur. Depending on the number of times the second chance temporary stop effect is executed, it is possible to select a variable display pattern so that the selection ratio is different between a big hit of 2 rounds and a big hit of 15 rounds as a big hit It becomes. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution, but also to what kind of rendition is performed in the middle of the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, an example of determining an aspect of a notice pattern (notice message, notice step) at the time of each change of a pseudo-series at the start of a change display for a notice effect such as a button notice and a step-up notice is shown. It was. In the second embodiment, the mode of the notice pattern (notice message and notice step) and the form of the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display and pattern reliability display) are selected and determined at each change of the pseudo-series. An example will be described.

  In the second embodiment, portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. In the second embodiment, the mode of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step) is selected and determined at each change of the pseudo-series. Therefore, the notice setting process is performed in S516a in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 115 of the first embodiment and in the effect symbol variation process in S802. That is, in the notice setting process, the aspect of the notice pattern in the first variation of the notice effect is selected and determined in the effect symbol variation start process, and the form of the notice pattern in the second and subsequent variations is selected in the effect symbol variation process. It is determined. For the notice pattern selected and determined in such a notice setting process, the type of notice effect is determined when the notice setting process is first performed. When the type of the notice effect is determined, if the data specifying the type is stored until the change display in the change pattern in which the notice effect is performed is completed, the data after the type of the notice effect is determined. Based on the data specifying the type and the data specifying the fluctuation pattern, the same type of notice effect is produced using the same notice pattern determination table at each re-variation during the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern. A notice pattern can be determined.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process according to the second embodiment. 136 is different from FIG. 124 in that the notice setting process is performed between S844 and S845 in S843k. Referring to FIG. 136, after the process timer is started in S844, it is confirmed whether or not it is the start of re-variation of the pseudo-series (S843j). Specifically, in S843j, whether the timing for specifying the start time of the re-variation predetermined for each pseudo-continuous change pattern, that is, the time for specifying the start time of each re-change from the start of the change display has been reached. Whether or not the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether or not it is the start time of the re-variation of the pseudo-continuation by recognizing whether or not it is. When it is determined that it is time to start re-variation of the pseudo-ream, a notice setting process is performed (S843k). Then, the next process data is set, and processing for changing the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is performed based on the process data (S843 to S845). In S845, process data including data for performing the notice set in the notice setting process is set. As a result, the notice setting process as shown in FIGS. 137 to 138 is performed every time when the re-variation of the pseudo-series is started. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the time of starting the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous, a process for changing the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is performed based on the process data without performing the advance notice setting process (S845). ).

  FIG. 137 and FIG. 138 are flowcharts showing the advance notice setting process according to the second embodiment. As described above, the notice setting process in the second embodiment is performed in S516a of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 115 before the start of the variation display, and then during the effect symbol variation in FIG. 136 during the variation display. This is a common subroutine program executed in S843k of the process.

  In the notice setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs the notice effect for each of the first notice effect to the fifth notice effect at the start of the change for the current change (including both initial change and re-change). It is determined whether or not it is determined (S530). Specifically, in S530, regarding the current change, at the start of the change, the process of determining the notice pattern type of the first notice effect in S533, whether or not the second notice effect (second step-up notice) is executed in S533c, S533f The process of determining whether or not to execute the third notice effect (movable member notice) by S, whether to execute the fourth notice effect (mini-character notice) by S533i, and whether to execute the fifth notice effect (group notice) by S533m Determine whether or not.

  More specifically, in S533, as described above, the notice pattern type is determined and stored by selecting one of no first notice effect, button notice, and first step-up notice. In S533c, as described above, it is determined whether or not to execute the second step-up notice, and data indicating the determination content is stored. In S533f, as described above, it is determined whether or not to perform the movable member notice, and data indicating the determination content is stored. In S533i, as described above, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice is executed, and data indicating the determined content is stored. In S533i, as described above, it is determined whether or not the group notice is to be executed, and data indicating the determination content is stored.

  The stored data related to the notice effect is stored in the RAM in a predetermined notice pattern type storage area (data storage area related to the first notice effect) in the RAM every time a change including the initial change and the re-change is performed. Up notice determination content storage area (data storage area related to second notice effect), movable member notice determination content storage area (data storage area related to third notice effect), mini character notice determination content storage area (data storage area related to fourth notice effect) ) And the group notice determination content storage area (data storage area related to the fifth notice effect), and cleared when each change including the initial change and the re-change is completed. Therefore, in S530, it is determined whether or not data specifying the notice pattern type of the first notice effect is stored in the notice pattern type storage area, and the second step up notice content storage area stores the second step up notice. To determine whether or not data for specifying whether or not to execute is stored, and to specify whether or not to execute the movable member advance notice in the movable member advance notice content storage area Determining whether or not data is stored, determining whether or not the data specifying the determination content of whether or not to execute the mini character notice is stored in the mini character notice determination content storage area, and determining the group notice Based on determining whether or not data specifying the content of determination on whether or not to execute group notice is stored in the content storage area, Whether the first to announcement attraction of the 5 had it is determined whether or not already been determined. In addition to these data, the data executed for the prohibition process described above (including the data that could be executed because the notice is not executed unless the button is operated). It is stored in the prohibition processing content storage area.

  Next, the notice pattern type is determined by executing the same processing as S531 to S533 in FIG. In addition, by executing the same processing as S5330 to S5333 of FIG. 117, the type of the first step notice to be executed when the execution of the first step notice is selected (basic development notice, reach branch notice, Button branch). In addition, by executing the same processing as S533a to S533c in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the second notice effect is to be executed. In addition, by performing the same processing as S533d to S533f in FIG. In addition, by executing the same processing as S533g to S533i in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice effect is executed. In addition, by performing the same processing as S533j to S533m in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not to execute the group notice effect. Then, the same processing as S534 in FIG. 117 is performed. When it is determined that there is no first notice effect in S534, the first notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 139 is executed, and then the process proceeds to S539.

  Here, after describing the processing contents of the first notice effect determination process first, the contents after S539 of the notice setting process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing first notice effect determination processing according to the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 139, first, similarly to S1701 of FIG. 119, it is determined whether or not the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined to be button notice (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the button is not in advance, the process proceeds to S1706 described below. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1701 that the button is in advance, one of the advancement selection tables shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 80 is selected and set, as in S1702 of FIG. 119 ( S1702).

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, two pseudo sequences, three pseudo sequences, four pseudo sequences, or five pseudo sequences. At the same time, it is determined how many times the fluctuation has occurred based on the time value of the fluctuation time timer (the elapsed time from the fluctuation start time in the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation state in the pseudo-series, so Based on the elapsed time, it is possible to specify the number of times of fluctuation in the pseudo-ream, and the number of times of fluctuation may be specified based on the value of the above-described re-variation number counter). The data table used to determine the notice message of the button notice at the time of this change is selected and set (S1703a). More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S1702, the fluctuation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, and pseudo-continuous 5 Only) and the notice message determination table corresponding to the current number of changes are selected and set. As a result, the notice message determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, as in S1704 of FIG. 119, numerical data indicating the random number SR8 for determining the notice message of button notice is extracted (S1704). Then, using the data table set in S1703a, based on the random value extracted in S1704, a button warning notice pattern (notice message) in the current variation is selected and determined (S1705a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S1705a, the prohibition process as described above (notice message prohibition process) is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM, and is used for prohibition processing (preliminary message prohibition processing) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time for the button notice, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability of the big hit decreases as the order of the variable times decreases. Note that such prohibition processing may not be performed when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected in the button notice. Next, in order to use for such prohibition processing (preliminary message prohibition processing), the data of the previous notice pattern (previous notice message) determined in S1705a is updated and stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM (S1724). 1 The notice effect determination process is terminated.

  When the process proceeds to S1706, it is determined whether or not the type of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice has been determined as the basic development notice, as in S1706 of FIG. 119 (S1706). If it is determined in S1706 that it is not a basic advance notice, the process proceeds to S1711 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1701 that it is a basic advance notice, any of the notice selection tables shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 81 is selected and set, as in S1707 of FIG. (S1707).

  Then, as in the case of S1703a described above, referring to the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern to be executed is no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, and five pseudo-continuations. The data used to determine which time the change occurs, to determine the number of changes based on the time value of the change time timer, and to determine the notice step of the basic advance notice at the time of the change The table is selected and determined (S1708a). More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S1707, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, and pseudo-continuous 5 Time) and the notice step determination table corresponding to the current number of fluctuations are selected and set. As a result, the notice step determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, similarly to S1709 of FIG. 119, numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the advance step of the basic advance notice is extracted (S1709). Then, using the data table set in 708a, based on the random value extracted in S1709, a notice pattern (notice step) of the basic development notice in the current change is selected and determined (S1710a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S1710a, the prohibition process as described above (notice step prohibition process) is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (notice step prohibition process) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern of each change time for the basic advance notice, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability of the big hit decreases as the order of the change times progresses. Next, in order to use such a prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process), the data of the previous notice pattern (previous notice step) determined in S1710a is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM (S1724). 1 The notice effect determination process is terminated.

  When the process proceeds to S1711, it is determined whether or not the kind of notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined to be reach branch notice, similarly to S1711 of FIG. 119 (S1711). If it is determined in S1711 that it is not a reach branch notice, the process proceeds to S1716 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1701 that it is a reach branch notice, any of the notice selection tables shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 91 is selected and set as in S1712 of FIG. (S1712).

  Then, as in the case of S1703a described above, referring to the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern to be executed is no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, and pseudo-series 5 Data used to determine which time the change occurs, determine the number of changes based on the time value of the change time timer, and determine the advance step of reach branch notice at the time of the change The table is selected and determined and set (S1713a). More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S1712, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, and pseudo-continuous 5 Time) and the notice step determination table corresponding to the current number of fluctuations are selected and set. As a result, the notice step determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, similarly to S1714 of FIG. 119, numerical data indicating the random number value SR21 for determining the notice step of reach branch notice is extracted (S1714). Then, using the data table set in 713a, a notice pattern (notice step) of reach branch notice in the current variation is selected and determined based on the random number value extracted in S1714 (S1715a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S1715a, the prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (notice step prohibition process) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern of each variable time for the reach branch notice, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability of the big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, in order to use such a prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process), the data of the previous notice pattern (previous notice step) determined in S1715a is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM (S1724). 1 The notice effect determination process is terminated.

  Further, the process proceeds to S1716 when the type of the notice to be executed as the first step-up notice is determined to be the button branch notice, and similarly to S1716 of FIG. 119, (A) to (C) of FIG. Is selected and set (S1716).

  Then, as in the case of S1703a described above, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, or three pseudo-continuations. At the same time, the number of times of change is determined based on the measured value of the change time timer, and the data table used for determining the notice step of the button branch notice at the time of change is selected and set (S1717a). ). More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S1716, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, and pseudo-continuous 5 Time) and the advance notice determination table corresponding to the current number of changes are selected and set. As a result, the notice step determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, as in S1718 of FIG. 119, numerical data indicating the random number value SR22 for determining the notice step of button branch notice is extracted (S1718). Then, using the data table set in 713a, based on the random number value extracted in S1718, a button branch notice notice pattern (notice step) in the current variation is selected and determined (S1719a), and the process proceeds to S17190a. In the determination of the notice pattern in S1719a, the prohibition process as described above (notice step prohibition process) is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (notice step prohibition process) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. As a result, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time for the button branch notice, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability of the big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses.

  Next, when the process proceeds to S17190a, it is determined whether or not the notice pattern of the current variation determined in S1719 is “button branch” (S17190a). If it is determined in S17190a that it is not “button branching”, the first notice effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S17190a that it is “button branch”, the post-button branch notice content selection table shown in FIG. 97A is set (S1720) as in S1720 of FIG. 119.

  Then, the following processing is performed in S1721a. Referring to the received variation pattern command, whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to any variation pattern of no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, or five pseudo-continuous At the same time, based on the current notice pattern determined in S1719a, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a “button branch” is to be made at the current fluctuation time. Further, using the post-button branch notice content selection table set in S1720, the variation pattern determined as described above (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, and five pseudo-continuations). ) And information on whether or not “button branch” occurs at the current variation time determined as described above, it is necessary to display according to the button operation when “button branch” occurs at the current variation time. A notice content determination table for determining a certain notice content is determined from the above three tables and set. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value SR23 for determining the notice content after button branching is extracted (S1722).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S1722, the notice content after the button branch at the current fluctuation time is determined and stored using the notice content determination table set in S1721a (S1723a). Then, in order to use it for the above-mentioned notice step prohibition process, the data of the notice pattern (previous notice step) determined in S1719a is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM, and is also used for the aforementioned notice content prohibition process. Therefore, the data of the notice content (previous notice content) determined in S1723a is updated and stored in the previous notice content storage area of the RAM (S1724). Thereafter, the first notice effect determination process is terminated.

  After S535, the same processing as S539 of FIG. 117 is performed, and any of the notice reliability selection tables shown in FIGS. 86A to 86D is selected and set as the notice reliability selection table. .

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, or five pseudo-series. At the same time, the number of times of change is determined based on the measured value of the change time timer, and the data table used for determining the corresponding notice reliability display pattern at the time of change is selected and set (S540a). ). In this case, the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed is performed by the same determination as in the above-described case of S536a. More specifically, in S540a, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S539, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, four pseudo-continuous, and pseudo-continuous). 5) and only the color reliability display determination table or the pattern reliability display determination table corresponding to the current number of fluctuations are selected and set. As a result, the selected color reliability display determination table or pattern reliability display determination table differs depending on how many times the current variation is set according to the variation pattern.

  Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR10 for determining the color reliability display or the numerical data indicating the random value SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is extracted according to the type of notice (S541). Then, using the data table set in S540a, based on the random value extracted in S541, the notice reliability display pattern in the current variation is selected and determined (S542a). In the determination of the notice reliability display pattern in S542a, the prohibition process (color reliability prohibition process as described above) is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. Or pattern reliability prohibition processing) is performed. More specifically, among the first to fifth variable notification reliability display patterns, each time the variable times progress, the notification reliability display pattern of the current variation is determined for the variable times at that time. Each time the notice reliability display pattern is determined at each variable time, the previous reliability display pattern data indicating the determined notice reliability display pattern is updated and stored in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM, and the next Used for prohibition processing (color reliability prohibition processing or pattern reliability prohibition processing) when determining the notice reliability display pattern of variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice reliability display pattern for each variable time, the notice reliability display pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, for use in such prohibition processing (color reliability prohibition processing or pattern reliability prohibition processing), the notice reliability display pattern (previous color reliability display or previous pattern reliability display) determined in S542a is used. The data is updated and stored in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM (S542b), and the process proceeds to S543.

  When the processing proceeds to S543, the same processing as S543 in FIG. 118 is performed. If it is determined in S543 that the second notice effect is present, the notice selection table shown in FIGS. 99A to 99C is used as the notice selection table in accordance with the information on the display result specified based on the variation pattern. One of them is selected and set (S544).

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, two pseudo sequences, three pseudo sequences, four pseudo sequences, or five pseudo sequences. At the same time, the number of times of change is determined based on the contents of the process data, and the data table used for determining the notice pattern of the second notice effect at the time of the corresponding change is selected and set (S545a). ). In this case, as for the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed, the number of variations is determined based on the time value of the variation time timer at the time of the determination, as in S536a. It is done by doing. More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S544, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, and pseudo-continuation 5 Time) and the advance notice determination table corresponding to the current number of changes are selected and set. As a result, the notice step determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, the same processing as S546 in FIG. 118 is performed. Thereby, the numerical data indicating the random value SR13 for determining the advance step of the second step-up advance is extracted (S546). Then, using the data table set in S545a, based on the random value extracted in S546, the notice pattern of the second notice effect in the current variation is selected and determined (S547a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S547a, the prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (notice step prohibition process) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, in order to use such a prohibition process (preliminary step prohibition process), the data of the previous notice pattern (previous notice step) determined in S547a is updated and stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM (S547b), and S548. Proceed to

  When the process proceeds to S548, the same process as S548 in FIG. 118 is performed. When it is determined in S548 that the third notice effect is present, the notice selection table shown in FIGS. 103A to 103C is used as the notice selection table in accordance with the display result information specified based on the variation pattern. One of them is selected and set (S549).

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, two pseudo sequences, three pseudo sequences, four pseudo sequences, or five pseudo sequences. At the same time, it is determined how many times the fluctuation has occurred based on the time value of the fluctuation time timer (the elapsed time from the fluctuation start time in the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation state in the pseudo-series, so Based on the elapsed time, it is possible to specify the number of times of fluctuation in the pseudo-ream), and to select and determine the data table used to determine the notice pattern of the corresponding third notice effect at the time of this change Are set (S550a). In this case, the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed is performed by determining the number of variations based on the measured value of the variation time timer, as in S536a. It is. More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S549, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-series, two pseudo-series, three pseudo-series, four pseudo-series, and pseudo-series 5 Only) and the movable member operation determination table corresponding to the current number of fluctuations are selected and set. Thus, the selected movable member operation determination table differs depending on how many times the current variation is set according to the variation pattern.

  Next, processing similar to S551 in FIG. 118 is performed. Thereby, numerical data indicating the random value SR15 for determining the movable member operation is extracted (S551). Then, using the data table set in S550a, based on the random value extracted in S551, the notice pattern of the third notice effect in the current variation is selected and determined (S552a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S552a, the prohibition process (movable member operation prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. It is. More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous movable member operation storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (movable member operation prohibition process) when determining the next change time notice pattern. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, in order to use such prohibition processing (movable member operation prohibition processing), the data of the advance notice pattern (previous movable member operation) determined in S552a is updated and stored in the previous movable member operation storage area of the RAM (S552b). ), Go to S553.

  When the processing proceeds to S553, the same processing as S553 in FIG. 118 is performed. When it is determined in S553 that there is no fourth notice effect, the process proceeds to S557c described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S553 that the fourth notice effect is present, the notice selection shown in FIGS. 107A to 107C is made as a notice selection table in accordance with the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern. One of the tables is selected and set (S554).

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo sequence, two pseudo sequences, three pseudo sequences, four pseudo sequences, or five pseudo sequences. At the same time, the number of times of change is determined based on the time value of the change time timer, and the data table used for determining the notice pattern of the fourth notice effect at the time of the corresponding change is selected and set. (S565a). In this case, as for the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed, the number of variations is determined based on the time value of the variation time timer at the time of the determination, as in S536a. It is done by doing. More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S554, the fluctuation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, and pseudo-continuation 5 Only) and the mini character display determination table corresponding to the current number of changes are selected and set. As a result, the selected mini character display determination table differs depending on how many times the current fluctuation is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, the same processing as S556 in FIG. 118 is performed. Thereby, numerical data indicating the random character value SR17 for determining the mini character display is extracted (S556). Then, using the data table set in S565a, based on the random value extracted in S556, the notice pattern of the fourth notice effect in the current variation is selected and determined (S557a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S557a, the prohibition process (mini-character display prohibition process) as described above is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. . More specifically, among the first to fifth notice patterns of fluctuation times, the notice pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the current fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time. The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous mini character display storage area of the RAM, and is used for the prohibition process (mini character display prohibition process) when determining the next change notice pattern. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, for use in such prohibition processing (mini character display prohibition processing), the data of the notice pattern (previous mini character display) determined in S557a is updated and stored in the previous mini character display storage area of the RAM (S557b), and S557c. Proceed to

  When the process proceeds to S557c, it is determined whether or not it is the start of re-variation of the pseudo-series by performing the same process as S844a (S557c). Specifically, in S557c, based on the timing for specifying the start time of the re-variation predetermined for each variation pattern of the pseudo-series, that is, the time for specifying the start time of each re-change from the start time of the change display, The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether or not the time of the last re-variation in the pseudo-series has been reached, based on the time value of the variation time timer, so that the last re-variation in the pseudo-series is started. Determine whether or not. The fifth notice effect is an effect that is executed after the reach state, and it is sufficient to determine the notice pattern at the start of the last re-variation in the quasi-ream. If so, the notice setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S557c that it is the time of the last re-variation start in the pseudo-ream, the process proceeds to S558 to determine the notice pattern.

  When the processing proceeds to S558, the same processing as S558 to S562 in FIG. 118 is performed. Accordingly, the notice pattern of the group notice effect after the reach state is determined and stored in the same manner as S558 to S562 described above. After S562, the notice setting process is terminated.

  By performing the processing as described above, in the second embodiment, at each fluctuation of the pseudo-series, the notice pattern (the notice message of the button notice, First step up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) notice step, second step up notice (monitor notice) notice step, movable member action of movable member notice, and mini character notice of mini character notice ) And a notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display, pattern reliability display) can be selected and determined. In addition, according to the notice setting process of FIGS. As shown in, for each fluctuation time during the display of the fluctuation display that is a pseudo-continuous, the warning pattern (button advance notice or first step up notice (basic advance notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) notice By determining the pattern, the notice pattern of the second step-up notice, the notice pattern of the movable member notice, and the notice pattern of the mini character notice, the control burden (processing burden) of the effect control microcomputer 100 before the start of the variable display is determined. ) Kill. In addition, according to the notice setting processing of FIGS. 137 and 138, as shown in S539 to S542b, the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability) of each change time is displayed for each change time during the display of the change display that becomes a pseudo-continuous. By determining the degree display pattern or the pattern reliability display pattern), it is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 before the start of the variable display.

  In the second embodiment described above, when performing a notice effect, a notice pattern for the same type of notice effect is determined using the same notice pattern determination table at each re-variation during the variation display by the change pattern. An example was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data for specifying the type of the notice effect as described above is not stored. The notice pattern for the notice effect may be determined.

  Next, in the second embodiment, an example of performing a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages as described as a modification in the first embodiment will be described.

  Such a button branch notice effect developed in two stages may be executed instead of the button branch notice developed in one stage described above. In addition, such a button branch notice that develops in two stages (also referred to as a two-stage button branch notice) is provided together with the button branch notice that develops in one stage (also referred to as a one-stage button branch notice). It may be executed based on such selection. For example, in the notice step determination table as shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, in addition to the button branch notice, a selection item for two-stage button branch notice is provided and the value of SR22 is allocated and selected as the button branch notice. You may do it. 95 and 96, a data table for selecting a one-step button branch notice and a two-stage button branch notice when a button branch is selected is provided. May be selected based on a random value using the data table, when either the one-step button branch notice or the two-stage button branch notice is selected.

  Specifically, in the first notice announcement effect determination process described above with reference to FIG. 139, in each of the continuous first operation notice effect and second operation notice effect based on the random number SR23 for determining the notice content of the button branch notice step. A notice content determination table for determining the display contents to be displayed each time a variable display is performed is provided, and when it is decided to perform a notice effect with a button branch continuous notice pattern in the pseudo-series, the notice contents are determined. Using the table, display contents to be displayed in each of the first operation advance notice effect and the second operation advance notice effect are determined each time the variable display is performed. An operation effective period is provided for each of the first operation advance notice effect and the second operation advance notice effect, and the operation button 30 is operated within the operation effective period for the first operation advance notice effect in the operation effect process described above. In addition, the display contents determined for the first operation advance notice effect are displayed, and on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated within the operation valid period for the first operation advance notice effect, the second operation advance notice effect is provided. The operation valid period is set so that the second operation notice effect can be executed. That is, only when the operation button 30 is operated within the operation valid period for the first operation advance notice effect, the second operation advance notice effect is executed. It should be noted that in such a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages, regarding the determination of the display contents to be displayed in each of the continuous first operation notice effect and the second operation notice effect, once in the notice content determination table, Depending on the combination of the display contents in the first operation notice effect and the display contents in the second operation notice effect determined in the above, the reliability of the jackpot may be set differently. Specifically, for example, the following configuration is used. For the display contents in the first operation notice effect, for example, one of A and B display contents can be selected so that the reliability of the jackpot is display contents A> display contents B. For the display contents in the operation announcement effect, for example, either C or D can be selected so that the reliability of the jackpot is display contents C> display contents D. Then, for example, the reliability of the jackpot for the combination of the display contents in the first operation notice effect and the display contents in the second operation notice effect is selected, and the display content B is selected in the first operation notice effect. After that, the combination in which the display content D is selected in the second operation advance notice effect> the combination in which the display content D is selected in the second operation advance notice effect after the display content A is selected in the first operation advance notice effect. Set to display contents. In this way, even if a display with low reliability of the jackpot is performed in the first operation announcement effect, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot increases depending on the display in the second operation announcement effect. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered by the notice effect.

  If such control is performed, as in the case of the first embodiment, after the first operation notice effect is executed in response to the button operation being performed when the operation notice effect is selected, the button is further displayed. Since a special notice effect (special operation notice effect) is executed on the condition that the operation has been performed, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game and to further enhance the interest of the game. Can do. It should be noted that such a button branch notice effect that develops in two stages is not limited to one that develops in two stages, and may be in any number of stages as long as it develops in a plurality of stages.

  Note that the notice effect that develops in a plurality of stages in response to the button operation may be executed in the effect of the button notice shown in FIG. 70 described above.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, button notice, first step up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step up notice, movable member notice, and mini character notice Using a data table for determining the number of notice patterns provided for each change time for the form of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step, movable member operation, mini character display) at the time of each fluctuation of the pseudo-ream An example is shown. In the third embodiment, an example in which the mode of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step, movable member operation, mini character display) at the time of each change of the pseudo-series is collectively determined by one data table for each change time explain. In the third embodiment, an example will be described in which three messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” are used as the notice message in order to clarify the explanation regarding the button notice. As in the first embodiment, the above-described five notice messages may be used as the notice message. In the third embodiment described below, when various control data such as various notice patterns are determined for 1 to 5 pseudo-continuations, the control data is determined once and the pseudo-continuations are performed twice. An example will be described in which common data is used to determine the control data, and common data is used to determine the control data for the three pseudo-continuations and the control data for the four pseudo-continuations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various control data are determined using different data for each number of pseudo-continuations in order to determine various control data such as the notice pattern for each of the pseudo-continuous 1 to pseudo-continuous 5 times. You may do it.

  In the third embodiment, parts different from the first and second embodiments will be mainly described. A notice selection table shown in FIG. 140 is used instead of the notice selection table shown in FIG. In addition, a notice selection table shown in FIG. 145 is used instead of the notice selection table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice selection table (a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after the notice pattern type is determined) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 140, (A) shows a big hit button notice selection table. In FIG. 140, (B) shows a button advance notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 140, (C) shows a non-reach off button notice selection table. The notice selection tables of (A) to (C) are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. In FIG. 140, (D) shows a first step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit. In FIG. 140, (E) shows the first step-up notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. In FIG. 140, (F) shows the first step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach. The notice selection tables of (D) to (F) are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 81 (A) to (C). Here, for the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), the basic development notice is used as a representative example, and the notice pattern at each fluctuation of the pseudo-series is summarized for each fluctuation time. An example in which the data table is determined in a batch will be described.

  The jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table as a notice pattern decision table used for the determination. In the big hit button notice selection table, the data is selected so that different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. It is set.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice selection table shown in (A), the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-continuous” or “twice pseudo-continuous” is designated, the first notice message batch determination table 203A shown in FIG. 141 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. Therefore, the second notice message batch determination table 203B shown in FIG. 141 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “five pseudo-continuations” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth variations, it is shown in FIG. The third notice message batch determination table 203C is selected.

  The reach failure button notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when the button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the reach deviation variation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is specified. It is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table used for determining a particular notice pattern. In the reach failure button notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach button notice selection table shown in (B), the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D shown in FIG. 142 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. Therefore, the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E shown in FIG. 142 is selected.

  The non-reach miss button notice selection table shown in (C) shows that a button notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a non-reach miss change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data may be set as follows.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” or “twice pseudo-ream” is designated, the sixth notification message determination table 203F shown in FIG. 142 is selected.

  The first step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit shown in (D) is when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation display result of “big hit” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table as a notice pattern determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the first step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit, different notice step batch decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  In the big hit first step-up notice selection table shown in (D), specifically, the notice step batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the first notice step batch determination table 204A shown in FIG. 143 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” or “pseudo-continuous four times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, in order to collectively determine each of the first to fourth notice patterns, The second notice step batch determination table 204B shown in FIG. 143 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “five pseudo-reams” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-reams, FIG. 143 is shown in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to fifth variations. The third notice step batch determination table 204C is selected.

  The first step-up notice selection table at the time of missed reach shown in (E) indicates that the first step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a reach-missed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach missed” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the first button notice selection table at the time of reach detachment, a different notice step batch decision table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the first step-up advance notice selection table at the time of the missed reach shown in (E), the advance notice batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the fourth notice step batch determination table 204D shown in FIG. 144 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. Therefore, the fifth notice step batch determination table 204E shown in FIG. 144 is selected.

  The first step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach deviation shown in (F) shows the first step-up notice as the notice pattern type when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table to be used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the first step-up advance notice selection table at the time of non-reach, different notice step batch determination tables differ according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data may be set so as to select.

  Specifically, in the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (F), the notice step batch decision table is selected as follows. For example, when the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” or “twice pseudo-ream” is designated, the sixth notice message determination table 204F shown in FIG. 144 is selected.

  Next, the contents of the first notice message batch determination table 203A to the third notice message batch determination table 203C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice message batch determination table 203A to the third notice message batch determination table 203C. In the case of the third embodiment, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected and used as the notice message.

  In FIG. 141, (A) to (C) show the first notice message batch determination table 203A to the third notice message batch determination table 203C. In each notice message batch determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8, the display contents of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. Yes.

  In the first notice message batch determination table 203A in (A), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 1-1 to 1-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The first notice message batch determination table 203A is set so that any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected as the first and second notice messages. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous”, any one of “. In the first notice message batch determination table 203A, numerical data is set so that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ FEVER ”.

  Note that “...” Of the notice messages used in the first notice message batch determination table 203 </ b> A may not be selected. In that way, when a big hit is caused by the fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo-ream”, the player is given the impression that the button notice is not executed or that the notice message is not displayed by the button notice. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice from being lowered excessively.

  In the second notice message batch determination table 203B in (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 2-1 to 2-5 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the second notice message batch determination table 203B, in the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. It is set to do. Also, for the third and fourth fluctuations, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Has been. In the first and second fluctuations, “...” Is set to have a higher selection ratio than “CHANCE” and “FEVER”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “CHANCE” and “FEVER” are set to have a higher selection ratio than “...”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” or “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “...” Is easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “CHANCE” in the third and fourth fluctuations. Or “FEVER” is easily selected.

  In the third notice message batch determination table 203C in (C), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 3-1 to 3-7 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the third notice message batch determination table 203C, “...” And “CHANCE” are determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in each of the first, second, third, and fourth variations. Is set so that any of the notice messages is selected. In addition, the fifth change is set so that one of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. . In the first and second fluctuations, “...” Is set to have a higher selection ratio than “CHANCE”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, the ratio at which “CHANCE” is selected is set higher than that in the first and second fluctuations. In the fifth variation, “CHANCE” and “FEVER” are set to have a higher selection ratio than “...”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, “...” Is easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “CHANCE” in the third and fourth fluctuations compared to the first and second fluctuations. ”Is selected, and“ CHANCE ”or“ FEVER ”is easily selected in the fifth variation.

  Next, the contents of the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D to the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F used when the variation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D to the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F.

  In FIG. 142, (A) to (C) show fourth notice message batch determination table 203D to sixth notice message batch determination table 203F. In each notice message batch determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8, the display contents of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. Yes.

  In the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D in (A), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 4-1 to 4-2 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The fourth notice message batch determination table 203D is set so that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first and second notice messages. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “two quasi-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D, numerical data is set such that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (A), in the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D, the ratio at which “...” Is selected is higher than that in the first notice message batch determination table 203A in the case of a big hit. SR8 numerical data is set.

  In the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E in (B), any of the notice patterns to which the setting pattern numbers 5-1 to 5-3 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in the first, second, third, and fourth fluctuations. Is set to be selected. In the first and second fluctuations, “...” Is set to have a higher selection ratio than “CHANCE”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, the ratio at which “CHANCE” is selected is set higher than that in the first and second fluctuations. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” and “pseudo sequence 4 times”, “...” Is easily selected in the first and second variations, and “CHANCE” is easily selected. As shown in (B), in the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E, the ratio at which “... SR8 numerical data is set.

  In the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F in (C), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 7-1 to 7-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The seventh notice message batch determination table 203G is set so that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first and second notice messages. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “two quasi-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F, numerical data is set such that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (C), the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F has a higher ratio of selecting “...” Than the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D when the reach is lost. The numerical data of SR8 is set in

  Next, the contents of the first notice step collective decision table 204A to the third notice step collective decision table 204C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice step collective decision table 204A to the third notice step collective decision table 204C.

  In FIG. 143, (A) to (C) show first notice step collective decision table 204A to third notice step collective decision table 204C. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the first notice step batch decision table 204A in (A), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The In the first notice step collective decision table 204A, as the first and second notice steps, one of the notice steps “None (do not display the notice step)”, “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected. It is set to be done. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “two quasi-continuous”, one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the first notice step batch determination table 204A, numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting the notice step is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”.

  It should be noted that “none (do not display the notice step)” of the notice steps used in the first notice step batch determination table 204A may not be selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first step-up notice from being executed when the big hit is caused by the variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” or “twice pseudo-ream”, and the reliability of the notice is improved. It is possible to prevent excessive reduction. Further, since the first notice step batch decision table 204A is a table for determining the notice step when a big hit is made, data may be set so that Step 3 can be selected.

  In the second notice step batch decision table 204B of (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 10-1 to 10-6 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the second notice step batch determination table 204B, for the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step 1”, and “Step 2” is performed based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to be selected. The third and fourth fluctuations are set so that one of “step 2” and “step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio of “Step 2”> “Step 1”> “None” is set. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” and “Step 1” are not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step 3”> “Step 2”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” and “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “step 2” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step 3” in the third and fourth fluctuations. "Is most easily selected.

  In the third notice step batch decision table 204C in (C), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 11-1 to 11-9 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the third notice step batch determination table 204C, for the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step 1”, and “Step 2” is performed based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to be selected. For the third and fourth fluctuations, a setting is made so that any one of the “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3” notice steps is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Has been. The fifth change is set so that either of “Step 2” and “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio of “Step 2”> “Step 1”> “None” is set. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step 2”> “Step 1”> “Step 3”. In the fifth variation, “None” and “Step 1” are not selected, and the selected ratio is set in a relationship of “Step 3”> “Step 2”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, “step 2” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step 2” is most easily selected in the third and fourth fluctuations, In the fifth variation, “Step 3” is more easily selected than the third and fourth variations.

  Next, the contents of the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D to the sixth notice step collective decision table 204F used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out of reach and non-reach out of place) will be described. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D to the sixth notice step collective decision table 204F.

  In FIG. 144, (A) to (C) show the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D to the sixth notice step collective decision table 204F. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the fourth notice step batch decision table 204D in (A), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 12-1 and 12-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D, a setting is made so that one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected as the first and second notice steps. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” variation pattern, either “none” or “step 1” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the fourth notice step batch determination table 204D, numerical data is set such that the ratio of the notice step to be selected is “none”> “step 1”. In the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D, the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than the first notice step collective decision table 204A in the case of a big hit, and “step 1” and “step 2”. The numerical value data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting is lower (step 2 is not selected, but step 2 may be selected at a lower ratio than the first notice step batch determination table 204A). Has been.

  In the fifth notice step batch decision table 204E in (B), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 13-1 to 13-5 are assigned is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fifth notice step batch determination table 204E, for the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step 1”, and “Step 2” is performed based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to be selected. The third and fourth fluctuations are set so that one of “Step 1” and “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “Step 3” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in a relationship of “None”> “Step 1”> “Step 2”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” and “Step 3” are not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step 1”> “Step 2”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” or “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, “none” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step 1” in the third and fourth fluctuations. Is most easily selected. Also, in the fifth notice step collective decision table 204E, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than that in the second notice step collective decision table 204B at the time of a big hit. Yes.

  In the sixth notice step batch decision table 204F in (C), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 15-1 and 15-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the seventh notice step collective decision table 204G, a setting is made so that one of the “None” and “Step 1” notice steps is selected as the first and second notice steps. Therefore, when the variation pattern is “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” with non-reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the sixth notice step batch determination table 204F, numerical data is set so that the ratio of the notice step to be selected is “none”> “step 1”. Also, in the sixth advance notice step collective decision table 204F, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than the fourth advance notice step collective decision table 204D when the reach is lost. Has been.

  In the third embodiment, regarding the button notice, in the step corresponding to S1702 shown in the first embodiment, the notice pattern type information and the display result information specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, reach out, non- In accordance with the “reach out of reach”, any of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 140A to 140C is selected and set as the notice selection table. In the third embodiment, the first step-up notice (the basic development notice is a representative example) is specified based on the notice pattern type information and the variation pattern in the step corresponding to S1707 shown in the first embodiment. 140D is selected and determined as the notice selection table according to the display result information (big hit, reach out of reach, non-reach out of view) as shown in FIG. 140 (D) to (F). To do.

  Next, in the third embodiment, regarding the button notice, in the step corresponding to S1703 shown in the first embodiment, using the notice selection table determined in S1702, a variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, pseudo-continuation 2). Notification pattern of the first notification effect at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations required for the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern according to the first, fifth, fifth, fifth) As a data table used for determining the one of the data tables shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, one notice message batch determination table is selected and set. In the third embodiment, the first step-up notice (basic development notice is a representative example) is executed using the notice selection table determined in S1707 in the step corresponding to S1708 shown in the first embodiment. Depending on the variation pattern (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, four pseudo-continuations, five pseudo-continuations), the first to fifth variations required for the variation display in the variation pattern As a data table used for determining the notice pattern of each of the first notice effects, one notice step collective decision table out of the data tables shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 is selected, determined, and set.

  Next, in the third embodiment, regarding button notification, in the step corresponding to S1704 illustrated in the first embodiment, numerical data indicating numerical data indicating a random value SR8 for determining a notification message according to the type of notification. To extract. In the third embodiment, regarding the first step-up notice (basic development notice is a representative example), in the step corresponding to S1709 shown in the first embodiment, the first step-up notice is made according to the type of notice. Numerical data indicating the random number SR9 for determining the notice step is extracted.

  Next, in the third embodiment, regarding the button notice, in the step corresponding to S1705 shown in the first embodiment, it is necessary among the first to fifth fluctuations based on the random number value extracted as described above. The notice pattern of the fluctuating times is determined collectively using one data table set as described above, and the decided notice pattern is stored. Further, in the third embodiment, regarding the first step-up notice (basic development notice is a representative example), in the step corresponding to S1710 shown in the first embodiment, 1 is determined based on the random number value extracted as described above. Of the first to fifth fluctuations, the required notice pattern of the fluctuating times is collectively determined using one data table set as described above, and the decided notice pattern is stored.

  In the third embodiment, for the first step-up notice, a basic development notice is used as a representative example, and a plurality of notice pattern determination data is provided for each change number of notice pattern modes at the time of each change of the pseudo-series. Although an example of determination using a table has been described, for reach branch notices and button branch notices, similarly, the notice pattern at the time of each change of the pseudo-series is summarized for each change time in one data table. This is determined using a data table for determining the notice pattern to be determined.

  Next, with respect to the notice pattern of the reach branch notice, in the same manner as the basic development notice described above, the form of the notice pattern (notification step) for each fluctuation time of the pseudo-continuous is collectively shown in one data table for each fluctuation time. An example of determination will be described. As for the reach branch notice, as in the case of the basic development notice, for example, as shown in (D) to (E) of FIG. 140, the notice selection table is divided into a big hit, a reach outage, and a non-reach outage. Is provided. As in the case of the basic advance notice, the notice step collective decision table used when the variable display result is a big hit has the same configuration as the notice step collective decision table shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. Preliminary step batches in which SR “Step 1”, “Step 2”, “Step 3A”, and “Step 3B” can be selected in accordance with the number of pseudo-series fluctuations at a rate as shown in the embodiment. By providing the determination table and executing the same processing as in the case of the basic advance notice, the notice pattern is determined according to the extracted value of the random value SR21.

  Next, regarding the notice pattern of the button branch notice, in the same way as the basic development notice described above, the form of the notice pattern (notification step) for each fluctuation time of the pseudo-series is collectively collected by one data table for each fluctuation time. An example of determination will be described. As for the button branch notice, as in the case of the basic development notice, for example, as shown in (D) to (E) of FIG. 140, the notice selection table is divided into a big hit time, a reach off time, and a non-reach off time. Is provided. As in the case of the basic advance notice, the notice step collective decision table used when the variable display result is a big hit has the same configuration as the notice step collective decision table shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. Provided advance notice batch decision table that enables selection of “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” according to the number of pseudo-series fluctuations at the rate shown in the embodiment, and basic development By executing the same processing as in the case of the advance notice, the advance notice pattern is determined according to the extracted value of the random number SR22. In addition, regarding the button branch notice, a separate data table for selecting and determining the notice contents as described above is provided when “button branch” is selected, and the notice as described above is provided when “button branch” is selected. The notice content is determined by performing processing for determining the content. Further, instead of providing a data table for selecting and determining the notice contents separately from the notice step batch decision table, “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” are selected according to the number of pseudo-series fluctuations. In addition to the selection, a data table for collectively determining the notice contents to be displayed after the button branch may be provided.

  In the third embodiment, the color reliability display effect and the pattern reliability display effect as shown in the first embodiment are similarly performed. As for each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display, as shown in the first embodiment, the reliability display modes (first color display to third color display, first pattern display) at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series. To the third pattern display) may be determined by using a plurality of data tables for determining the reliability display provided for each fluctuation time, and as in the determination of the notice pattern mode in the third embodiment. At the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the reliability display mode may be determined collectively by one data table for each variation time. It should be noted that, in this way, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the reliability display mode may be collectively determined by one data table for each variation time in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after determining whether or not to execute the second notice effect according to the third embodiment. FIG. In FIG. 145, (A) shows the second step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit. In FIG. 145, (B) shows a second step-up notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 145, (C) shows a second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (C).

  The second step up notice selection table at the time of big hit shown in (A) is when the second step up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the big hit fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table as a notice pattern determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the big hit second step-up notice selection table, different notice step batch decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the second step up notice selection table at the time of big hit shown in (A), the notice step batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the seventh advance notice batch determination table 209A shown in FIG. 146 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. Therefore, the eighth notice step batch determination table 209B shown in FIG. 146 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “five pseudo-reams” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-reams, FIG. 146 is shown in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to fifth variations. The ninth advance notice batch determination table 209C is selected.

  In the second step-up advance notice selection table shown in (B), the second step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the second step-up notice table at the time of reach detachment, a different notice step batch determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the second step-up notice selection table at the time of a missed reach shown in (B), the notice step batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the tenth notice step batch determination table 209D shown in FIG. 147 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. Therefore, the eleventh notice step batch determination table 209E shown in FIG. 147 is selected.

  The second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach deviation shown in (C) indicates that the second step-up notice is selected as the notice pattern type when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern whose variation display result is “non-reach out” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table to be used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the second step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach deviation, different notice step batch determination tables differ according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. The data may be set to select.

  In the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice step batch decision table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the twelfth notice step batch determination table 209F shown in FIG. 147 is selected.

  Next, the contents of the seventh notice step collective decision table 209A to the ninth notice step collective decision table 209C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventh notice step collective decision table 209A to the ninth notice step collective decision table 209C.

  In FIG. 146, (A) to (C) show the seventh notice step collective decision table 209A to the ninth notice step collective decision table 209C. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the seventh notice step batch decision table 209A of (A), any one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 17-1, 17-2, 17-3 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The In the seventh advance notice step batch determination table 209A, the advance notice steps of “none (do not display the advance notice step)”, “step A”, and “step B” are selected as the first and second notice steps. It is set to be done. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “two quasi-continuous”, any of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the seventh notice step batch determination table 209A, numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting the notice step is “none”> “step A”> “step B”. Note that the seventh advance notice step batch determination table 209A is a table for determining the advance notice step when a big hit is made, so that data may be set so that Step C can be selected.

  In the eighth notice step batch decision table 209B of (B), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 18-1 to 18-6 are assigned is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the eighth notice step batch determination table 209B, for the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step A”, and “Step B” is performed based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to be selected. The third and fourth fluctuations are set so that one of “Step B” and “Step C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “step C” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in a relationship of “step B”> “step A”> “none”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” and “Step A” are not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step C”> “Step B”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” or “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “step B” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step C” in the third and fourth fluctuations. "Is most easily selected.

  In the ninth notice step batch determination table 209C of (C), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 19-1 to 19-9 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the ninth notice step batch determination table 209C, for the first and second fluctuations, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step A”, and “Step B” is performed based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to be selected. In addition, for the third and fourth fluctuations, a setting is made so that any one of “Step A”, “Step B”, and “Step C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Has been. The fifth change is set so that one of “Step B” and “Step C” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “Step C” is not selected, and the ratio of “Step A”> “Step B”> “None” is set. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step B”> “Step A” = “Step C”. In the fifth change, “None” and “Step A” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step C”> “Step B” is set. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 5 times”, “step B” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step B” is most easily selected in the third and fourth fluctuations. In the fifth variation, “Step C” is easier to select than the third and fourth variations.

  Next, the contents of the tenth notice step collective decision table 209D to the twelfth notice step collective decision table 209F used when the fluctuation display result is out of order (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the tenth notice step collective decision table 209D to the twelfth notice step collective decision table 209F.

  In FIG. 147, (A) to (C) show the tenth notice step collective decision table 209D to the twelfth notice step collective decision table 209F. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the tenth notice step batch decision table 209D of (A), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 20-1 and 20-2 are assigned is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the tenth notice step batch determination table 209D, a setting is made such that either one of “None” and “Step A” is selected as the first and second notice steps. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” variation pattern, either “none” or “step A” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the tenth notice step batch determination table 209D, numerical data is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step A”. Further, in the tenth notice step collective decision table 209D, the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than in the seventh notice step collective decision table 209A when a big hit is made, and “step A” and “step B” are selected. The numerical value data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selection is lower (step B is not selected, but step B may be selected at a lower ratio than the seventh notice step batch determination table 209A). Has been.

  In the eleventh notice step batch determination table 209E in (B), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 21-1 to 21-5 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the eleventh notice step batch determination table 209E, the first, second, third, and fourth fluctuations are expressed as “none”, “step A”, and “step B” based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set so that any of the notice steps is selected. The third and fourth fluctuations are set so that one of the “step A” and “step B” notice steps is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first and second fluctuations, “Step C” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in a relationship of “None”> “Step A”> “Step B”. In the third and fourth fluctuations, “None” and “Step C” are not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step A”> “Step B”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” or “pseudo-continuous 4 times”, “none” is most easily selected in the first and second fluctuations, and “step A” in the third and fourth fluctuations. Is most easily selected. In addition, in the eleventh notice step collective decision table 209E, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than that in the eighth notice step collective decision table 209B in the case of a big hit. Yes.

  In the twelfth notice step batch decision table 209F in (C), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 23-1, 23-2 are assigned is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the twelfth notice step batch determination table 209F, a setting is made so that one of the notice steps “None” and “Step A” is selected as the first and second notice steps. Therefore, when the variation pattern is “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” in non-reach, either “none” or “step A” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the twelfth notice step batch determination table 209F, numerical data is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step A”. Also, in the twelfth notice step batch determination table 209F, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than the tenth notice step batch determination table 209D when the reach is lost. ing.

  In the third embodiment, in the step corresponding to S544 shown in the first embodiment, information on the presence / absence of the second notice effect and information on the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, reach miss, non-reach) In response to the error, one of the notice selection tables shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 145 is selected and set as the notice selection table.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S545 shown in the first embodiment, using the notice selection table determined in S544, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations, pseudo-continuation 4). As a data table used to determine the notice pattern of each second notice effect at the time of the first to fifth fluctuations required for the fluctuation display with the fluctuation pattern according to the fifth and fifth pseudo-continuations) One notice step batch decision table out of the data tables shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 is selected and set.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S546 shown in the first embodiment, numerical data indicating the random value SR13 for determining the advance step for the second step-up advance notice is extracted according to the type of the advance notice.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S547 shown in the first embodiment, based on the random value extracted as described above, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to fifth fluctuations is described above. Using the single data table set as described above, the decision is made collectively and the decided notice pattern is stored.

  Next, with respect to the notice pattern of the movable member notice, the form of the notice pattern (movable member operation) for each variable time of the pseudo-series is summarized by one data table for each variable time, similarly to the button notice etc. described above. An example of determining all at once will be described.

  For the movable member notice, as in the case of the button notice, for example, as shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 140, the notice selection table is divided into a big hit, a reach out, and a non-reach out. Provide. As in the case of the button notice, the movable member operation having the same configuration as (A) to (C) in FIG. 141 is used as the movable member operation batch determination table used when the variable display result is a big hit. A batch decision table is provided. As in the case of the button notice, the movable member operation having the same configuration as that shown in FIGS. 142A to 142C as the movable member operation batch determination table used when the change display result is out of place. A batch decision table is provided. As a configuration example of such a movable member operation batch determination table, for example, in FIGS. 141 (A) to (C) and FIGS. Replace “1st and 2nd movable member operation”, “3rd and 4th notification message” with “3rd and 4th movable member operation”, and “5th notification message” with “5th movable member operation”. ”Is replaced with“ movable member operation A ”,“ CHANCE ”is replaced with“ movable member operation B ”,“ FEVER ”is replaced with“ movable member operation C ”, and“ SR8 ”is replaced with“ SR15 ”. To do. Further, it is assumed that the ratio of assigning the numerical value “SR15” to the movable member operations A to C in each movable member operation batch determination table is similar to that in FIGS. 140 and 141. Then, as a process of selecting and determining the movable member operation using such a movable member operation batch determination table and the movable member operation determination random number SR15 of the movable member notification, the aforementioned button notification notification message is selected and determined. By performing the same processing as the processing to be performed, the mode of the notice pattern (movable member operation) is collectively determined by one data table for each variable time.

  Next, with regard to the notice pattern of the mini character notice, the form of the notice pattern (mini character display) for each fluctuating time of the pseudo-ream is summarized in one data table for each fluctuating time in the same manner as the button notice etc. described above. An example of determination will be described.

  For the mini character notice, as in the case of the button notice, for example, as shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 140, the notice selection table is provided separately for the big hit, when the reach is off, and when the reach is off. . As in the case of the button notice, the mini character display batch determination table having the same configuration as that shown in FIGS. 141A to 141C as the mini character display batch determination table used when the variable display result is a big hit. Set up a table. Further, as in the case of the button notice, the mini character display batch determination table having the same configuration as that shown in FIGS. 142A to 142C is used as the mini character display batch determination table used when the fluctuation display result is lost. Set up a table. As an example of the configuration of such a mini character display batch determination table, for example, in FIG. 141 (A) to (C) and FIG. 142 (A) to (C), “1st and 2nd notice message” is set to “1”. , 2nd mini character display, 3rd and 4th notice message replaced with 3rd and 4th mini character display, 5th notice message with 5th mini character display, and "..." “Display A” and “CHANCE” are replaced with “mini character display B”, “FEVER” is replaced with “mini character display C”, and “SR 8” is replaced with “SR 17”. Further, it is assumed that the ratio of the numerical value “SR17” to the mini character displays A to C in each mini character display batch determination table is similar to that in FIGS. 140 and 141. Then, using such a mini character display batch determination table and the random character SR17 for determining the mini character display for the mini character notice, the process for selecting and determining the mini character display is the same as the process for selecting and determining the notice message of the button notice described above. By performing the above process, the mode of the notice pattern (mini character display) is collectively determined by one data table for each variable time.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, at each change of the pseudo-ream, a notice message in the button notice, a notice step in the notice basic development notice as the first step up, a notice step in the reach branch notice, or a button branch One data table provided for each type of notice for each of the notice step in the notice, the notice step in the second step-up notice, the movable member operation in the notice of the movable member, and the mini character display in the notice of the mini character. Determine in a batch using. It should be noted that all of these notice types may be determined collectively using one data table provided for each variable time.

  In such a third embodiment, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the mode of the notice pattern is collectively selected for each variation time and selected and determined collectively by one data table, so that an individual data table for each variation time is obtained. As compared with the case of selecting and determining using, it is possible to reduce the number of processing steps required to select and determine the mode of the notice pattern. Thereby, the processing burden of the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first to third embodiments, the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) and step-up notice effects such as two step-up notice are provided for each of the pseudo-reams. An example has been shown in which the mode of the notice pattern at the time of change (notice message, notice step) is determined using the data table for determining the notice pattern separately provided for the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice. In the fourth embodiment, the mode of the notice pattern (notice step) of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice for each fluctuation of the pseudo-series is collectively shown in one data table for each fluctuation time. An example of determination will be described.

  In the fourth embodiment, parts different from the third embodiment will be mainly described. A notice selection table shown in FIG. 148 is used instead of the notice selection table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table (a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after the notice pattern type is determined) according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 148, (A) shows a big hit button notice selection table. In FIG. 148, (B) shows a reach failure button notice selection table. In FIG. 148, (C) shows a non-reach off button notice selection table. The notice selection tables of (A) to (C) are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 140 (A) to (C). In FIG. 148, (D) shows a step-up notice common selection table at the big hit. In FIG. 148, (E) shows a common step-up notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 148, (F) shows a step-up notice common selection table at the time of non-reach failure. These notice selection tables are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (F) and the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 145 (A) to (C). The notice selection tables of (D) to (F) are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 140 (D) to (F) and the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 145 (A) to (C). Here, with respect to the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), an example of determining a notice pattern at each fluctuation of the pseudo-series will be described using the basic development notice as a representative example.

  The big hit button notice selection table shown in (A) is the same table as the big hit button notice selection table shown in (A) of FIG. The reach-out button notice selection table shown in (B) is the same table as the reach-out button notice selection table shown in (B) of FIG. The non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C) is the same table as the non-reach out button notice selection table shown in (C) of FIG.

  The jackpot step-up notice common selection table shown in (D) is when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting a plurality of advance notice step batch determination tables as a common advance notice pattern determination table used for determining a specific advance notice pattern for the first step up advance notice and the second step up notice. Here, the multiple notice step collective decision table is a data table for collectively determining notice steps of a plurality of notice effects, that is, respective notice steps of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice. In the fourth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first step-up notice, it is also decided to execute the second step-up notice, and each notice step of these notices is stored in a plurality of notice step batch decision tables. To be selected and decided collectively. In the big hit step-up notice common selection table, a plurality of different notice step batch decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  In the big hit step-up notice common selection table shown in (D), specifically, a plurality of notice step collective decision tables as the notice step collective decision table are selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the first plural notice step batch determination table 207A shown in FIG. 149 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. For this purpose, the second plural advance notice step collective decision table 207B shown in FIG. 149 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “five pseudo-reams” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-reams, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fifth variations, FIG. The third multiple advance notice batch determination table 207C is selected.

  The reach-up step-up notice common selection table shown in (E) is when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “reach-out” is designated. FIG. 6 is a data table for selecting a plurality of advance notice step batch determination tables as a common advance notice pattern determination table used for determining specific advance notice patterns for the first step up advance notice and the second step up advance notice. In the step-up notice common selection table at the time of detachment, different multiple notice step batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set as follows.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice common selection table at the time of a detachment shown in (E), a plurality of notice step collective decision tables as the notice step collective decision table are selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the fourth multiple notice step batch determination table 207D shown in FIG. 150 is selected. Further, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence 3 times” or “pseudo sequence 4 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations are collectively determined. For this purpose, the fifth plural notice step collective decision table 207E shown in FIG. 150 is selected.

  In the non-reach miss step up notice common selection table shown in (F), when a big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “non-reach miss” is designated, the first step up notice is determined as the notice pattern type. A data table for selecting a plurality of advance notice step batch determination tables as a common advance notice pattern determination table used for determining specific advance notice patterns for the first step up advance notice and the second step up advance notice. is there. In the non-reach step-up notice common selection table, a plurality of different notice step batch determination tables that differ depending on the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. The data may be set to select.

  In the non-reach step-up notice common selection table shown in (F), specifically, a plurality of notice step collective decision tables as the notice step collective decision table are selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” or “twice quasi-continuous” is designated, the sixth multiple notice step batch determination table 207F shown in FIG. 150 is selected.

  Next, the contents of the first plurality of advance notice step collective decision tables 207A to the third plural advance notice step collective decision tables 207C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first plurality of notice step batch determination table 207A to the third plurality of notice step batch determination table 207C.

  In FIG. 149, (A) to (C) show a first plurality of advance notice step collective decision table 207A to a third plural advance notice step collective decision table 207C. In each of the multiple notice step batch determination tables, the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display content of the notice step selected for each of the first step up notice and the second step up notice (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern The relationship with the number (the setting number of the notice pattern) is shown.

  In the first plural preliminary announcement step batch determination table 207A in (A), any one of the preliminary announcement patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 51-1 to 51-5 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first plural advance notice batch determination table 207A, as the first and second notice steps, “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” are selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected. Note that the first plural notice step collective decision table 207A is a table that decides the notice step when a big hit is made, so data is set so that at least one of step 3 and step C can be selected. Also good.

  In (B) the second plurality of advance notice step batch determination table 207B, one of the advance notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 52-1 to 52-6 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the second multiple notice step collective decision table 207B, as the first and second notice steps, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that one of “none”, “step A”, and “step B” is selected. Further, in the second plural advance notice batch determination table 207B, as the third and fourth notice steps, “None”, “Step 1” to “Step 3” are selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that “None” or “Step A” to “Step C” is selected.

  In (C) the third plurality of advance notice step batch determination table 207C, one of the advance notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 53-1 to 53-9 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the third multiple notice step collective decision table 207C, as the first notice step and the second notice step, either “None” or “Step 1” is selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that either “none” or “step A” is selected. Further, in the third multiple notice step collective decision table 207C, as the third and fourth notice steps, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” for the first step-up notice is selected. The second step-up notice is set so that one of “None”, “Step A”, and “Step B” is selected. Further, in the third multiple notice step collective decision table 207C, as the fifth notice step, one of “none”, “step 2”, and “step 3” is selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that one of “none”, “step B”, and “step C” is selected.

  Next, the contents of the fourth multiple notice step collective decision table 207D to the sixth plural notice step collective decision table 207F used when the fluctuation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fourth multiple notice step collective decision table 207D to the sixth plural notice step collective decision table 207F.

  In FIG. 150, (A) to (C) show a fourth plurality of advance notice step collective decision table 207D to a sixth plural advance notice step collective decision table 207F. In each of the multiple notice step batch determination tables, the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display content of the notice step selected for each of the first step up notice and the second step up notice (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern The relationship with the number (the setting number of the notice pattern) is shown.

  In the fourth multiple notice step collective decision table 207D of (A), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 54-1 to 54-3 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fourth multiple notice step batch determination table 207D, as the first notice step and the second notice step, either “None” or “Step 1” is selected for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that either “none” or “step A” is selected.

  In (B) the fifth plural notice step collective decision table 207E, one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 55-1 to 55-4 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fifth multiple notice step batch determination table 207E, as the first and second notice steps, either “None” or “Step 1” is selected for the first step-up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that either “none” or “step A” is selected. Further, in the fifth multiple notice step collective decision table 207E, as the third and fourth notice steps, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is set for the first step up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that one of “None”, “Step A”, and “Step B” is selected.

  In the seventh multiple advance notice batch determination table 207G in (C), one of the advance notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 57-1 to 57-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the seventh multiple notice step collective decision table 207G, as the first and second notice steps, either “None” or “Step 1” is selected for the first step-up notice. The second step-up notice is set so that either “none” or “step A” is selected.

  In the first plurality of preliminary announcement step collective determination tables 207A to 207F shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the extracted value of the random value SR7 using the first preliminary announcement effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 1 to 3 times for both the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice based on the extracted value of the random value SR9. The notice pattern of each notice step is determined collectively.

  In the fourth embodiment, when it is decided to make the first step-up notice, the step corresponding to S1707 shown in the first embodiment is specified based on the decided notice pattern type information and the variation pattern. 148 (D) to (F) of FIG. 148 are selected and determined as the advance notice selection table in accordance with the display result information (big hit, miss reach, non reach reach). set. In the case of the fourth embodiment, whether or not to execute the second step-up notice is determined along with the determination of whether or not to execute the first step-up notice. Therefore, in the notice setting process, the steps related to the execution decision of the second notice effect such as S533a to S533c are not executed (not used). Further, in the case of the fourth embodiment, the second step-up advance notice pattern is selected and determined together with the first step-up advance notice pattern. Therefore, in the notice setting process, the steps relating to the notice pattern determination of the second notice effect such as S543 to S547 are not executed (not used).

  When it is decided to give the first step-up notice, it is decided that the second step-up notice is also made. At that time, in the step corresponding to S1708 shown in the first embodiment, using the common notice selection table determined in S1707, the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous, 1st step-up advance notice pattern and 2nd step-up advance notice for each of the 1st to 5th fluctuations required for the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern according to the 4th series and the 5th pseudo series) As a data table used for determining the advance notice pattern, one of the advance notice step batch decision tables of the data tables shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 is selected and set.

  Next, when it is determined to perform the first step-up notice, numerical data indicating the random number SR9 for determining the notice step is extracted in a step corresponding to S1709 shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, when it is decided to give the first step-up notice, the first to fifth times are determined based on the random number value extracted as described above in the step corresponding to S1710 shown in the first embodiment. Among the changes, the notice pattern of the first step-up notice and the notice pattern of the change times required for the second step-up notice are determined in a lump using the one data table set as described above. Memorize the notice pattern. As a result, in addition to the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice also determines the required notice pattern of the changing times out of the first to fifth changes at the same time. The pattern is stored.

  Then, the notice pattern of the first step-up notice and the notice pattern of the second step-up notice are determined at the same time, so that the processing in S543 to S547 shown in the first embodiment is not performed.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, with respect to the first step-up notice, the basic development notice is used as a representative example, and the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are used for the notice pattern (notification step) at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series. In the above description, the example in which each variation time is collectively determined by one data table has been described. Similarly, for the reach branch notice and the button branch notice, the notice pattern at the time of each change of the pseudo-ream is also shown. Each variable time is determined using a data table for determining a notice pattern that is determined collectively by one data table.

  Next, with regard to the notice pattern of the reach branch notice, in the same manner as the basic development notice described above, the manner of the notice pattern (notice step) of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice for each fluctuation of the pseudo-ream An example will be described in which each variation is collectively determined by one data table. For the reach branch notice, as in the case of the basic development notice, for example, as shown in (D) to (F) of FIG. Is provided. As in the case of the basic advance notice, the multiple notice step collective decision table used when the variable display result is a big hit has the same configuration as the plural notice step collective decision table shown in FIGS. A plurality of SRs “Step 1”, “Step 2”, “Step 3A”, and “Step 3B” can be selected in accordance with the number of pseudo-series fluctuations at a rate as shown in the first embodiment. A notice step batch decision table is provided, and a notice pattern is decided according to the extracted value of the random value SR21 by executing the same processing as in the case of the basic advance notice.

  Next, regarding the notice pattern of the button branch notice, the notice pattern (notice step) of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice for each change of the pseudo-ream, as in the basic development notice described above. An example will be described in which each variation is collectively determined by one data table. As for the button branch notice, as in the case of the basic development notice, for example, as shown in (D) to (E) of FIG. 148, the notice selection table is divided into a big hit, a reach miss, and a non-reach break. Is provided. As in the case of the basic advance notice, the multiple notice step collective decision table used when the variable display result is a big hit has the same configuration as the plural notice step collective decision table shown in FIGS. Provided with multiple notice step batch determination tables that enable selection of “step 1”, “step 2”, and “button branch” according to the number of pseudo-series fluctuations at the rate shown in the first embodiment By executing the same process as in the case of the basic advance notice, the notice pattern is determined according to the extracted value of the random value SR22. In addition, regarding the button branch notice, a separate data table for selecting and determining the notice contents as described above is provided when “button branch” is selected, and the notice as described above is provided when “button branch” is selected. The notice content is determined by performing processing for determining the content.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example is shown in which the second step-up notice is executed only when it is determined to execute the first step-up notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second step-up notice may be executed when it is determined to execute the button notice. In that case, the second step-up advance notice is used as the data table for determining the second step-up notice using only the data relating to the second step-up notice in the multiple notice step batch decision table described above. May be decided, or a notice step decision table for the second step up notice may be provided separately to decide the notice step of the second step up notice.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, whether or not to execute the second step-up notice may be selected and determined separately from whether or not the first step-up notice is executed. In this case, when it is decided to execute the first step-up advance notice, the first step-up advance notice is also executed using the multiple advance notice step collective decision table as described above, as described above. And each notice step of the 2nd step-up notice is decided collectively. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the first step-up notice, whether or not the second step-up notice is executed based on the selection determination result as to whether or not to execute the second step-up notice. To decide. In this way, it is possible to execute only the second step-up notice and to execute the button notice and the second step-up notice in parallel.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, the selection determination as to whether or not to execute the first step-up notice and the selection determination as to whether or not to execute the second step-up notice are separately performed, and the determination results are obtained. Based on this, when it is decided to execute the first step-up notice and it is decided to execute the second step-up notice, the first step is performed using the multiple notice step collective decision table as described above. The notice steps of the up notice and the second step up notice may be determined collectively. In that case, when it is decided to execute only one of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, it is decided to execute from the plural notice step batch determination table described above. The step-up advance notice step may be determined using only the data related to the step-up advance notice of the person who has been provided. The notice step may be determined.

  In the fourth embodiment, the color reliability display effect and the pattern reliability display effect as shown in the first embodiment are similarly performed. For each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display, as shown in the first embodiment, the reliability display mode (first color display to third color display, first pattern display) at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series. To the third pattern display) may be determined using a plurality of data tables for determining the reliability display provided for each variation, and the reliability display mode is a notice pattern in the third embodiment. As in the determination of the mode, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-continuous, each variation time may be collectively determined by one data table.

  The button notice may be performed at the same time as the second step-up notice. Therefore, as with the button advance notice, as in the case of the first step-up notice, the state of the notice pattern (notice step) for the button notice and the second step-up notice is changed for each change time at each change of the pseudo-series. A single data table may be used to determine all at once.

  In the fourth embodiment, as in the case of the third embodiment, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the mode of the notice pattern is collectively selected and determined by one data table for each variation time. As a result, the number of processes required to select and determine the mode of the notice pattern can be reduced as compared with the case of selecting and determining each variable time using an individual data table. Furthermore, the notice pattern can be determined collectively for both the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice. Thereby, the processing burden of the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice as shown in FIG. 74 will be described with the same switching timing of the step-up notice step in each fluctuating variable time. .

  FIG. 151 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the first notice effect and the second notice effect when pseudo-variable display according to the fifth embodiment is performed. 151, the states of items similar to those in FIG. 74 are shown in (A) and (B).

  The timing chart of FIG. 151 is different from that of FIG. 74 in the step-up effect switching timing at each fluctuation time as shown in (A) and (B). In this embodiment, the switching timing from the first step S1 to the second step S2 of the first step-up notice and the switching timing from the first step S1 to the second step S2 of the second step-up notice are the same timing. It is set to become. In addition, the switching timing from the second step S2 to the third step in the first step-up notice and the switching timing from the second step S2 to the third step S3 in the second step-up notice are set to be the same timing. Has been.

  For the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, either the switching timing from the first step S1 to the second step S2 or the switching timing from the second step S2 to the third step S3 is selected. Only the timing may be the same timing.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, an example will be described in which the first notice effect is set so that notice patterns are selected at different rates in the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state.

  FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200A according to the sixth embodiment. The first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200A is provided instead of the first notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200 according to the first embodiment.

  The first advance notice effect notice pattern type determination table 200A according to the sixth embodiment is different from the first advance notice effect notice pattern type decision table 200 according to the first embodiment in that the notice effect is divided into a non-probable change state and a probable change state. The type determination ratio is set.

  In the first notice effect announcement pattern type determination table 200A, “no first notice effect”, “button notice”, and “first step” in each of the non-reach deviation variation pattern, the reach deviation variation pattern, and the big hit variation pattern. The allocation for each selection item of “up notice” is set to be different depending on whether the gaming state is a non-probable change state or the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Specifically, in the setting of the first announcement effect notice pattern type determination table 200, a random number corresponding to each selection item is set so that the proportion of no announcement effect is higher in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state. SR7 allocation is set. Further, the random number SR7 is assigned in such a way that the ratio of selecting the button notice is lower and the ratio of selecting the first step-up notice is higher in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state. ing. Thereby, the respective notice patterns of the button notice and the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) are selected at different rates in the non-probable change state and the probable change state.

  Further, the first step-up notice content determination table as shown in FIG. 79 is also the same as the first notice effect announcement pattern type determination table of FIG. 152, and the non-reach deviation variation pattern, the reach deviation variation pattern, and the big hit In each of the variation patterns, the allocation for each of the selection items of “basic development advance notice”, “reach branch notice”, and “button branch notice” is the same as when the gaming state is the non-probable state. It may be set differently depending on the state. For example, in the probability variation state, the ratio of the “basic advance notice” is selected to be lower and the ratio of “button branch notice” is selected to be higher than in the non-probability condition. Allocation may be set. Conversely, the probability that the “button branch notice” is selected in the probability variation state is lower and the ratio that the “basic development notice” is selected is higher than that in the non-probability state. The allocation of the random number SR20 may be set. Furthermore, in each of the “basic development advance notice”, “reach branch notice”, and “button branch notice”, the selection ratio of the notice steps selected and determined by the notice step decision table is in the probabilistic state and the non-probable state And may be different. For example, when the probability variation state is higher than the non-probability variation state, the rate at which the step-up to the notification step having a high jackpot reliability is selected is increased in the notification step determination table. Conversely, in the predictive step determination table, the rate at which step-up to the advance step with a low jackpot reliability is selected may be made higher in the predictive step than in the non-predictable state. .

  As in the sixth embodiment, when the allocation for each selection item of “no first notice effect”, “button notice”, and “first step up notice” is in a non-probable change state, For example, as shown below, a table that determines the notice message for button notice depending on whether it is in the non-probable state or in the probable state as follows: The table for determining the notice step of the first step-up notice may be used properly.

  For example, as the table for determining the notice message of the button notice, the notice message table shown in the first embodiment and the third embodiment described above is selected so that the notice message with high reliability can be easily selected. There are two types of tables: a table for probability change state with data set and a table for non-probability change state with data set so that messages with low reliability of jackpots can be easily selected. Accordingly, the table for the probability variation state and the table for the non-probability variation state are selectively used. On the other hand, as a table for determining the notice message of button notice, a table for probability change state in which data is set so that a notice message with high reliability of jackpot is difficult to select and a notice of high reliability of jackpot are given. Prepare two types of table for non-probability change state with data set so that the message can be easily selected. Depending on whether or not it is in the probabilistic change state, the table for probability change state and the table for non-probability change state You may make it use properly.

  In addition, as a table for determining the notice step of the first step-up notice, a table for probability change state in which data is set so that a notice step having a high jackpot reliability is easily selected and a notice having a high jackpot reliability are provided. Prepare two types of table for non-probability change state in which data is set so that it is difficult to select a step. Depending on whether or not it is in the probability change state, a table for probability change state and a table for non-probability change state Use them properly. On the other hand, as a table for determining the notice step of the first step-up notice, a table for probability variation state in which data is set so that a notice step having a high jackpot reliability is difficult to select, and a jackpot reliability are set. There are two types of tables, one for the uncertain change state with data set so that a high-priority notice step can be easily selected. You may make it use a table separately.

  Note that not only the first notice effect but also the second notice effect are assigned to the selection items of “no second notice effect” and “second step-up notice” as shown in FIG. It may be set differently for the non-probability change state and the probability change state. In that case, for example, a table for determining the advance step of the second step-up advance notice may be used depending on whether the state is in the non-probability change state or the probability change state as follows. As a table for determining the notice step of the second step-up notice, there are a table for probability change state in which data is set so that a notice step having a high jackpot reliability is easily selected, and a notice step having a high jackpot reliability. Prepare two types of table for non-probability change state in which data is set so that it is difficult to select, and use the table for probability change state and the table for non-probability change state depending on whether or not it is in the probability change state. To. On the other hand, as a table for determining the advance step of the second step-up advance notice, a table for probability change state in which data is set so that the advance notice step having a high jackpot reliability is difficult to be selected, and the reliability of the jackpot There are two types of tables, one for the uncertain change state with data set so that a high-priority notice step can be easily selected. You may make it use a table separately.

  Note that not only the first notice effect but also the third notice effect, the allocation of the selection items “no third notice effect” and “movable member notice” as shown in FIG. It may be set differently depending on whether it is a state or a state of probability variation. In this case, for example, as described below, a table for determining the movable member operation of the movable member notice may be used depending on whether the state is in the non-probability variation state or the probability variation state. As a table for determining the movable member motion of the movable member notice, the table for the probability change state in which data is set so that the movable member motion with high reliability of the big hit can be easily selected, and the movable member operation with high reliability of the big hit 2 types of tables for non-probability change states in which data is set so that it is difficult to select them, and the table for probability change states and the table for non-probability change states are used properly depending on whether or not they are in the probability change state Like that. On the other hand, as the table for determining the movable member operation for the movable member notice, the table for the probability change state in which data is set so that the movable member operation having high reliability of the big hit is difficult to select, and the reliability of the big hit There are two types, a table for the non-probability state with data set so that the movement of a movable member with a high value can be easily selected. It may be possible to use different tables.

  Further, not only for the first notice effect but also for the fourth notice effect, the allocation for each selection item of “No fourth notice effect” and “Mini character notice” as shown in FIG. It may be set differently when it is and when it is in the state of probability variation. In this case, for example, as shown below, a table for determining mini character display for mini character notice may be used depending on whether the state is in the non-probability change state or the probability change state. As a table for determining the mini character display of the mini character notice, it is difficult to select the table for the probabilistic state in which data is set so that the mini character display with high reliability of the big hit is easily selected and the mini character display with high reliability of the big hit. In this way, two types of tables for the non-probability change state in which data is set are prepared, and the table for the probability change state and the table for the non-probability change state are selectively used depending on whether or not the state is the probability change state. On the other hand, the table for determining the mini character display of the mini character notice includes the table for the probability change state in which data is set so that the mini character display with high reliability of the big hit is difficult to select, and the mini character with high reliability of the big hit. Prepare two types of table for non-probability change state with data set so that the display can be easily selected. Depending on whether or not it is in the probability change state, the table for probability change state and the table for non-probability change state You may make it use properly.

  Further, not only for the first notice effect but also for the fifth notice effect, the allocation for the selection items “no fifth notice effect” and “group notice” as shown in FIG. It may be set differently when it is and when it is in the state of probability variation. In this case, for example, as described below, a table for determining the group display of the group notice may be used depending on whether the state is in the non-probability change state or the probability change state. As a table for determining the group display of the group notice, it is difficult to select a table for probability change state in which data is set so that a group display with high reliability of the big hit and a group display with high reliability of the big hit are selected. In this way, two types of tables for the non-probability change state in which data is set are prepared, and the table for the probability change state and the table for the non-probability change state are selectively used depending on whether or not the state is the probability change state. Conversely, as the table for determining the group display of the group notice, a table for probability variation state in which data is set so that a group display with a high jackpot reliability is difficult to select and a group with a high jackpot reliability are set. Prepare two types of table for non-probability change state with data set so that the display can be easily selected. Depending on whether or not it is in the probability change state, the table for probability change state and the table for non-probability change state You may make it use properly.

  As described above, the respective notice patterns of the button notice and the first step-up notice are set to be selected at different ratios between the non-probable change state and the probable change state. When selecting the notice effect form from a plurality of kinds of notice effect forms, the notice effect form is selected at different selection ratios in the non-probable change state and the probability change state, and thus appears for a plurality of kinds of notice effect forms. The proportion will vary depending on the state. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved further.

  The following control may be performed. When there is a sudden change in the probability changing state, a notice is given using a table in which a notice pattern with high reliability of the big hit (notice message, notice step, movable member operation, mini character display, group display) is easily selected. And when performing such a notice, a non-probable variable symbol is displayed as a reach symbol. On the other hand, when it becomes uncertain in the non-probability changing state, the advance notice is performed using a table in which the advance notice pattern with high reliability of the big hit is not easily selected. If such control is performed, the player's expectation will be enhanced by a notice with high reliability of the jackpot, and the player will be in a reach state with a non-probable variation, resulting in a probabilistic state as a result. Since the player can be satisfied as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved. In addition, when performing such control, a table for determining the notice pattern selection used only when there is a sudden change is provided, and when a sudden change occurs in the probability change state, the notice pattern is determined using the table. As described above, a notice pattern with high reliability of the jackpot may be easily selected. In other words, depending on whether or not the accuracy change state occurs, a table dedicated to the accuracy is used when the accuracy changes in the accuracy variation state, and a table other than the table dedicated to the accuracy accuracy is used when the accuracy is in the non-accuracy variation state The table for selecting the notice pattern may be used properly. For example, the normal table shown in each of the above-described embodiments is used for fluctuations other than the fluctuation when it becomes sudden, and a predetermined table for exclusive use for the suddenness is used for fluctuation when it becomes sudden.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the effects related to the above-described pseudo-ream, in particular, the chance temporary stop effect after the first slip, the button notice, the first step-up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice) ), A second step-up notice (monitor notice), a movable member notice, a mini character notice, and a group notice such as a group notice are not a pseudo-series performed in a variable display executed by one fluctuation pattern, An example will be described which is performed in a continuous notice over a plurality of fluctuation displays executed according to a fluctuation pattern.

  Whether or not the continuous notice is data that will cause a variable display that is a big hit for each of the stored data by using a game control microcomputer (similar to the game control microcomputer 560 described above) in advance. Recognizing and based on the stored data, the microcomputer for effect control provides a continuous notice effect for notifying that a large number of variable displays are displayed before the display result of the variable display that is a big hit is derived and displayed. This is a notice effect executed by (similar to the aforementioned effect control microcomputer 100). The variation pattern in a plurality of variation displays when the continuous notice is performed is selected as a special variation display pattern for stopping and displaying the special display result such as the above-described pseudo consecutive chance.

  Specifically, whether or not the game control microcomputer is a data to be displayed as a big hit for each of the stored storage data on the condition that the number of the stored storage data has reached a predetermined number or more Is determined in advance, and it is determined with a predetermined probability whether or not continuous notice is executed. In the determination, it is determined that the continuous notice is executed at a higher probability when there is stored storage data that is a big hit than when there is no stored storage data that is a big hit. When it is determined that the continuous notice is to be executed, the game control microcomputer transmits an effect control command indicating that the continuous notice is to be executed to the effect control microcomputer. In the effect control microcomputer, when the effect control command indicating that such continuous notice is executed is received, the button notice and the first step-up notice as shown in the first to sixth embodiments described above are provided. (Basic development advance notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step up notice (monitor notice), movable member notice, mini character notice, notice notice effect in the same manner as group notice (color reliability display and pattern trust) (Including degree display) as a continuous advance notice over a plurality of fluctuation displays, and at the end of the first fluctuation display in such a plurality of fluctuation displays, the above-mentioned first slip chance chance A stop effect may be executed. In this case, the design to be temporarily stopped at the start of the slip effect is determined before the start of the first variation display. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition such as the selection ratio of the notice effect set in each data table shown in FIG. 78 to FIG. A plurality of types of notice effects in each variable display when a notice effect such as advance notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step-up notice (monitor notice) is executed are selected at different ratios. . It should be noted that in the variation display in the continuous notice, the after-slip chance temporary stop effect as described above may be performed at the start of the next variation display after the end of the first variation. In this case, the symbol to be temporarily stopped at the start of the slip effect is determined before the start of the next variation display after the end of the first variation. Similarly, for each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display, a predetermined selection ratio is determined such as the selection ratio of the notice reliability display effect set in each data table shown in FIGS. Based on conditions, button notice, first step up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step up notice (monitor notice), movable parts notice, mini character notice, group notice A plurality of types of notice reliability display effect modes in each variation display when such notice reliability display is executed are selected at different ratios. Moreover, what is necessary is just to select the chance stop temporary stop effect after the 1st slip at a predetermined selection ratio as shown in FIGS. In such a case, the pseudo consecutive chance eyes are used as continuous notice chance eyes. In addition, the fluctuation pattern for performing the after-slip chance eye temporary stop effect temporarily stops non-special display results other than the special display result (stop symbols other than continuous notice chance eyes such as reach formation symbols) Identification information for stopping and displaying special display results (continuous notice chances) by changing identification information that is temporarily stopped in some of the variable display areas that make up the special display result (sliding and changing the right temporary stop symbol) It is a change variation pattern.

  When the continuous notice is executed, the number of variable displays for which the continuous notice is performed may be set to a predetermined number, or may be set to a randomly determined number. Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous notice may be made by the effect control microcomputer, not by the game control microcomputer. In that case, every time there is a start prize from the game control microcomputer, a hold memory command as an effect control command indicating whether or not the hold memory based on the start prize is a big hit is sent. Based on the on-hold storage command, the effect control microcomputer may determine whether to execute the continuous notice by making a determination similar to that of the game control microcomputer as described above.

  In this way, in the continuous notice, the first chance after the first slip as described above, the button notice, the first step-up notice (basic development notice, the reach branch notice, the button branch notice), the second step-up notice ( By performing the monitor notice), the movable member notice, the mini character notice, and the group notice, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case where these notices are given in a pseudo-continuous manner.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in S101 to S105 in FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 51, in the quasi-continuous variation pattern, the quasi-continuous chance is temporarily stopped after the display of the variation is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variation display is again performed in the variation display area. A re-variation display is performed in which the re-variation to be executed is executed once or a plurality of times. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, in the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, by temporarily stopping the combination of symbols other than the pseudo-continuous chances such as the reach formation symbols, and performing the chance temporary stopping effect after the first slip. Then, by changing the symbols that are temporarily stopped in a part of the variable display area that constitutes the combination of the symbols, control is performed to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous chance and execute re-variation. In this way, by changing the symbols that are temporarily stopped in some of the variable display areas constituting the combination of symbols other than the pseudo continuous chance, the pseudo continuous chance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. As a result, even when the combination of symbols other than the pseudo-continuous chance is stopped, it may be changed to the pseudo-continuous chance and re-variation may be executed. The fun of the effects related to the variable display is improved, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, when the reach type is reach α1 to α3, super PA3-3-1 and super PA3-6-6 which are fluctuation patterns for three or four pseudo fluctuations are used. 1, Super PA 4-6-1 or Super PA 5-3-1 is determined, and when the reach type is reach β1, β2, super PB3-3-3- which is a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous variation of 4 times or 5 times 1. Determine super PB4-3-1 or super PB5-3-1. As a result, when a pseudo-variation variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern, the selection ratio of the type of reach executed after the temporary stop varies depending on the number of re-variation executions in the selected variation pattern. The variable display pattern is selected. Therefore, based on the correlation between the number of re-variation executions and the type of reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to what type of reach will be executed. It makes it easier for players to be interested. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the reach state is improved due to the relevance display, and the player's expectation is easily beaten by the reach state effect. The fun can be further improved and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the case of performing a chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip as shown in (1) above, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. There is a case where the super PB5-3-1 which is a pattern is determined. However, when a big hit is usually made, there is no case where a fluctuation pattern for a five-time fluctuation pseudo-continuous is determined, and a three-time fluctuation or a four-time fluctuation pseudo-continuous A variation pattern is determined. As a result, when a pseudo-variation variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern, the variation pattern is changed so that the ratio of the probability variation state as the special gaming state varies depending on the number of times of re-variation execution in the selected variation pattern. Selected. Therefore, based on the correlation between the number of re-variation executions and the occurrence of the probability variation state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether not only the jackpot gaming state but also the probability variation state will occur. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the production related to the state. This improves the player's expectation for the occurrence of a probable change state due to the relationship with the re-variable display, and makes it easier for the player to feel the expectation of the player. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (3) In the case of performing the temporary stop effect after the first slip as shown in the above (1), as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6-1, Super PA4-6-2, Super PA5-3-1, Super PA5-3-2, Super PB4 which are fluctuation patterns for pseudo continuous use of 4 or 5 times fluctuation -3-1, Super PB4-3-2, Super PB5-3-1 or Super PB5-3-2 is determined, and when it becomes a big hit of 2 rounds, it is a fluctuation pattern for two or three fluctuations The special PG1-3 or the special PG1-4 is determined. Thus, when a pseudo-variation variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern, depending on the number of executions of re-variation in the selected variation pattern, as a big hit gaming state, the ratio of two rounds of big hit is different, In other words, the variation pattern is selected so that the ratio of the big hit of 15 rounds is different. Therefore, based on the correlation between the number of re-variation executions and the type of jackpot that is classified according to the degree of advantage for the player in the jackpot gaming state such as the number of rounds of jackpot, not only the jackpot gaming state but also the jackpot As for the type of gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not it will be selected, and to make it easier for the player to be interested in the production related to what kind of jackpot gaming state. it can. More specifically, the 15 round jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the 2 round jackpot because the number of rounds that can be executed is larger than the 2 round jackpot. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream, the ratio of which round is the big hit is set to be different, so that the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream and which round of big hit is selected. Based on the correlation with the ratio, the player can have a sense of expectation as to whether or not more prize balls can be obtained. As a result, the player's expectation for the type of jackpot gaming state is improved due to the relevance display, and the player's expectation is easy to beat. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) As shown in (B) of FIG. 51 and S1566 of FIG. 12, in the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, when performing a chance stop temporary stop effect after the first slip, a symbol to be subjected to the slip effect Since the reach formation symbol is temporarily stopped as a combination of the above, based on the player's expectation for the symbol that forms the reach state, the fun of the presentation regarding the re-change display is further improved, and the entertainment of the game is further improved. be able to. In addition, after giving the player a sense of frustration that the quasi-ream has ended by temporarily stopping the reach formation symbol, the control is performed to change the reach formation symbol to the quasi-ream opportunity, so that Since it is possible to give an inflection to the player's expectation based on giving the player a sense of excitement that the game has not ended, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (5) In the first embodiment, as shown as the first modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect, even if the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-continuous is the same, the variation A configuration is used in which the variable display pattern can be selected so that the selection ratio of the reach type varies depending on the number of times the after-slip chance temporary stop effect is executed in the re-variation by the pattern. With this configuration, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution but also to what kind of effects are used for re-variation during the variation display using the pseudo-variation variation pattern. You can turn it on. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  (6) In the first embodiment, as shown as the third modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect, even if the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-continuous is the same, the variation Uses a configuration that allows the variation display pattern to be selected so that the ratio of the probability variation jackpot as the special gaming state varies depending on the number of times the after-slip chance temporary stop effect is executed in the re-variation due to the pattern. . In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution, but also to what kind of rendition is performed in the middle of the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  (7) In the first embodiment, as shown as the fourth modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect, even if the number of re-variation executions in the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-continuous is the same, the variation In accordance with the number of times the after-slip chance temporary stop effect is executed in the re-variation depending on the pattern, the variable display pattern is selected so that the selection ratio between the big hit of 2 rounds and the big hit of 15 rounds is different as a big hit. A configuration that enables selection is used. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution, but also to what kind of rendition is performed in the middle of the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  (8) In the first embodiment, as shown as the second modification of the symbol change chance temporary stop effect, according to the variable display area in which the temporary stop symbol is changed by performing the post-slip chance temporary stop effect. Then, a configuration is used that makes it possible to select a variable display pattern so that the reliability of the big hit is different. In this way, the player's attention is drawn not only to the number of times of re-variation execution but also to what kind of effect the re-variation is performed in the variation display by the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream. Can do. As a result, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display, and to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, the variable display pattern is selected so that the reliability that is a probable big hit (the reliability that becomes a probable change state) varies depending on the variable display area in which the temporary stop symbol is changed by performing the chance stop temporary stop effect after the slip. A configuration that enables this may be used. By using such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and further enhance the interest of the game.

  (9) As shown in the seventh embodiment, based on the stored storage data, a notice is given that the display result of the variable display that is a big hit will be a big hit over a plurality of variable displays before the derived display is performed. With respect to the continuous notice effect, the following effects can be obtained by performing an effect similar to the above-described first chance after-slip chance temporary stop effect. By changing the symbols that are temporarily stopped in some of the variable display areas that make up the combination of symbols other than the continuous notice chance, the continuous notice chance will be stopped and displayed. Even when the combination of symbols is stopped, it may be changed at the chance of continuous notice, so the production will be unexpected, so the fun of the production related to the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the continuous notice will improve, The interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the variation pattern of the continuous notice effect is selected as the variation pattern, the number of executions of the change in the selected continuous notice (for example, the number of executions of the variable display corresponding to the number of stored storage when the continuous notice is performed). Accordingly, the variation pattern is selected so that the selection ratio of the type of reach to be executed is different (the start timing of the continuous notice based on reading the data indicating the variation pattern in the reserved storage data existing at that time) In addition, the reach start timing may be changed based on a predetermined reach start timing change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to what kind of reach will be executed based on the correlation between the number of executions of fluctuation in the continuous notice and the type of reach, which can be used to produce a reach state. On the other hand, the player can be easily interested. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the reach state is improved by the relevance to the change display, and the player's expectation is easily beaten by the effect of the reach state. The fun of the game can be further improved, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (10) As for the continuous notice effect as shown in (9) above, in the case where the effect similar to the first-slip chance chance temporary stop effect described above is performed, as shown in the seventh embodiment, as a variation pattern, When the variation pattern of the continuous notice effect is selected, the variation pattern is selected so that the ratio of the probability change state as the special game state varies depending on the number of times of execution of the variation in the selected continuous notice. Therefore, based on the correlation between the number of executions of fluctuations in the continuous notice and the occurrence of the probability variation state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation not only for the big hit gaming state but also for the probability variation state. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the production related to the probability change state. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of a probable change state is improved due to the relevance to the fluctuation display, and the player's expectation can be easily beaten. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (11) As for the continuous notice effect as shown in (9) above, in the case where an effect similar to the above-mentioned first after-slip chance temporary stop effect is performed, as shown in the seventh embodiment, as a variation pattern, When the variation pattern of the continuous notice effect is selected, according to the number of executions of the fluctuation in the selected continuous notice, the ratio of the big hit of the two rounds as the big hit gaming state is different. The variation pattern is selected so that the ratio of winning big hits is different. Therefore, based on the correlation between the number of executions of fluctuation in continuous notice and the type of jackpot that is classified according to the degree of advantage for the player in the jackpot game state such as the number of jackpot rounds, In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the type of jackpot gaming state is selected, and to make the player more interested in the production related to what kind of jackpot gaming state. be able to. This improves the player's expectation for the type of jackpot gaming state due to the relevance to the variation display, and also makes it easier to beat the player's expectation. It can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (12) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, based on the determination as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, a variation pattern including a pseudo-variable variation pattern is selected. As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice effect in the change display when the pseudo-variation change pattern is selected, the execution mode of the first step-up notice effect is The execution mode is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a reach branch notice production mode such as “Step 3A” and “Step 3B”. As a result, a step-up notice effect can be executed each time a variation display is performed for a plurality of variation displays in a pseudo-series, and therefore, in the variation display when a variation pattern of a pseudo-series is selected, a step is displayed when a certain variation is displayed. Even when the up-notice effect is finished, the step-up notice effect may be executed at the next re-variation display, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and for a long time, Can expect a sense of expectation. Then, as shown in FIG. 72, in the effect of the reach branch notice, the step-up form changes from the execution form of the basic development notice to the execution form such as the reach confirmation effect display in step 3A and the reach unconfirmed effect in step 3B. It is an execution mode that branches into a plurality of execution modes with an execution mode as shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 26, regarding the pseudo-continuous, the selection when the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-continuous variation number) is selected is determined to be a big hit. The number of times is set to be larger than when it is determined. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when it is determined that the big hit is made, the ratio of performing the reach branch notice as the first step-up notice is larger than when the decision is made to be off. It is set to be. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not the reach branch notice is executed is selected at a different selection ratio according to the total number of re-changes. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced in accordance with the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state by the effect of the reach branch notice. Furthermore, as for the first step-up notice effect, since the step-up mode is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a reach branch notice effect mode such as a “reach branch” notice step in which the step-up mode branches into a plurality of steps, The fun of the notice effect can be improved. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of re-variation in the variation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series, and the execution aspect selected. Suppressing the decrease in the player's expectation, increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations in the re-variation display, improving the fun of the notice effect by the branch notice effect mode, and By increasing the variation of the effect related to the re-variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the step-up notice and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, for reach branch notice, as shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 91, a table necessary for notice announcement at each stage change is selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 to 5 times). As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the table selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series has the selection ratio of the notice step including “step 3A” and “step 3B”. Different. Therefore, there are multiple types of notice effects for the reach branch notice depending on the total number of re-variations (variations including initial variation and subsequent re-variation during one variation period) executed in a pseudo-variable variation pattern. Are selected at different selection ratios. Accordingly, in response to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the player's expectation is enhanced by the execution mode of the notice effect of the reach branch notice. be able to. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected. In addition, the step-up notice effect is executed every time the change display is performed in the pseudo-continuous display, so that the step-up notice effect can be performed even when the reserved memory is not consumed. Thereby, the timing for performing the step-up notice effect is not restricted, and the step-up notice effect can be performed at the appearance rate as the design value.

  (13) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, a fluctuation pattern including a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern is selected. As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice effect in the change display when the pseudo-variation change pattern is selected, the execution mode of the first step-up notice effect is The execution mode is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a reach branch notice production mode such as “Step 3A” and “Step 3B”. As a result, a step-up notice effect can be executed each time a variation display is performed for a plurality of variation displays in a pseudo-series. Therefore, in a variation display when a variation pattern of a pseudo-series is selected, a step is displayed when a certain variation is displayed. Even when the up-notice effect is finished, the step-up notice effect may be executed at the next re-variation display, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and for a long time, Can expect a sense of expectation. Then, as shown in FIG. 72, in the effect of the reach branch notice, the step-up form changes from the execution form of the basic development notice to the execution form such as the reach confirmation effect display in step 3A and the reach unconfirmed effect in step 3B. It is an execution mode that branches into a plurality of execution modes with an execution mode as shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 26, regarding the pseudo-continuous, the selection when the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-continuous variation number) is selected is determined to be a big hit. The number of times is set to be larger than when it is determined. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when it is determined that the big hit is made, the ratio of performing the reach branch notice as the first step-up notice is larger than when the decision is made to be off. It is set to be. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not the reach branch notice is executed is selected at a different selection ratio depending on the notice effect in the number of re-variations. With this, regarding the re-variation display pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state by the effect of reach branch notice, it is the notice effect in the re-variation in the re-variation display pattern Based on the above, it is possible to increase the player's expectation. Furthermore, as for the first step-up notice effect, since the step-up mode is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a reach branch notice effect mode such as a “reach branch” notice step in which the step-up mode branches into a plurality of steps, The fun of the notice effect can be improved. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of re-variation in the variation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series, and the execution aspect selected. Suppressing the decrease in the player's expectation, increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations in the re-variation display, improving the fun of the notice effect by the branch notice effect mode, and By increasing the variation of the effect related to the re-variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the step-up notice and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, for reach branch notice, as shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 91, a table necessary for notice announcement at each stage change is selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 to 5 times). As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the table selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series has the selection ratio of the notice step including “step 3A” and “step 3B”. Different. Therefore, for the notice effect of the reach branch notice, the notice of re-change display of the number of re-changes (changes including the first change and the subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in the pseudo-ream fluctuation pattern. Based on whether it is a production, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. Accordingly, in response to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the player's expectation is enhanced by the execution mode of the notice effect of the reach branch notice. be able to. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected. In addition, the step-up notice effect is executed every time the change display is performed in the pseudo-continuous display, so that the step-up notice effect can be performed even when the reserved memory is not consumed. Thereby, the timing for performing the step-up notice effect is not restricted, and the step-up notice effect can be performed at the appearance rate as the design value.

  (14) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, a fluctuation pattern including a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern is selected. As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice effect in the change display when the pseudo-continuous change pattern is selected, the execution mode of the first step-up notice effect is: It is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a button branch notification effect mode such as a “button branch” notification step. And as shown in FIG. 73, the effect mode of button branch notice is an execution aspect in which the notice step branches from the execution form of the basic development notice to the execution form like the button operation effect. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29, it has been decided that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when it is determined that the big hit is made, the ratio of performing the button branch notice as the first step-up notice is larger than when the decision is made to be off. It is set to be. Therefore, when the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not to execute the button branch notice is selected at a different selection ratio according to the total number of re-variations. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced in accordance with the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by the effect of button branch notice. In other words, the step of advancement from the step-up advance notice effect to the operation advance notice effect is performed. The step-up situation of the up-notice effect can be associated with the number of re-variations executed in the pseudo-continuous change pattern by the effect mode of the notice branch, and the player's attention can be directed to the entire effect. In addition, when the notice step branches to the operation notice effect by the button branch notice in the variation display executed in the pseudo-variable change pattern, the operation notice effect is executed in which the notice is executed on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of re-variation in the variation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series, and the execution aspect selected. By increasing the player's attention to the entire production, increasing the player's willingness to participate, and increasing the variation of the production related to the re-variable display, the performance of the production related to the pseudo-ream is improved. , You can improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, for button branch notices, the tables necessary for the notice effect at each stage of change are selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2-5 times) as shown in FIGS. The tables selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series are different in the selection ratio of the notice step including “button branch” as shown in FIGS. Therefore, there are multiple types of notice effects for the button branch notice depending on the total number of re-variations (variations including initial variation and subsequent re-variation during one variation period) executed in a pseudo-continuous variation pattern. Are selected at different selection ratios. Thereby, the player's expectation can be enhanced by the execution mode of the button branch notice corresponding to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. . Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (15) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the first step-up notice is determined as the notice effect in the change display when the pseudo-continuous change pattern is selected, the execution mode of the first step-up notice effect is: It is selected from a plurality of types of execution modes including a button branch notification effect mode such as a “button branch” notification step. And as shown in FIG. 73, the production | generation aspect of a button branch notice is an execution aspect in which a notice branches from the execution aspect of a basic advance notice to the execution aspect like a button operation effect. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29, it has been decided that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when it is determined that the big hit is made, the ratio of performing the button branch notice as the first step-up notice is larger than when the decision is made to be off. It is set to be. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous change pattern, whether or not to execute the button branch notice is selected at a different selection ratio depending on the notice effect in the number of re-variations. By this, regarding the re-variation display pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state by the effect of the button branch notice, it is the notice effect in the re-variation in the re-variation display pattern Based on the above, it is possible to increase the player's expectation. In other words, by enhancing the player's expectation based on whether or not the notice effect is performed in the notice branch effect form in which the specific step up notice effect branches from the step up notice effect to the operation notice effect. The step-up notice effect step-up situation and the number of re-variations executed in the pseudo-continuous change pattern can be associated by the notice branch effect aspect, and the player's attention can be directed to the entire effect. . In addition, when the notice step branches to the operation notice effect due to the button branch notice in the variation display executed in the pseudo-variable change pattern, the operation notice effect that the notice is executed on condition that the operation button 30 is operated is displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of re-variation in the variation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series, and the execution aspect selected. By increasing the player's attention to the entire production, increasing the player's willingness to participate, and increasing the variation of the production related to the re-variable display, the performance of the production related to the pseudo-ream is improved. , You can improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, for button branch notices, the tables necessary for the notice effect at each stage of change are selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2-5 times) as shown in FIGS. The tables selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series are different in the selection ratio of the notice step including “button branch” as shown in FIGS. Therefore, for the notice effect of the button branch notice, the notice in the re-change display of the number of re-changes (changes including the initial change and the subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in a pseudo-continuous change pattern. Based on whether it is a production, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. Thereby, the player's expectation can be enhanced by the execution mode of the button branch notice corresponding to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. . Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when not reaching, one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected in the processing of S100, and the processing of S101 and S102 The variation pattern type is determined in step S104. For example, after the variation pattern determination table including the variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous” is selected in step S103, the processing in steps S104 and S105 is executed. As described above, the determination of the variation display pattern type and the determination of the variation pattern are made differently depending on whether or not the decision to enter the reach state has been made, and the variation can be achieved without increasing the control burden. The number of types of patterns can be increased. In addition, by using a combination of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern, it is possible to realize various types of variation display patterns, and it is not necessary to store all the variation display patterns to be selected in the ROM. It is possible to prevent enlargement of an area for storing information related to display. In addition, even when the reach is not reached, re-variation by the pseudo-ream is executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. In addition, since the means for determining the fluctuation pattern is divided into a means for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern and a means for selecting the fluctuation pattern, for example, the classification determination in the means for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern The design for changing the setting for determining the variation pattern can be changed simply by changing the distribution of the variation display pattern selection in the means for selecting the variation pattern without changing the pattern. can do.

  (17) As a variation pattern for performing re-variation, for example, as shown in Super PA 4-3 in FIG. 14 that performs variation display as shown in FIGS. 45 (D1) to (D5), the reach state is reached after temporary stop in re-variation. After the temporary stop in the re-variation, for example, the first re-variation pattern and the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 in FIG. Because the second re-variation pattern which is a big hit after executing re-variation display in a part of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R on the "right" is included, Become rich. As a result, the re-variation effect can be given unexpectedness, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  (18) When performing re-variation according to S520 in FIG. 115 and S845 in FIG. 124, as a notification effect, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, a lower effect LED 85c, and a movable effect as shown in FIGS. Since the notification effect is executed in the notification mode selected from the notification modes based on the patterns of the plurality of types of effects using the member 78, the re-variation display is performed by the combination of the re-change effect and the notification effect. The variation of the production can be made abundant, and the production concerning re-variation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, with respect to the group of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3 that can be selected when it is not a big hit, 74B, AC, BC, ABC in the group of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, and Special PG1-3 There is a high probability that a combination of re-variation effects in different forms will appear. Therefore, the combination of the selection of the notification mode in the notification effect regarding the re-variation and the reliability that becomes a big hit after the notification effect is executed can further enrich the variation of the effect when the re-change is performed. In addition, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game with respect to re-variation effects.

  (20) As shown in the seventh embodiment, based on the pending storage data, a notice is given that the display result of the variable display that is a big hit will be a big hit over a plurality of variable displays before the derived display. With respect to the continuous notice effect, the following effects can be obtained by performing the same effect as the aforementioned step-up notice effect. As for the step-up notice effect in which the notice effect is performed by a plurality of notice steps, as shown in the tables (FIGS. 84 and 85) used for selecting the notice pattern of the step-up notice, the fluctuation determined to be controlled by the big hit The selection ratio of the notice effect mode differs depending on the notice effect in the variable display of the number of times of change display before and after the display result of the display is derived and displayed. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition, a plurality of types of notice effect modes in each variable display when the notice effect is executed are selected at different ratios. Thus, according to the execution mode of the step-up notice effect performed by a plurality of notice steps in response to whether it is a notice effect in a variation pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot, Thus, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in a plurality of variation displays, and to increase the player's expectation. In addition, since the step-up notice effect can be executed every time the variable display is performed, a plurality of fluctuations before the display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state is derived and displayed. In the display, even when the step-up notice effect is finished at the time of a certain fluctuation display, the step-up notice effect may be executed at the time of the next fluctuation display, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, Can expect the player's expectation for a long time. Then, for each change display of re-variation executed in the re-change display pattern, a plurality of types of execution modes are selected at different selection ratios based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition. Thus, in accordance with whether or not the notice effect is in a variable display pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control to a specific gaming state, the notice effect according to the execution mode of the notice effect by the plural steps of notice is like this. Thus, the player can be given a different sense of expectation in each variation in a plurality of variation displays, and the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by the execution mode of the notice effect by the plurality of notice steps. Furthermore, as for the step-up notice effect, the execution form is selected from a plurality of types of execution forms including the branch notice effect form in which the step-up form branches into a plurality, so that the fun of the notice effect can be improved. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding multiple times of variable display is increased by the relevance with the number of times of the variable display when performing the announcement effect over the multiple times of variable display in continuous notice, and the announcement effect mode selected. be able to. By giving the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such multiple variation displays, and increasing the variation of the representation related to multiple variation displays, the effect of the representation related to multiple variation displays Can improve the interest of the game. In addition, a step-up notice effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of step-up notice effects, and the multi-step step-up notice effect is selected depending on how many notices are displayed in the variable display. In addition, since a plurality of types of notice effects are selected at different selection ratios, there is a possibility that other notice effects may continue even if a certain notice effect is ended among a plurality of step-up notice effects. . As a result, when a certain step-up notice effect ends in the middle of multiple variable displays (when it is interrupted), there may be a situation in which other notice effects continue, so the player's interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production time of the variable display from being wasted.

  (21) Like the button branch notice effect that develops in two steps shown as a modification in each of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an operation notice effect is generated in response to the selection of the notice branch effect mode. After the execution, a special operation advance notice effect is executed to execute a special advance notice on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased. , The interest of the game can be further improved.

  (22) For the notice effects of button notice, first step up notice (basic development notice, reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step up notice, movable member notice, and mini character notice, see FIG. S1705, S1710, S1715, S1719, S547, S552, S557 in FIG. 118, S1705, S1710, S1715, S1719 in FIG. 139, S547a, S552a, S557a in FIG. , Reach branch notice, button branch notice), second step-up notice, movable member notice, and mini-character notice notices are prohibited from selecting a notice pattern with lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variation display. The prohibition process is executed. 538, S547, S552, and S557 in FIG. 118, S538a in FIG. 137, and S547a, S552a, and S557a in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the notice pattern of the notice effect is selected, the notice pattern selected later is more likely to be a big hit after the notice effect is executed than the notice pattern selected before. The notice pattern is selected so that the reliability is not lowered. As a result, despite the fact that the player's expectation has been enhanced by executing the re-variation of the pseudo-ream, the degree of reliability for the big hit by the pre-announcement effect is realized by the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the re-variation of the pseudo-ream. It is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the game will decrease.

  (23) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. When the execution of the fifth notice effect (group notice) is selected in the fluctuation display when the pseudo-variation fluctuation pattern is selected, the reach state is entered during the fluctuation display as shown in FIG. 77 (H). After that, the notice effect is started with the selected notice pattern (group display). The execution mode of such a notice effect is selected at a different selection ratio according to the number of re-variations executed in the re-variable display pattern. For example, as shown in S101 to S105 in FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, 28, and 29, it has been determined that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Further, as shown in FIG. 110, when it is determined that the big hit is determined, the ratio of performing the group notice as the fifth notice effect is set to be larger than when the decision is made to be off. ing. Therefore, when the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not to execute the group notice is selected at a different selection ratio according to the total number of re-variations. In addition, for the group notice, a table necessary for the notice effect at each stage of change is selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 times, 3 times) of the pseudo-series in FIGS. 110 (A) and 110 (B). Like 111, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times, 3 times) differs in the selection ratio of the notice pattern (group display A to C). Therefore, for the notice effect of group notice, the number of re-variations (variations including the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation during one variation period) executed in a pseudo-continuous variation pattern (for example, the total number of re-variations) ), A plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. Accordingly, in response to the number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the player's expectation is given by the execution mode of the notice effect that starts after reaching the reach state. Can be increased. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected. By increasing the player's expectation for the number of re-variations in such re-variable display, and increasing the variation of effects related to re-variable display, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to re-variable display. Interest can be improved.

  (24) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29, it has been decided that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102, when it is determined that the big hit is determined, the ratio of performing the movable member notification as the third notification effect is set to be higher than when the determination is made that it is off. Has been. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not the movable member notice is executed is selected at a different selection ratio in accordance with the total number of re-changes. As a result, the player's expectation can be enhanced in accordance with the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by the third notice effect. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relevance of the frequency | count of the re-variation in a re-variation display pattern, and the notification effect which operates a movable member. By increasing the player's expectation for the number of re-variations in such re-variable display, and increasing the variation of effects related to re-variable display, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to re-variable display. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, for the third notice effect, a table necessary for the notice effect at each stage change is selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (two times and three times) as shown in FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (C). The tables selected according to the total number of fluctuations (two times and three times) of the pseudo-series differ in the selection ratio of the movable member operations A to C as shown in FIGS. Therefore, there are multiple types of notice effects for the movable member notice depending on the total number of re-changes (changes including initial change and subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in a pseudo-continuous change pattern. Are selected at different selection ratios. Thus, in response to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the player's expectation is enhanced by the execution mode of the notice effect that operates the movable member can do. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (25) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a pseudo-variation variation pattern is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29, it has been decided that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102, when it is determined that the big hit is determined, the ratio of performing the movable member notification as the third notification effect is set to be higher than when the determination is made that it is off. Has been. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not to execute the movable member notice is selected at a different selection ratio depending on the notice effect in the re-change of the number of times. Thus, with respect to the re-variation display pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by the third notice effect, the number of re-changes in the re-variation display pattern is the notice effect in the re-change. Based on this, it is possible to increase the player's expectation. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased with the relevance of the frequency | count of the re-variation in a re-variation display pattern, and the notification effect which operates a movable member. By increasing the player's expectation for the number of re-variations in such re-variable display, and increasing the variation of effects related to re-variable display, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to re-variable display. Interest can be improved. Further, for the third notice effect, a table necessary for the notice effect at the corresponding stage of change is selected in (A) to (C) in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the selection ratio of the movable member operations A to C varies depending on the number of times of fluctuation in the table selected according to the total number of fluctuations (two times and three times) of the pseudo-series. Accordingly, for the notice effect of the movable member notice, the notice in the re-change display of the number of re-changes (changes including the first change and the subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in a pseudo-continuous change pattern. Based on whether it is a production, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. As a result, the player can be given a different sense of expectation in each re-variation in the re-variation display according to the execution mode of the notice effect that operates the movable member, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (26) As shown in FIG. 76, the mini character notice that displays the character image 94 that is lower in visibility than the effect symbol is performed, so that it becomes difficult to recognize the notice effect unless the player pays considerable attention. As a result, the notice effect is varied and the player is less tired. As shown in S101 to S105 in FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a pseudo-continuous variation pattern is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. As for the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29, it has been decided that the selection determination of the re-variation repeated execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number) is a big hit. The time is set so that the number of times is larger than when it is determined to be out of place. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106, when it is determined to be a big hit, a character image 94 having a lower visibility than the effect symbol is displayed as the fourth notice effect as compared to the case where it is determined to be off. It is set to increase the proportion of mini-character notices to be performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not to execute the mini character notice is selected at a different selection ratio according to the total number of re-changes. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by the fourth notice effect corresponding to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the variation of the effect regarding the re-variable display can be increased by the relevance between the number of re-variations in the re-variable display pattern and the notice effect that displays the mini character image. In this way, the announcement effect is rich in changes, making it difficult for the player to get bored, increasing the player's expectation for the number of re-variations in the re-variable display, and increasing variations in re-variable display effects By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, for the fourth notice effect, a table necessary for the notice effect at each stage change is selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 to 5 times) as shown in FIGS. 107 (A) to (C). The tables selected in accordance with the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series differ in the selection ratio of the mini character displays A to C as shown in FIGS. Therefore, for the notice effect of the mini character notice, a plurality of types of re-changes (changes including the first change and the subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in a pseudo-continuous change pattern are used. The notice pattern is selected at a different selection ratio. Accordingly, in response to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, the player's expectation is enhanced by the execution mode of the notice effect that displays the mini character image. can do. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (27) As shown in FIG. 76, a mini-character notice that displays a character image 94 with lower visibility than the effect symbol is performed, so that it is difficult to recognize the notice effect unless the player pays considerable attention. As a result, the notice effect is varied and the player is less tired. As shown in S101 to S105 in FIG. 38, a fluctuation pattern including a pseudo-variation fluctuation pattern is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 24 to FIG. 27, the pseudo-ream, when it is determined that the big hit is determined for the selection determination of the re-execution repetitive execution number (pseudo-ream fluctuation number), will be out of place. The number of times is set to be larger than when it is determined. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106, when it is determined to be a big hit, a character image 94 having a lower visibility than the effect symbol is displayed as the fourth notice effect as compared to the case where it is determined to be off. It is set to increase the proportion of mini-character notices to be performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, whether or not to execute the mini character notice is selected at a different selection ratio according to the notice effect in the re-change of the number of times. As a result, regarding the re-variation display pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by the fourth notice effect, the number of re-changes in the re-variable display pattern is the notice effect in the re-change. Based on this, a different expectation can be given to the player in each re-variation in the re-variation display, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a re-variation display can be increased by the relevance with the number of times of the re-variation in a re-variation display pattern, and the notice effect which displays the image of a mini character notice. In this way, the announcement effect is rich in changes, making it difficult for the player to get bored, increasing the player's expectation for the number of re-variations in the re-variable display, and increasing variations in re-variable display effects By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, for the fourth notice effect, a table necessary for the notice effect at the corresponding stage of change is selected in FIGS. In the table selected according to the number of times (2 to 5 times), the selection ratios of the mini character displays A to C are different for each fluctuation time. Therefore, for the notice effect of the mini character notice, the notice effect in the re-change display of the number of re-changes (changes including the first change and the subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in the pseudo-continuous change pattern. On the basis of whether or not, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. As a result, the player can be given a different sense of expectation in each re-variation in the re-variation display by the execution mode of the notice effect that displays the mini character image, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a revariable display can be increased with the relationship between the frequency | count of the revariation in a revariable display pattern like a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected.

  (28) As shown in (H) of FIG. 77, the fifth notice effect (group display) is executed by displaying the same type of character image 94 on the effect display device 9. 112 (A) to 112 (F), when the big hit is made, the number of character images to be displayed is large in the order of group display C> group display B> group display A, and when the reach is shifted, group display A> group. Since the selection ratio is high in the order of display B> group display C, depending on the number of character images 94 to be displayed, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after execution is different. In an easy-to-understand manner such as the number of character images 94, the player can be made aware of the reliability of the big hit gaming state.

  (29) As shown in (G), (H) of FIG. 77 and S843g to S8431 of FIG. 124, the fifth notice effect (group notice) is executed on condition that the operation button 30 is operated. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (30) In the first embodiment, as described as a modification of the movable member notice, a plurality of notices with different movable bodies operating in a movable member including a plurality of movable members (movable members such as small movable parts). It is executed in the pattern (movable member operation A to movable member operation C), and the reliability of the big hit gaming state after execution is different according to the notice pattern, so it is easy to understand which movable body operates. It is possible to make the player recognize the reliability of the big hit gaming state. Moreover, you may make it use the several movable member provided independently separately for a movable member member notice. In that case, control is performed such that the first movable member is operated by the movable member operation A, the second movable member is operated by the movable member operation B, and the third movable member is operated by the movable member operation C.

  (31) As shown in FIG. 75, the movable member 84 operates in any one of the movable member operations A to C which are a plurality of types of notice effect modes having different operation modes (for example, operation speed). Since the third notice effect (movable member notice) is executed in a plurality of kinds of notice effect forms in which the operation modes of the movable member 84 are different, variations of the effect relating to the re-variable display can be varied, and the game is interesting. Can be improved.

  (32) In FIGS. 108 and 109, the ratio at which the mini character display C on which the third mini character image 963 is displayed varies depending on whether or not it is a big hit, and also varies depending on the variation of each stage of the pseudo-ream. As shown, the fourth notice effect is displayed as the fourth notice effect because the selection ratio of the third mini character image 963 having the highest reliability in the specific gaming state in the character image can be varied. Since the player has a sense of expectation for the mini character image, the interest of the game can be improved based on the mini character image.

  (33) S1705 of FIG. 119, S1710, S1715, S1719, S547 of FIG. 118, and S547 of FIG. 118, for each notice effect of button notice, first step up notice, second step up notice, movable member notice, and mini character notice. In S552, S557, S1705, S1710, S1715, and S1719 in FIG. 139, and S547a, S552a, and S557a in FIG. As shown in the prohibition process that prohibits the selection of the notice pattern with lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous fluctuation display for each notice effect of the up notice, the movable material notice, and the mini character notice, When a notice pattern for a notice effect is selected The direction of advance notice pattern selected later, as compared with advance notice pattern selected previously, such is not low reliability as a big hit after the announcement attraction is performed, notice pattern is selected. As a result, despite the fact that the player's expectation has been enhanced by executing the re-variation of the pseudo-ream, the degree of reliability for the big hit by the pre-announcement effect is realized by the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the re-variation of the pseudo-ream. It is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the game will decrease.

  (34) As shown in S520 of FIG. 115, S845 of FIG. 124, and ST15 and ST16a of FIG. 128, on condition that the operation button 30 is operated during the variation display executed in the pseudo variation pattern. 115, and the button announcement effect is executed with the notice pattern (notice message) as the notice effect mode selected by the notice setting process shown in S531 to S542 in FIG. 117. The player's willingness to participate can be increased. Further, in FIGS. 80A and 80B, a table necessary for the notice effect at each stage of fluctuation is selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series. As described above, the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different in the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 to 5 times). Therefore, for the notice effect that is executed on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated, the total of the re-variation (the variation including the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation during one variation period) executed in a pseudo-continuous manner. Depending on the number of times, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. Thus, the player's expectation is enhanced with respect to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the result of the jackpot determination by the effect mode of the notice effect executed when the operation button 30 is operated. Can do. Furthermore, because the selection ratio of the notice pattern in the re-variation at each stage is different, even if it is the same pseudo-ream, the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different if the change times when the operation button 30 is operated is different. Variations in the production related to the re-variation display can be increased by the relevance between the number of times of re-variation in the quasi-ream and the selected notice effect mode. By increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game, increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations, and increasing the variation of re-variation effects, It is possible to improve the fun and the fun of the game. In addition, as shown in S535 to S538 in FIG. 117, the announcement control pattern of each fluctuation time is determined collectively before the start of a series of fluctuation display as a pseudo-continuous, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 during the fluctuation display can be controlled. The control burden (processing burden) can be reduced.

  (35) Further, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times to 5 times) shows the notice pattern (notice message) for each change of the change. The selection ratio is different. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, with regard to the notice effect that is executed when the operation button 30 is operated, the number of times in the pseudo-ream is the time when the operation button 30 is operated. A plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios depending on whether the notice effect is a fluctuation. As a result, regarding the re-variation that can be related to the result of the jackpot determination by the effect mode of the notice effect performed when the operation button 30 is operated, the number of times in the pseudo ream when the operation button 30 is operated Based on whether it is a notice effect, a different expectation can be given to the player at each re-variation in the pseudo-ream, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. Furthermore, the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-series and the selected notice effect mode are selected, such as the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different if the number of times of fluctuation when the operation button 30 is operated is different even in the same pseudo-series. Due to the relevance, it is possible to increase the variation of effects related to the re-variable display. This increases the player's willingness to participate in the game, gives the player a different sense of expectation in each re-variation, and increases the variation of the re-variation effect, making the re-variation effect interesting Can improve the interest of the game.

  (36) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. When the execution of the notice effect is selected in the change display when the fluctuating variation pattern is selected, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are displayed in the selected notice effect mode during the change display. Such a step-up notice is executed. That is, as shown in S533 and S533c of FIG. 117, when the selection to execute the step-up notice effect is made, among the step-up notice effects of a plurality of systems such as the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, The step-up notice effect to be executed is selected. Tables (D) to (F) and (A) to (C) in FIG. 99 select the tables necessary for the notice effect at each stage of fluctuation according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 to 5 times). As shown in FIGS. 84, 85, 100, and 101, the tables selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 times, 3 times) of the pseudo-series are different in the selection ratio of the notice step. As shown, for a plurality of step-up notice effects, a plurality of types of notice effect forms are selected at different selection ratios according to the total number of re-variations executed in the pseudo-continuous change pattern. Thus, in response to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the player's expectation is enhanced by the effect mode of the notice effect by the plurality of notice steps. Can be. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding a pseudo | simulation series can be increased by the relevance of the frequency | count of re-variation in the fluctuation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series, and the notification effect aspect selected. Increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations in the quasi-ream, and increasing the variation of the affairs related to the quasi-ream, improving the fun of the effects related to the quasi-ream and enhancing the interest of the game Can be improved. Also, a step-up notice effect to be executed is selected from the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, which are step-up notice effects of a plurality of systems. Depending on the total number of re-variations performed in step 1, the multiple types of notice effect modes are selected at different selection ratios. There is a possibility that the notice effect will continue. As a result, when a certain step-up notice effect is ended in the middle of the variable display (when it is interrupted), a state in which another notice effect is continued during the period until the display result is derived thereafter may occur. Therefore, the interest of the player is not significantly reduced, and it is possible to prevent the presentation time of the variable display from being wasted.

  (37) Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times, 3 times) is a step-up notice notice pattern (notice The selection ratio of step) is different. Therefore, for multiple step-up notices such as the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios depending on how many notices are produced in the pseudo-series. Selected. As a result, the re-variation that may be related to the result of the jackpot determination is related to the number of times of the notice effect in the quasi-continuation, and the effect of the notice effect by the multi-step notice step is changed according to the effect form of the notice effect. It is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation in each re-variation in the game, and to increase the player's sense of expectation. In addition, even for the same pseudo-ream, variations in the effects related to re-variable display can be achieved due to the relevance between the multiple stages of the notice step and the notice effect mode selected, such as the selection ratio of the notice pattern differing when the fluctuation times are different. Can be increased. As a result, giving the player a different sense of expectation at each re-variation, and increasing the variation of the re-variation effect, improving the interest of the re-variation effect and improving the fun of the game it can. In addition, a step-up notice effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of step-up notice effects, and the step-up notice effect of the plurality of systems corresponds to the number of times of the notice effect in the pseudo-series. In addition, since a plurality of types of notice effects are selected at different selection ratios, there is a possibility that other notice effects may continue even if a certain notice effect is ended among a plurality of step-up notice effects. . As a result, when a certain step-up notice effect is ended in the middle of the variable display (when it is interrupted), a state in which another notice effect is continued during the period until the display result is derived thereafter may occur. Therefore, the interest of the player is not significantly reduced, and it is possible to prevent the presentation time of the variable display from being wasted.

  (38) As shown in S101 to S105 of FIG. 36, a variation pattern including a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. If the execution of the first notice effect is selected in the change display when the pseudo-variation change pattern is selected, the notice effect is displayed in the selected notice effect mode before reaching the reach state during the change display. Be started. For the first step-up notice, the tables necessary for the notice effect at each stage of change are selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 to 5 times) of the pseudo-series in FIGS. 80 (D) to (F). As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, tables selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (two times and three times) differ in the selection ratio of the notice pattern (notice step). Therefore, for the notice effect of the first step-up notice, there are a plurality of types according to the total number of re-changes (changes including initial change and subsequent re-change during one change period) executed in a pseudo-continuous manner. The notice pattern is selected at a different selection ratio. Thereby, the player's expectation can be enhanced with respect to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the result of the big hit determination by the effect mode of the notice effect by the plurality of notice steps. In addition, because the selection ratio of the notice pattern at the re-variation in each stage is different, even if the same pseudo-ream, the selection pattern of the notice pattern is different if the fluctuation times are different. Depending on the relevance to the notice effect mode, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect related to the re-variable display. By increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations, and increasing the variations of re-variation effects, the fun of re-variation effects will be improved and the interest of the game will be improved. Can do. As for the step-up notice, as shown in S535 to S538 of FIG. 117, by determining collectively the notice pattern of each fluctuation time for the step-up notice before the start of a series of variable display that becomes a pseudo-continuous, It is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 during the variable display.

  (39) Further, as shown in FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times, 3 times) is a step-up notice notice pattern (notice The selection ratio of step) is different. Therefore, for the step-up notice, a plurality of kinds of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios according to the notice effect at the number of times of fluctuation in the pseudo-ream. As a result, the re-variation that may be related to the result of the jackpot determination is related to the number of times of the notice effect in the quasi-continuation, and the effect of the notice effect by the multi-step notice step is changed according to the effect form of the notice effect. It is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation in each re-variation in the game, and to increase the player's sense of expectation. In addition, even for the same pseudo-ream, variations in the effects related to re-variable display can be achieved due to the relevance between the multiple stages of the notice step and the notice effect mode selected, such as the selection ratio of the notice pattern differing when the fluctuation times are different. Can be increased. As a result, giving the player a different sense of expectation at each re-variation, and increasing the variation of the re-variation effect, improving the interest of the re-variation effect and improving the fun of the game it can.

  (40) When selecting whether or not to execute the notice effect, a plurality of kinds of notice effects with different timing and different notice modes, such as the button notice in FIG. 70 and the first step-up notice in FIG. A notice effect to be executed is selected from the above, and a notice effect form is selected from a plurality of types of notice effect aspects for the selected notice effect. As a result, the variation of the pseudo-ream fluctuation display can be varied due to the relevance between the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream fluctuation pattern and the selected notice effect mode. This can be further improved.

  (41) In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152, in the non-probability change state and the probability change state, when it is determined that there is no notice effect, there is a notice effect (both button notice and first step-up notice) ) Is different from the time when it is determined (the probability variation state has a higher proportion of the absence of the notice effect than the non-probability variation state). Further, since the ratio of selecting the button notice is lower in the probability changing state and the ratio of selecting the first step-up notice is higher than in the non-probability changing state, the button notice and the first step-up notice are selected. Each notice pattern is selected at a different ratio between the non-probability change state and the probability change state. Thereby, when selecting the notice effect form when executing the notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effect forms, the notice effect form is selected at different selection ratios in the non-probable change state and the probability change state. For a plurality of types of notice effect forms, the ratio of appearance varies depending on the state. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved further.

  (42) Common notice selection table of FIGS. 148 (D) to 148 (F), multiple notice step batch decision table of FIGS. 149 (A) to (C), and plural notice steps of FIGS. 150 (A) to 150 (E). As shown in the batch determination table using the batch determination table, the multiple step-up notification effects such as the first step-up notification and the second step-up notification are selected simultaneously. In some cases, since the respective notice effect modes of the step-up notice effects of the plurality of systems are collectively selected and determined, the processing burden when selecting and determining the notice effect aspects can be reduced.

  (43) As shown in the seventh embodiment, based on the pending storage data, a notice is given that the display result of the variable display that is a big hit will be a big hit over a plurality of variable displays before the derived display is performed. With regard to the continuous notice effect, the following effects can be obtained by performing the same effect as the button notice effect described above. On the condition that the operation button 30 has been operated, the notice effect is executed in the selected notice effect mode such as the notice message of the button notice and the notice step of the step-up notice, so that the player is willing to participate in the game. Can be increased. As for the notice effect that is executed on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated, as shown in the tables (FIGS. 82 and 83) used for selecting the notice pattern of the button notice, it is determined to control the jackpot. The selection ratio of the notice effect mode differs depending on the notice effect in the number of times of change display in the plurality of times of change display before the display result of the change display is derived and displayed. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition, a plurality of types of notice effect modes in each variable display when the notice effect is executed are selected at different ratios. Thereby, what happens when the operation button 30 is operated with respect to the variation pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot depending on the effect mode of the notice effect executed when the operation button 30 is operated? Based on whether it is a notice effect in the second variation display, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such a plurality of variation displays, so as to increase the player's expectation can do. Furthermore, depending on the relevance between the number of variable displays when executing the announcement effect over a plurality of variable displays in continuous notice and the selected notice effect mode, there are variations of effects related to the multiple variable displays. Can be increased. By giving the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such multiple variation displays, and increasing the variation of the representation related to multiple variation displays, the effect of the representation related to multiple variation displays Can improve the interest of the game.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  (2) In each of the embodiments described above, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit another board (for example, (Sound / lamp board having the functions of the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) An effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect display device 9 and the decorative design indicators 9a and 9b are changed. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control to control. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (3) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect part, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Since it is configured to execute the corresponding notice effect, even if two special symbol indicators (special symbol indicator 8a and special symbol indicator 8b) are provided, the player is informed of the progress of the game ( It is possible to make it easy to grasp which variation display means is producing an effect corresponding to the variation display.

  (4) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect component, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Since it is configured to execute a variation display effect according to the corresponding variation mode, even if two special symbol indicators (special symbol indicator 8a, special symbol indicator 8b) are provided, It is possible to make it easier to grasp the progress status of the game (such as which special symbol display is producing an effect corresponding to the variable display), and abundant game variations.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, a display composed of two LEDs is used as a decorative symbol display. However, the decorative symbol display is not limited to such a configuration. For example, you may comprise one or more 7 segment LED. In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not provided with a decorative symbol display.

  (6) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (7) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (8) As described above, in the special symbol process, when the start port switch passing process is provided separately for the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, for example, a process for determining a big hit Some processes may be made common by executing a common process routine.

  (9) In embodiment mentioned above, the example which comprises the 1st special symbol indicator 8a and the 2nd special symbol indicator 8b by the same kind of indicator (7 segment LED) was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured by different types of displays. Specifically, one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be a seven-segment display and the other may be a dot matrix display. One of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a 7-segment display, and the other is composed of an LED display such as the decorative symbol display 9a, 9b. May be.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, not limited to this, the normal symbol display 10 is not provided, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32, the display variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. Good.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, not limited to this, the normal symbol display 10 is not provided, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32, the display variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. Good.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variation such as the number of variations), and the variation is performed using the effect control command. Instructing the pattern, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variations such as the number of variations) based on the rendering control command, and varies the pseudo-series. An example of executing variation display with patterns was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 may determine a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous (an effect pattern including a re-change notification effect). For example, on the game control microcomputer 560 side, fluctuations in pseudo-series using S105A and S105B shown in FIG. 36 (random 7 in FIG. 15 and pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B shown in FIGS. 28 and 29). The processing of these steps may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 without executing the pattern determination). In this case, it suffices that the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations and the number of changes in pseudo-continuations are associated with the variation pattern determined based on random 4 in S105 of FIG. As a result of such association, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command indicating the change pattern determined in S105, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received change. A specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series may be determined based on the presence / absence of the pseudo-series stored corresponding to the pattern command and the information on the number of times of variation in the pseudo-series.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to execute a pseudo-ream, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to execute a pseudo-ream. Is received, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the button notice effect is executed only when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected during the operation effective period is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected during the operation valid period, the effect of button notification may be executed at a predetermined rate.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the number of executions of the fluctuation in the pseudo-series for the button notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable member notice, the mini-character notice, and the group notice performed in the pseudo-rendition. As the number increases, the example shows that the reliability that is a big hit after the notice is high. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reliability that is a big hit may be constant regardless of whether the number of executions of the fluctuation in the pseudo-run is large or small. That is, the reliability of the big hit is constant, but the button notice effect, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable member notice, the mini character notice, and the group notice effect in the control mode as described above. May be executed.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the button notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable member notice, and the mini character notice are shown in S547, S552, S557 in FIG. 118, and S1705, S1710 in FIG. 119. As described in S1715, etc., the prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice pattern having lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variation display is executed. As described above, in order to prohibit the selection of the notice pattern having lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variation display, the notice pattern determination table (the notice message decision table, the notice step decision table, As the movable member operation determination table and the mini character display determination table, a table that can select only the advance notice pattern having a reliability higher than the reliability of the advance notice pattern that can be selected in the previous fluctuation times may be used.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, an example has been shown in which whether or not to give a notice of button notice or first step-up notice is determined by the notice pattern type determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, it is determined using a separate notice availability determination table that determines whether to give a button notice or a first step-up notice, and according to the result of the decision, It may be determined using the notice pattern type determination table which notice type is selected for the first step-up notice.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 and the like, an example in which the notice pattern type determination table is provided separately when it is a big hit, when the reach is shifted, and when the non-reach is shifted. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the notice pattern type determination table, the notice pattern type determination table may be provided separately for a big hit and when a big hit occurs. In addition, the notice pattern type determination may be provided separately for reach (including both the case of losing after reach and the case of big hit after reach) and the case of not reaching. In addition, the notice pattern type determination table may be provided separately when the reach is lost and when the reach is not reached. In addition, the notice pattern type determination table may be provided separately for the big hit and when the reach is lost. In addition, the determination of the notice pattern type may be provided separately for a big hit and when a non-reach is lost.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, an example in which the button notice selection table is provided separately when a big hit, when reach is lost, and when non-reach is lost is shown. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice selection table may be provided separately for a big hit and a case of a loss. Further, the button notice selection table may be provided separately for a big hit and when a reach is lost. Similarly, the first step-up notice selection table, the second step-up notice selection table, the movable member notice selection table, and the mini-character notice selection table are provided separately for a big hit and a case of a loss. Also good. In addition, the step-up notice selection table may be provided separately for the big hit and when the reach is lost.

  (20) As for the presentation modes of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice described above, any kind of presentation is possible as long as the player can recognize the fact when stepping up. An aspect may be sufficient. For example, the production mode of each notice step may be such that the reach state is determined in the second step and the super reach state is determined in the third step. When such a production mode is adopted, the reach of the game can be improved by stepping up the reach.

  (21) The pseudo-rendition effects described above are executed in the first effect of the effect mode for notifying the number of re-variations executed in the re-variable display pattern for performing the pseudo-ream effect, and in the fluctuating variable display pattern. Either production of the second production that does not notify the number of times of re-variation may be used. Moreover, you may make it provide the fluctuation | variation display pattern means which makes it possible to select and perform either of these 1st effects and a 2nd effect.

  (22) As the notice effects such as the button notice, the first step up notice, the second step up notice, the movable member notice, the mini character notice, and the group notice, the notice effect using only the image, only the sound is used. The notice effect used, the notice effect using only the movable member, the notice effect using the image and the sound, the notice effect using the image and the movable member, the notice effect using the sound and the movable member, and the image Of the notice effects using the sound and the movable member, any kind of notice effect pattern may be used. Further, the notice effect may be selected and executed from among the notice effect patterns in a predetermined order, or may be selected and executed at random from these notice effect patterns.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, in a variation display when the re-variation display pattern is selected by the variation display pattern selection means, a state in which a notice effect for notifying that the specific gaming state is entered can be executed. An example is shown in which the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a notice effect selecting unit that selects whether or not to perform the notice effect and selects a notice effect mode from a plurality of types of the notice effect aspects. . However, such a notice effect selecting means may be provided in the game control microcomputer 560. In that case, information indicating whether or not the notice effect selected by the notice effect selecting means is in an executable state and information indicating the selected notice effect mode when the notice effect is executed The control command sends the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect control as described above according to the information indicated by the command.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, as a prohibition process for prohibiting the next (current) change in the next (current) change in the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the previous change in the “pseudo-ream”. , Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change, the reliability of the jackpot than the previous change based on the data table (notice message decision table, notice step decision table, etc.) for the next (this time) change When a lower one is selected, in the next (current) fluctuation, the execution of the one selected based on the data table is prohibited, and a control for executing the stored notice effect in the previous fluctuation is performed. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Forbidden processing may be as follows. The following prohibition process may be applied to each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display.

  a Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change. When a random number value (SR8, SR9, etc.) having a lower jackpot reliability than the previous fluctuation is extracted based on the data table for the next (current) fluctuation, a predetermined value is added to the extracted random number value. A calculation (for example, four arithmetic operations such as adding the value of the refresh register) is added, and control is performed so that a notice effect having a reliability higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change is selected.

  b Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change. In addition, for all types of notice effects to be selected, a data table is provided so that only the notice effects that are higher than the reliability of the jackpot of each notice effect can be selected. Select a data table that can select only the notice effect that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect, and use the data table to determine the reliability that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change. Control is made so that the notice effect is selected.

  c Stores the type of notice effect in the previous change. In the effect control microcomputer 100, the data table stored in the ROM is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM so that the data in the data table can be changed. Change the contents of the data table for the next (this time) change so that only the notice effect that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect can be selected according to the previous notice effect (data such as distribution of random values) Then, using such a changeable data table, control is performed so that a notice effect having a reliability higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change is selected.

  (25) In the embodiment described above, button announcements, first step-up announcements, second step-up announcements, movable member announcements, mini-character announcements, and group announcements are used as the announcement effects performed in the pseudo-ream. The notice effect to the effect will be shown. As a notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream, a notice effect that a reach is achieved by a predetermined notice pattern such as a button notice, a first step up notice, a second step up notice, a movable member notice, a mini character notice, and a group notice, etc. May be executed.

  (26) The step-up notice shown in the above-described embodiment is provided with a plurality of systems (two systems) of step-up notices (two kinds of notice effects with different step-up image display contents) and executed step-up notices. As for the notice, the ratio of which one of the plurality of kinds of notice effect forms is selected and executed is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the step-up notice effect mode, the step-up image display content is the same, but the step-up progress degree is different (one with fast progress and one with slow progress). It may be included as a type of effect. In addition, as for the effect form of the step-up notice, the image display contents of the step-up may be the same, but those having different step-up start timings may be included as a plurality of kinds of effect forms. Further, the step-up notice shown in the above-described embodiment may be configured by only a single system (one system) step-up notice.

  (27) For the notice effects such as the button notice and the first step-up notice shown in the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect and the determination of the notice effect mode may be sequentially performed. Deciding whether or not to execute a notice effect and a notice effect mode (including both a notice effect type such as button notice and first step-up notice and a specific notice pattern such as notice message and notice step) May be performed simultaneously. In addition, regarding the selection / decision of the notice effect mode, the selection / decision of the type of notice effect (type of notice effect such as button notice and first step up notice) and the notice pattern (specific notice message and notice step) are selected. The selection and selection of the notice pattern may be sequentially performed, and the selection and selection of the notice effect type (the notice effect type such as the button notice and the first step-up notice) and the notice pattern (the notice message and the notice step) may be performed. Such a specific notice pattern) may be selected and determined at the same time.

  (28) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. The notice effect selecting means executes one or more step up notice effects out of a predetermined number of step up notice effects (first step up notice and second step up notice) that can be divided into a plurality of systems and executed simultaneously. (S533, S533c in FIG. 117), and when the notice effect execution means is selected by the notice effect selection means to execute the plurality of step-up notice effects, a plurality of step-ups are performed. The notice effect is simultaneously executed (FIGS. 71, 74, and 150).

  (29) With regard to sudden probability change (surprise accuracy), such as when it is not a big hit in a pseudo-ream, display an out-of-order symbol in a state that does not become reach, and then perform an effect that suddenly changes the probability (surprise accuracy) It may be.

  (30) (A) to (C) in FIG. 80, (A) to (C) in FIG. 81, (A) to (C) in FIG. 91, and (A) to (C) in FIG. A preview selection table for the preview effect, a preview selection table for the second preview effect shown in FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (C), a preview selection table for the third preview effect shown in FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (C), and As shown in FIGS. 107 (A) to 107 (C), the data selection table to be used may be made common as follows. For example, when there is no quasi-continuation, 2nd quasi-continuation change notice, 1st variability notice, 3rd quasi-reaction series, 3rd or 4th quasi-change notice, and 5 quasi-continuation notices For the fifth change notice, the data table to be selected is made common (however, FIG. 80 (C), FIG. 81 (C), FIG. 91 (C), FIG. 94 (C), FIG. 99 (C), FIG. 103). (C), as shown in FIG. 107 (C), when there is no data table corresponding to the fifth pseudo-continuation, there is no pseudo-continuation, two or more pseudo-continuations, the first notice of the first fluctuation, three pseudo-continuations, The data table to be selected is made common for the third and fourth change notices in the case of four consecutive times). For example, taking the big hit button notice selection table of FIG. 80A as an example, data to be selected for the first notice message determination table 201A, the third notice message determination table 201C, and the sixth notice message determination table 201F. Standardize the table. Also, when sharing such a data table, about the first and second fluctuation notices in the case of 3 pseudo-reams, 4 times of pseudo-reams, and the third and fourth notices of change in the third and fourth pseudo-reams, The data table to be selected is shared (however, FIG. 80C, FIG. 81C, FIG. 91C, FIG. 94C, FIG. 99C, FIG. 103C, and FIG. 107). Except when there is no data table corresponding to the fifth pseudo-continuation as in C)). For example, taking the big hit button notice selection table of FIG. 80 (A) as an example, the data table to be selected is made common to the second notice message determination table 201B and the fifth notice message determination table 201E. 86, the data table to be used is made common in the same manner as the notice selection table for the first notice effect and the notice selection table for the second notice effect. May be. If such data tables are shared, the number of data tables can be reduced, so that the storage capacity required for the ROM on the effect control microcomputer 100 side can be reduced. Furthermore, when a big hit is made, even when it is not a pseudo-ream, it is possible to make a notice with a high reliability for making a big hit.

  (31) The above-mentioned chance may be displayed when the display result of a sudden big hit is displayed, or may be displayed when the round hit is 15 rounds regardless of whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit.

  (32) With regard to the first notice effect to the fourth notice effect described above, as the notice pattern selected when the non-reach is lost in the quasi-continuous, the reliability that becomes the big hit as the later change of the quasi-continuous change Numerical data of various tables may be set so that a high-priority notice pattern is not easily selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being overwhelmed in the non-reach fluctuation display that does not result in the reach state.

  (33) The mini character notice described above can be defined as follows. A mini character notice is a notice image that appears when a symbol changes at a high speed (a state in which the symbol is changed in a display mode that is difficult to visually recognize) after the symbol change starts. For example, it is a sub-notice that is displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize from the first notice effect to the third notice effect and the fifth notice effect, and that starts executing the notice prior to the main notice. Here, “a display mode that is difficult to visually recognize” corresponds to one provided with at least one of the following (a) to (e). (A) Display a preview image related to the background image (which constitutes a part of the background image) (for example, a vehicle such as “car” or “bicycle” at the position of “road” in the background of “townscape”) Or display "characters" at the "signboard" position.) (B) The size of the sub-notice (mini-character notice) image is displayed as an image smaller than the main notice image. (C) The size of the sub-notice (mini-character notice) image is displayed as an image smaller than the design image. (D) When displaying the sub-notice (mini-character notice) image, do not execute a synchronized effect by voice, light emitter, etc. (not actively notify). (E) To display a secondary notice (mini character notice) image on the back side (lower priority of overlap display) than the design image at a position overlapping with the changing design image (effect design image).

  (34) The modification examples of the mini character notice as the sub notice mentioned above are listed below. (A) The appearance rate of the sub-notice (mini-character notice) is preferably set to be higher than the appearance rate of the main notice. Thereby, even when the main notice does not appear, the frequency of occurrence of the sub notice can be increased, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored. (B) When making the symbol image semi-transparent (transparent) while all symbols (production symbols) are changing (during high-speed fluctuation), a preview image is displayed at a position overlapping the changing symbol image. The notice (mini character notice) can be made more difficult to recognize. If you do not want to be semi-transparent (transparent), you can display a preview image at a position that overlaps with the design image, so that you can get a glimpse of the preview image only between the scrolling design images It can be difficult to recognize. (C) If the movable member moves on the display screen, the preview image may be displayed by displaying the preview image on the back of the movable member and then operating the movable member. (D) Sub-notice (mini-character notice) may be executed simultaneously at a plurality of locations on the display screen. Thereby, it is possible to make the sub-notice more difficult to recognize. In addition, the display mode of the sub-notice (mini-character notice) is not only the presence / absence of displaying a predetermined notice image, but also the type, color, size, shape, position, pattern, character type, display start of the image to be displayed. Depending on the timing, the jackpot, the reliability of the notice, or the subject of the notice may be different.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, as the big hit game state that is a specific game state advantageous to the player, the two round big hit game state that is the first specific game state, and the game more than the first specific game state The example using 15 round big hit game state which is the 2nd specific game state advantageous to a person was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are as long as the second specific gaming state can be determined to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state. For example, other types of jackpot gaming states such as the following jackpot gaming state may be used. For example, the second specific gaming state is controlled such that the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than that of the first specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is the first specific gaming state. The number of rounds controlled to be greater than the number of rounds, and the second specific gaming state is paid out for one winning ball to the big winning opening than the first specific gaming state Of those controlled to increase the number of unit prize balls, a specific gaming state in which any one control or a combination of a plurality of controls is performed may be used.

  (36) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display effect of a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern a. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the revariation effect of the pattern b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern c. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern d. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern d. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-variation production | presentation by which some production | designated symbols carry out a slip fluctuation | variation after displaying a chance aim symbol as a temporary stop symbol, and it becomes a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-variation production | presentation by which some production | designated symbols carry out a slip fluctuation | variation after displaying a chance aim symbol as a temporary stop symbol, and it becomes a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, and a probability variation promotion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pseudo-ream effect pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pseudo-ream effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of a variable display of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol and effect in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol and effect in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol and effect in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the effect display apparatus 9 when the button notice of the 1st notice effect is performed as an example of the notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus when the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are performed as an example of a notice effect. It is a timing chart for explaining reach branch notice as the first notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the effect display apparatus for demonstrating the button branch notice as a 1st notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the 1st notice effect and the 2nd notice effect when a pseudo-variable display is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect | action operation in the effect display apparatus of a movable member when the movable member notice is performed as an example of the 3rd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in an effect display apparatus when the mini character notice as an example of the 4th notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in an effect display apparatus when the group notice as an example of the 5th notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st step-up notice content determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a button notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a basic development notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notification message determination table-a 6th notification message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th notification message determination table-a 10th notification message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notification step determination table-a 6th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th notification step determination table-a 10th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice reliability selection table as a data table used in order to select the table used when determining the display mode of the notice reliability display which shows the reliability of a notice effect when performing a notice effect. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st color reliability display determination table-a 6th color reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th color reliability display determination table-a 9th color reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st pattern reliability display determination table-a 6th pattern reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th pattern reliability display determination table-a 9th pattern reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a reach branch notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 21st notification step determination table-the 26th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 27th notification step determination table-the 30th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a button branch notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 31st notification step determination table-the 36th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 37th notification step determination table-the 40th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice content determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 2nd notice effect notice pattern execution determination table memorize | stored in ROM in the microcomputer for effect control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table as a data table used in order to select the table used when determining the concrete notice pattern after the presence or absence of execution of the 2nd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 11th notification step determination table-the 16th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 17th notice step determination table-a 20th notice step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 3rd notice effect notice pattern execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table used in order to select the table used when determining a notice pattern after determining the presence or absence of execution of the 3rd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st movable member operation | movement determination table-a 6th movable member operation | movement determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th movable member operation | movement determination table-a 10th movable member operation | movement determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 4th notice effect notice pattern execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notification selection table used in order to select the table used when determining the notification pattern after determining the execution or non-execution of the fourth notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st mini character display determination table-a 6th mini character display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th mini character display determination table-a 10th mini character display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 5th notice effect notice pattern execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table used in order to select the table used when determining the notice pattern after deciding the presence or absence of execution of the 5th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st group display determination table-a 5th group display determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect performed according to the content of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation period at the time of implement | achieving the fluctuation pattern of a pseudo-continuous production, and a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement when the notification effect of button notification is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production | presentation operation | movement when the notice effect of the basic development notice as a 1st step-up notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production | presentation operation | movement when the notice effect of reach branch notice as a 1st step-up notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing production | presentation operation | movement when the notice effect of the button branch notice as a 1st step-up notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the advancing example of effect operation | movement when the notification effect of a 2nd step-up notification is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the advancing example of presentation operation | movement when the notice effect of a movable member notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production | presentation operation | movement when the notice production | presentation of a mini character notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement when the notice effect of group notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in the effect control process process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st announcement effect determination setting process by 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table by 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st warning message batch determination table-a 3rd warning message batch determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 4th notice message batch determination table-a 6th notice message batch determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notice step collective decision table-a 3rd notice step collective decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 4th notice step collective decision table-a 6th notice step collective decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table as a data table used in order to select the table used when determining the specific notice pattern after determining the presence or absence of execution of the 2nd notice effect by 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 7th notice step collective decision table-the 9th notice step collective decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 10th notice step collective decision table-the 12th notice step collective decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table by 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st multiple notification step collective determination table-a 3rd multiple notification step collective determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 4th multiple notification step batch determination table-a 6th multiple notification step batch determination table. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the 1st notice effect and the 2nd notice effect when the change display of the pseudo | simulation series by 5th Embodiment is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 1st notice effect presentation pattern type determination table by 6th Embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

  9 effect display device, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 560 microcomputer for game control, 100 microcomputer for effect control.

Claims (7)

A specific display result in which a display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is provided with a variable display unit having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when
Whether to control to the specific gaming state and whether the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state or a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state Pre-determining means for determining before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed,
Specific game state control means for controlling the first specific game state or the second specific game state as the specific game state based on the determination by the prior determination means;
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, the special display result that temporarily becomes a non-specific display result is temporarily suspended from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed in the variable display unit. After that, a variation display of a plurality of predetermined types of identification information including a re-variation display pattern for performing a re-variation display in which re-variation is performed once or a plurality of times is performed again in all variation display areas. A variation display pattern selection means for selecting one variation display pattern from the patterns;
Based on the variation display pattern selected by the variation display pattern selection means, the variation display execution means for executing the variation display of the identification information,
The re-variable display pattern temporarily stops a non-special display result other than the special display result, and changes the identification information temporarily stopped in a part of the variable display area constituting the non-special display result. A temporary display of the special display result, including a variation display pattern for executing the re-variation,
When the variation display pattern selecting means selects the second variation display pattern as the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern selection means selects the first specified game state as the first specified game state according to the number of times the second variation display pattern is selected. A gaming machine, wherein a variation display pattern is selected so that a ratio controlled by a gaming state is different.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the re-variable display pattern temporarily stops the identification information forming the reach state as the non-special display result.   The variable display pattern selecting means selects the re-variable display pattern as a variable display pattern, and when the number of re-variation executions in the selected re-variable display pattern is the same, The proportion of the specific game state controlled to the first specific game state varies depending on the number of times that the special display result is temporarily stopped by changing the temporarily stopped identification information. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a variation display pattern is selected. Reach determination means for determining whether or not to change the display state of the identification information to a predetermined reach state when it is determined by the prior determination means not to control the specific gaming state;
Based on the determination result by the reach determination means, further comprises a variable display pattern type determination means for determining the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types,
The fluctuation display pattern selection means selects a fluctuation display pattern from the fluctuation display patterns included in the fluctuation display pattern type determined by the fluctuation display pattern type determination means,
The variable display pattern type determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types including the re-variable display pattern in response to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determining means. ,
The variable display pattern selection means is determined not to reach the reach state by the reach determination means, and the variable display pattern type including the re-variable display pattern is determined by the variable display pattern type determination means. Correspondingly, the non-reach variation display pattern for executing the re-variation display can be selected. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein Notification means for performing predetermined notification when the re-variable display is executed;
When the fluctuation display executing means executes the re-variable display, a notification effect means for executing the notification effect in a notification mode selected from a plurality of types of notification modes as a notification effect for performing notification by the notification unit. In addition,
The notification effect means performs a notification effect performed in a notification mode in which any one of the plurality of notification modes is selected, and a notification mode in which any one of the plurality of notification modes is selected and combined. The notification effect performed in can be executed,
5. The notification effect executed by the notification effect means has different reliability depending on the selected notification mode after the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine described in 1.   6. The re-variable display pattern according to claim 1, wherein the reliability of the specific gaming state is set differently according to a variable display area in which the temporarily stopped identification information is changed. A gaming machine according to any one of the above. A variation display unit having a plurality of variation display areas for varyingly displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified based on the fact that the variation display start condition is established after the start condition is established, and the variation display unit When the display result of the identification information derived and displayed in is a predetermined specific display result, the gaming machine controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means for holding and storing data relating to a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied until the start condition is satisfied;
Whether or not the data stored in the holding storage means is controlled to the specific gaming state based on the display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition before the start condition based on the establishment of the start condition is satisfied. And the display result of the identification information derives whether the specific game state is the first specific game state or the second specific game state which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state A pre-determining means to determine before being displayed;
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, the variable display unit includes a predetermined variable display pattern of a plurality of types of identification information including a variable display pattern for stopping a special display result as a non-specific display result. A variation display pattern selection means for selecting one variation display pattern;
Based on the variation display pattern selected by the variation display pattern selection means, the variation display execution means for executing the variation display of the identification information,
The variable display pattern selection means derives a display result of the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state when the prior determination means determines to control to the specific gaming state. Select the special variation display pattern that stops the special display result for multiple variations before the display.
The special variable display pattern temporarily stops non-special display results other than the special display result, and changes the identification information temporarily stopped in some variable display areas constituting the non-special display result. Includes an identification information change variation pattern that stops and displays special display results,
The variation display pattern selection means selects the special variation display pattern for a plurality of variation displays before the display result of the variation display based on the establishment of the start condition determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state is derived and displayed. Sometimes, the variable display pattern is selected so that the ratio controlled to the first specific game state differs as the specific game state according to the number of executions of the variable display in which the special display result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by

Images